BPC 10.0 Ramp-Up Slides

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10 0 Version for MicrosoftConsolidation 10.0, Version for Microsoft

Introduction - Delta Changes Summary

Introduction - Delta Changes SummaryLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain all the new SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for Microsoft Delta changes

© 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2RKT

1. Architecture and Platform Support ServerClient and Browser

2. EPM Clients Web User InterfaceWeb User Interface EPM Office Add-in

3. Functional EnhancementsAutomated Variance Analysis (AVA)Journal reporting enhancement


2. Administration and EPM Clients Administration ConsoleAdministration ConsoleWeb User Interface


Architecture and Platform Support: Server Side

64-bit support for all Microsoft Operating systems and componentsWindows server 2008 & R2 series (64 bit only)

Standard/Enterprise/DataCenterIIS 7.0/7.5.NET 3.5 framework

SQL server 2008 ( including R2 ) Enterprise edition onlySQL server 2008 ( including R2 ) Enterprise edition onlySupport Globalization/Multiple language server Operating SystemMicrosoft SQL Server Reporting Services no more requiredFaster data input and retrieval with optimized Shared Query EngineFaster data input and retrieval with optimized Shared Query EngineUse of global cache to improve performance and scalability





Architecture and Platform Support: Client and Browser

BPC Client supports the following clients:Windows XP (32 bit)Windows XP (32-bit)Windows Vista (32-bit & 64-bit)Windows 7 (32-bit & 64-bit)

BPC Web supports the following web browsers:pp gInternet Explorer 8.0Internet Explorer 7.0

BPC Office supports the following versions of Microsoft Office:Microsoft Office 2003 (32 bit and 64 bit)Microsoft Office 2003 (32 bit and 64 bit)Microsoft Office 2007 (32 bit and 64 bit)Microsoft Office 2010 (32 bit and 64 bit)

Common EPM Client for SAP BusinessObjects Analyzer, SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10 (Version Microsoft and SAP NetWeaver ).



2. EPM Clients Web User InterfaceWeb User InterfaceEPM Office Add-in


EPM Clients: Web User Interface

T o t pes of Web report Reports and Inp t Forms

The Web Client is the Web User Interface used for Live and web based reporting.

• Two types of Web report: Reports and Input Forms• Use Report designer to create either a Report or Input Form • Ability to add , manage and review comments historyy g y• Possibility to build and format Charts within Web reports





EPM Clients: EPM Office Add-in

The EPM Add-in is an add-in to Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Word and Microsoft PowerPoint. Designed to give access to SAP Business Objects EPM Solutions'

d t d t th EPM Add i h l l d t f EPM l ti It i l dproduct data, the EPM Add-in helps analyze data from EPM solutions. It is also used to submit data into SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Models using appropriate connection.

EPM Context bar displays dimensions and membersCreate, modify reports using EPM Pane Flash object insertionjAsymmetric reports are not supported in Microsoft Office Word and Microsoft Office PowerPoint





Functional Enhancements:Automated Variance Analysis (AVA)Automated Variance Analysis (AVA)

Automated Variance Analysis will facilitate business users to i i (F l Pl V A t l)view variances (For example, Plan Vs. Actual)AVA navigates Application data automatically, determining key

contributors of performance, without manual investigation.AVA results are calculated on the fly.yFlow of operations within AVA:

AVA can be accessed from the Web to run Live Reports


1. Architecture and Platform SupportServerClient and Browser



Functional Enhancements: Journal Reporting EnhancementJournal Reporting Enhancement

Ability to post multiple Journal entries

The new web and enhanced interface delivers more flexibility and displays a list of Journals that can filtered based on the Context View.

Advanced Query allows end-users to define criteria making it faster and easier toAdvanced Query allows end users to define criteria making it faster and easier to display specific journals

All dimensions and journal options can be used as filters

Filt t t fi ld “B i i ith ” “C t i i ” “I Li t” ll D tFilter on text fields “Beginning with…”, “Containing…”, “In List” as well as on Dates : “From… To…”


Introduction - Delta Changes SummaryLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain all the new SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for Microsoft Delta changes


© 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be h d ith t i ti

Business Objects and the Business Objects logo, BusinessObjects, Crystal Reports, Crystal Decisions, Web Intelligence, Xcelsius, and other Business Objects products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarkschanged without prior notice.

Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors.Microsoft, Windows, Excel, Outlook, and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, System i, System i5, System p, System p5, System x, System z, System z10, System z9, z10, z9, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, eServer, z/VM z/OS i5/OS S/390 OS/390 OS/400 AS/400 S/390 Parallel Enterprise Server

mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Business Objects Software Ltd. Business Objects is an SAP company.

Sybase and Adaptive Server, iAnywhere, Sybase 365, SQL Anywhere, and other Sybase products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sybase, Inc. Sybase is an SAP company.All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies. Data contained in this document serves informational purposes only. National product specifications may vary.z/VM, z/OS, i5/OS, S/390, OS/390, OS/400, AS/400, S/390 Parallel Enterprise Server,

PowerVM, Power Architecture, POWER6+, POWER6, POWER5+, POWER5, POWER, OpenPower, PowerPC, BatchPipes, BladeCenter, System Storage, GPFS, HACMP, RETAIN, DB2 Connect, RACF, Redbooks, OS/2, Parallel Sysplex, MVS/ESA, AIX, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere, Netfinity, Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, PostScript, and Reader are either trademarks or

p p y yThe information in this document is proprietary to SAP. No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express prior written permission of SAP AG.This document is a preliminary version and not subject to your license agreement or any other agreement with SAP. This document contains only intended strategies, developments, and functionalities of the SAP® product and is not intended to be binding upon SAP to any particular course of business, product strategy, and/or development. Please note that this document is subject to change and may be changed by SAP at any time without noticeregistered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other

countries.Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group.Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.HTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C® World

document is subject to change and may be changed by SAP at any time without notice.SAP assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. SAP does not warrant the accuracy or completeness of the information, text, graphics, links, or other items contained within this material. This document is provided without a warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or non-infringement.SAP shall have no liability for damages of any kind including without limitation direct, special, indirect, or consequential damages that may result from the use of these materials. HTML, XML, XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World

Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape. SAP, R/3, SAP NetWeaver, Duet, PartnerEdge, ByDesign, SAP BusinessObjects Explorer, StreamWork, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and other

This limitation shall not apply in cases of intent or gross negligence.The statutory liability for personal injury and defective products is not affected. SAP has no control over the information that you may access through the use of hot links contained in these materials and does not endorse your use of third-party Web pages nor provide any warranty whatsoever relating to third-party Web pages.


p g g ycountries.


Architecture

ArchitectureLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain the architecture of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for Microsoft


Topicsp1. Architecture

Supported PlatformsRedesign architecture – Application Serversedes g a c ec u e pp ca o Se e sGlobal Cache Implementation

2. Performances & ProcessesP Di iProcess DimensionsWork Status SettingsSend/Retrieve dataData Manager (Batch Import)Data Manager (Batch Import)

Architecture

Platforms supported by SAP BusinessObjects Planning and pp y j gConsolidation 10.0, version for Microsoft


Platforms

Servers– Windows 2008 & R2 series (64 bits only supported)

o Standard, Enterprise, Data Centero IIS 7.0/7.5o .NET 3.5 Framework

– SQL Server 2008 including R2 – Enterprise Edition only– Support Globalization/Multiple Language OS Support

ClientClient– Windows XP (32 bits)– Windows Vista/Windows 7 (32 & 64 bits)– Microsoft Office 2007 (32 bits)– Microsoft Office 2010 (32 bits and 64 bits – TBD)– Microsoft Office 2003 (Planned)– IE7/IE8No longer support for SQl Server 2005


No longer support for SQl Server 2005No longer needed for Reporting Service Server

Redesign ArchitectureSAP BOPC 7.X, Microsoft Version - ArchitectureSAP BOPC 7.X, Microsoft Version Architecture

.NET 3.5/2.0 and VB components32 bits processesMultiple processes running into application serverUse COM+ services impersonationC fi bl ith COM bj t ( l i i ti )Configurable with COM+ objects (pool size, impersonation)


Redesign ArchitectureSAP BOPC 10.0, Microsoft Version - ArchitectureSAP BOPC 10.0, Microsoft Version Architecture

.NET 3.5 components onlyPure 64 bits processesPure 64 bits processesSingle Process /No COM+ services.NET impersonationConfigurable with web.config (Max Concurrent Sessions)Co gu ab e t eb co g ( a Co cu e t Sess o s)


Global Cache

Comparison Meta data retrieval SAP BOPC 7.x and SAP BOPC 10.0


Global CacheMain PointsMain Points

Global cache configurationXML File for configurationXML File for configuration

BOPC support manual configuration for this file– Path %PC_MS%\Websrvr\CacheManagement\Cache.config


Global CacheCache Usage & ApplyCache Usage & Apply

Cache all meta data and master data

Global Cache applied for Major ComponentsSending/Retrieving DataData ManagerLogicLogicLog on

Plan to improve gradually (Post EPM 10.0)Caching extra data (Team, FileMap, SQL connection string and others...)Applying Global Cache to the remaining common componentsOthers


Topicsp1. Architecture

Supported PlatformsRedesign architecture – Application ServersRedesign architecture Application ServersGlobal Cache Implementation

2. Performances & Processes Process DimensionsWork Status SettingsSend/Retrieve dataData Manager (Batch Import)Data Manager (Batch Import)

Performances & ProcessProcess DimensionProcess Dimension

Issues in SAP BOPC 7.x– Do not support large dimensions (bigger than 1 million members)– Performance not enough to support enterprise customersResolution– Convert to 64 bits process– Convert to 64 bits process– Apply SQL Server 2008 new function (Merge) to the performance bottle neck step

o Reduce number of “Update” queries– Apply parallel cube processP li i t t i b t di i f BOPC 7 d BOPC 10 0Preliminary test comparison between process dimension from BOPC 7.x and BOPC 10.0– Tested 1 million member dimensions with 3 hierarchies– Process completed in 20 minutes in 10.0 – Process completed in 1 hour and 48 minutes in 7.x


Performances & ProcessWork Status SettingsWork Status Settings

Issues in SAP BOPC 7.x– Takes over 40 minutes to setup the work status with ‘Include children’ option– Takes long time to check the work status in sending or bulk import dataResolution– Re-design work status tables & minimize the number of work status records– Re-design work status tables & minimize the number of work status records



SAP BOPC 7.x design– Work status table has all combinations of owner dimension member itself & children membersExample– Owner dimension

– Work Status table



SAP BOPC 10.0 design– Work status table only has one record with ‘Include children’ flag example– Owner dimension

– Work Status table

– In case of changing status code as ‘3’ the “NA” member without ‘Include children’ option



Performance SAP BOPC 10.0 Work status– Case: Owner dimension has 64K members, and set work status to top member of owner dimension (with ‘include children’ option) Owner dimension

P f b fit ill b biPerformance benefits will be bigger– If the complexity of work ,status will be bigger– More dimension members into owner dimension– Set work status to a higher member level



Performance in EPM 10 (Checking work status in sending data)– Simulate 25 million records into Work Status table


Performances & ProcessSend Retrieve DataSend Retrieve Data

Issues in SAP BOPC 7.x– In BPC reports (EVDRE, EvGET, EvGTS, and so on) which contains multiple hierarchy dimensions, it

takes a long time to refresh data. A lot of existing customers are running these types of reports.– Need a general review of all Send/Retrieve steps to optimize all sending/retrieving

Resolution– Remove com+ usage – Use Global cacheApply parallel cube process

Optimize the design of Smart Query Engine & MDX query manipulation steps– Optimize the design of Smart Query Engine & MDX query manipulation stepso For cell based report case, SQE generates multiple MDX queries for each hierarchy members

instead of a single query



Resolution – Change Delta Calculation

o BPC 7.5 – Individual sending baseo BPC 10 – Send Governor base



Performances– Single user retrieving data

– Single user sending data

– Concurrent users sending/retrieving data



Performances– Retrieving data under the multiple hierarchy condition

o 9 hierarchies combination in report, 1980 cells retrieving data

– Performance benefit will be better if hierarchy combination in report is more complex and number of cells is bigger


cells is bigger.

Performances & ProcessData ManagerData Manager

Issues in SAP BOPC 7.x– Performance & Scalability are not enough to support the enterprise customer (Only support about

2.3million records at one time)

Resolution– Use Bulk Insert– Convert to 64 bit process– Apply SQL 2008 DTSX library, Remove SQL 2000 DTS library

Use Global cache– Use Global cache– Get rid of unnecessary file I/O– Convert synchronous data audit to asynchronously


Performances & ProcessData ManagerData Manager

Performance in BPC 10 (Import data)– No logic execution, with work status checking


ArchitectureLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain the architecture of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for Microsoft















p g g ycountries.

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, Version for SAP NetWeaver

Introduction - Delta Changes Summary

Introduction - Delta Changes SummaryLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain all the new SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver Delta changes


Topics Pagep g

1. ArchitectureB k d d F t d h

3. Administration and EPM ClientsAd i i t ti C lBackend and Frontend changes

Connectivity

2. Platform Support and

Administration ConsoleHarmonized Web User Interface and EPM add-in

AuthenticationABAP Application Server SupportClient SupportSecuritySecurity

Topics Pagep g



Connectivity




ArchitectureBackend and Frontend ChangesBackend and Frontend Changes

The SAP BusinessObjects Planning and j gConsolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver installation consists of an ABAP Application server and Client installation.

.NET Server is no longer requiredEnhanced native SAP ERP and NetWeaver BW Integration as well as SAP EPM integration Via Financial Information ManagementNew harmonized UI and common EPM add-in


ArchitectureConnectivityConnectivity

REST (Representational State Transfer) Web Service enables communication ( p )between SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Clients and SAP NetWeaver BW (Application Server).

Also known as RESTFul Web Service, it relies on a stateless, Client / Server,Also known as RESTFul Web Service, it relies on a stateless, Client / Server, cacheable communications protocol and in virtually all cases, the HTTP communication protocol is used.

All services will be exposed as RESTful Web services for internal communicationAll services will be exposed as RESTful Web services for internal communication between BPC 10 NW clients and server.

SOAP Web services will be used to communicate with external applications such as EPM Applications (that is FIM)EPM Applications (that is FIM).


Topics Pagep g



Connectivity




Platform Support and AuthenticationABAP Application Server SupportABAP Application Server Support

Requires SAP NetWeaver 7.3Any operating system supported by SAP NetWeaver 7.3ABAP Web Application ServerVMware for productive usageA d t b t d b SAP N tW 7 3Any database supported by SAP NetWeaver 7.3Web Server: ABAP Web Application serverLanguage support: Install SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation on non-English OS servers in French, German, Japanese, Simplified Chinese, Russian, Spanish, g , , p , p , , p ,Italian, Portuguese.


Platform Support and AuthenticationClient SupportClient Support

Windows Vista Client (32 and 64-bit), Windows XP (32-bit) and Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)Internet Explorer 7 and 8Microsoft Office 2003, 2007 and 2010 (32-bit and 64-bit)


Platform Support and AuthenticationSecuritySecurity

Key Points about Security:y ySAP NetWeaver AuthenticationGranular securityBPC service user role and BPC User roleIntegration into Single Sign-On (SSO) environmentLimited access to NW securitySupport for NW Users and Matrix SecurityCMS Authentication is NOT supportedCMS Authentication is NOT supported


Topics Pagep g



Connectivity




Administration and EPM ClientsAdministration ConsoleAdministration Console

The Administration web client provides a new and revolutionized user experienceBusiness User interface is now Flex-basedDeveloped in Adobe Flex, the Web Client is based on SBC BUI* FrameworkDimension and Dimension members can now be created, edited without Microsoft Excel requirementrequirement


Administration and EPM ClientsHarmonized Web User Interface and EPM Add-inHarmonized Web User Interface and EPM Add in

.NET add-on for Office will be implemented and shared by Excel, Word, and PowerPoint.EPM Office Add-in Excel replaces all existing classic EPM Excel ClientsBoth Microsoft Office Clients and Web Client can be used for planning activitiesAdministration Landing page is a Flex-based thin Client and displays all administration objectsall administration objects


Introduction - Delta Changes SummaryLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain all the new SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver Delta changes















p g g ycountries.

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, Version for SAPConsolidation 10.0, Version for SAP NetWeaver

Architecture

ArchitectureLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain the architecture of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver


Topicsp1. Architecture of SAP BOPC 10

Architecture Key PointsBOPC 10 NW Ser er Architect reBOPC 10 NW Server ArchitectureBOPC 10 NW Client ArchitectureCross Application IntegrationTechnology DecisionTechnology DecisionReused Component ListSoftware ComponentsAuthentication Mode

Architecture BOPC NW – Key PointsBenefitsBenefits

Better integration with BW/NW– Transport

o More granular TLOGOo BW Transport framework/UI

– Configuration – IMG g– ETL – DataSource/InfoPackage– ODBO/XMLA – Measure Formula – BEx Query + BW Hierarchy AggregationIntegration with SBC/EPM ApplicationsIntegration with SBC/EPM Applications– CLM– E&N– BUI– FIMPerformance Improvement– Parallelization - Parallel Processing Tool – Query Engine


Query Engine

SAP BOPC NW in the Context of POA


SAB BOPC 10 NW Server Architecture


SAB BOPC 10 NW Client Architecture

Note:

Flex is an open source framework for developing web applications that make it easier for people to view and interpret data.


Flash Player (Adobe® Flash® Player) is a cross-platform browser-based application runtime that provides viewing of applications, content, and videos across screens and browsers.

Cross Application IntegrationBenefitsBenefits

Better integration with following products– ERP– FC– FIM– ICIC– PCM– SSM– GRC

SAP Solution Manager– SAP Solution Manager– BEx Query Analyzer– SBC CLM


Technology Decision

Architecture Area Technologies to be Used

Cli t MS Offi E l I t t BClients MS Office Excel, Internet BrowserPresentation Layer / User Interface

Flex, BUI, Polestar, WinForms (.NET 3.5)

Business Logic Layer ABAP

Analytics Engine SAP BW

Integration Middleware REST, SOAP

Data Persistency ABAP database,

Development Environment ABAP Workbench, Flex Builder, Visual Studio2008


Reused Components


Software Components


Authentication Mode

Basic Authentication (credentials)Form based authenticationWindows authenticationX.509 client certificatesC ki b d th ti tiCookie based authenticationCustom HTTP header based authentication


ArchitectureLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain the architecture of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver















p g g ycountries.


FIM Integration Set-up

FIM Integration Set-upLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain FIM Integration Set-up


Topicsp1. Pre-requisites

CMS authenticationConfigure link between BPC 10 and CMS

2. ConfigurationAdd users to BPCAdd users to BPCConfigure Link to FIM 10 from BPC 10

CMS Authentication

Central Management Systemg y

• The CMS is used to manage user authentication

•You must declare users in Central Management System

• This will provide Single Sign On for users between BPC 10 and SAP FIM 10

• You can install CMS with either BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 4.0 or as a stand alone mini platform, SAP BusinessObjects Information Platform Services 4.0


Configure Link Between BPC 10 MS and CMS

Configuring CMS authentication in SAP BusinessObjects Planning and g g j gConsolidation 10

• You configure the link between BPC and CMS in the BPC Server Manager ConsoleConsole


Configure Link Between BPC 10 and CMS

In the Configure CMS Dialog box, enter the required information and click Updateg g q p


BPC Configuration

Adding usersg

You can add users to BPC using the Administration Console.

• In the Navigation pane Select Security > Users, then click “Add New Users” from the Action Pane


BPC Configuration

Adding Usersg

• The “Add New Users” wizard dialog box opens as shown.


BPC Configuration

Configuring the Link to FIM From SAP BusinessObjects Planning and g g j gConsolidation 10

• Enter parameters to configure the SAP Financial Information Management in the Administration Console.Administration Console.

• From the Administration Console selectSet Environment Parameters


BPC Configuration

Enter the required information in the “Set Environment Parameters” displayed in the q p ycenter pane of the Administration Console.


BPC Configuration

Update Environment Parametersp

After you have entered the appropriate parameters to configure the external link to FIM click Update. In the Administration console or the Web client the link will be displayed.displayed.


FIM Integration Set-upLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain FIM Integration Set-up















p g g ycountries.


Changes to the Server Environment

Changes to the Server EnvironmentLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain the changes to the server environment


Topicsp1. Platform supported

Operating SystemsDatabases Supporteda abases Suppo ed.NET Framework

2. Architecture designSi lSingle process .NET ImpersonationFile configuration for max concurrent usersGlobal CacheGlobal Cache

Platform SupportedOperating SystemsOperating Systems

The follow Operating systems are supported by SAP BusinessObjects Planning and p g y pp y j gConsolidation 10.0

Windows 2008 (Standard, Enterprise or Data Center) 64 bitsWindows 2008 R2 (Standard, Enterprise or Data Center) 64 bits


Platform SupportedDatabase SupportedDatabase Supported

The follow databases are supported ppSQL Server 2008 Enterprise Edition SQL Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Edition


Platform Supported.NET Framework.NET Framework

The entire development was done using .NET 3.5p g


Topicsp1. Platform Supported

Operating SystemsDatabases Supporteda abases Suppo ed.NET Framework

2. Architecture DesignSi lSingle process .NET ImpersonationFile configuration for max concurrent usersGlobal CacheGlobal Cache

Architecture DesignSingle ProcessSingle Process

SAP BPC 10 Application server has one single process instead of multiple pp g p pprocesses dllhost.exe from SAP BPC 7.x corresponding for each application pool of COM+ components


Architecture Design.NET Impersonation.NET Impersonation

All the services from application server are started with installation users:ppBPC_SSYADMINBPC_ADMINBPC_USER

Having the same rights like SAP BPC 7.x.

Any request to SQL Server or SSAS server is done using one user mentioned.


Architecture DesignFile Configuration – Max Concurrent UsersFile Configuration Max Concurrent Users

SAP BPC 10 provides a configuration file to provide the information regarding the p g p g gnumber of Max Concurrent SessionsThe file used is web.config (from Websrvr folder)


Architecture DesignGlobal CacheGlobal Cache

The following key points about Global Cache:g y pXML configuration file - Path %PC_MS%\Websrvr\CacheManagement\Cache.configCache all meta data and master data which improve the following operations:– Send Data/Retrieve Data

D t M– Data Manager– Logic– Log on


Changes to the Server EnvironmentLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain the changes to the server environment















p g g ycountries.


New BPC NW Administration UI Overview

New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe the new BPC NW Administration UIDescribe the new Web Client and featuresExplain the new terminologyExplain Environment featuresExplain Model FeaturesExplain Security new FeaturesExplain RulesExplain Rules Explain FeaturesExplain IMG screen on BW side


New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewNew Terminology and Differences Between BPC 7.x VersionNew Terminology and Differences Between BPC 7.x Version

BPC 10 BPC 7.5

Environment AppsetEnvironment Appset

Dimensions Dimensions

Models ApplicationsModels Applications

Business Rules Business Rules

Control settings Validation RulesControl settings Validation Rules

Logic Script Script logic

Work Status settings Work Status settingsWork Status settings Work Status settings

Journal Templates Journal Templates

Audit report settings System report settings


p g y p g

New BPC NW Web ClientNew Web ClientNew Web Client

Business Objects Planning and Consolidation 10 version for NetWeaver Web Client:

When you open the web client, you are presented with the Home Workspace. The home


workspace is always available, and contains a menu with all the components that you are authorized to access.

New BPC NW Web ClientNew Web ClientNew Web Client

The New Web Client has the following Components:g pStart Page: Describes the initial Planning and Consolidation web client page. From this page, you can select from your objects, create reports and launch client applications.Activities: Provides information about using Business Process Flows (Processes). Lib P id i f ti b t h t th bj t th t d i th LibLibrary: Provides information about how to access the objects that are saved in the Library view. Documents: Provides information about using the Documents view to post, and retrieve files, and to manage content displayAudit: Provides information about reporting on system information and activity. Consolidation Central: Helps to generate and manage consolidated data. – Consolidation Monitor: Generate and monitor consolidated data from data reported by Group and

Entity membersEntity members– Control Monitor: Execute and monitor controls used to validate the reported data– Journals: Create and manage journal entries containing adjustments and eliminations used for

correcting reported data– Ownership Manager: Create and Manage ownership-based hierarchies used for performing statutory


– Ownership Manager: Create and Manage ownership-based hierarchies used for performing statutory consolidations

New BPC NW Web ClientConsolidation MonitorConsolidation Monitor


New BPC NW Web ClientControl MonitorControl Monitor

The Controls Monitor is a workspace for executing and monitoring controls. Control monitor displays control status with entity breakdownControl monitor displays control status for one entityC t l it di l d t il d t l t t f tit


Control monitor displays detailed control status for one entityControl monitor runs controls for the selected entity or entities

New BPC NW Web ClientJournalsJournals

Journals - Following tasks may be performed:Create a journal entryModify a journal entry


Copy one or more journal entriesPost one or more journal entries, and so on

New BPC NW Web ClientOwnership ManagerOwnership Manager

Ownership Manager:Ownership Manager:Ownership Manager is used to define an ownership-based hierarchy entity structure. It allows you to create periodic-specific hierarchies of corporate entities to use in statutory consolidation, or in cases where hierarchy changes for an application need to be tracked by C t d Ti


Category and Time.

New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewNew Admin Web ClientNew Admin Web Client

On the Web Client page you have to click the Planning and Consolidation Administration hyperlink in order to open the Administration web client in a separate workspace The Administration console is now a full Web Administration client. All the administration tasks are now available through a Web Client.


gThe Administration console has a brand new User Experience and has a dedicated workspace which you can access by using a link from the Start Page in the Home tab.

New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewNew Admin Web ClientNew Admin Web Client

Navigational Panel on the left side of UI enables to access all the administration views that are grouped by consistent domains.For each view, the first level of navigation is a main list of all the objects of the current view


(For example, the list of dimensions, Models, Users, and so on.

New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewEnvironmentEnvironment

On the Administration web client page, you can see two hyperlinks to manage and change the environments. Appsets are renamed as the “Environments” in BusinessObejcts Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for NetWeaver.If you click the “Change Environment” hyperlink then you can change to a different environment based on your access


environment based on your access.In order to manage the environment, use the “Manage All Environment” hyperlink. This will take you to a page where you can Copy, Delete, or Create Environments.

New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewEnvironmentsEnvironments

Manage Environment: In this page you can Copy a Environment, Create a New Environment, and Delete an Environment. Even though the UI has changed, the functionality is still the same as 7.X versions


versions.Also on this page, you can see if the Environment status is set to Online or Offline.

New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewDimensionDimension

Enhanced Dimension maintenance capabilities:Enhanced Dimension maintenance capabilities: The new user interface of the Dimensions enables to manage a Dimension through three distinct pages: – The structure of Dimension

M b i


– Members maintenance page– Hierarchical view of the members


All the properties and settings of a Dimension are managed in the Structure view.This page allows you to add a dimension property or add the required properties for Consolidation or for Ownership modelY l dd th hi hi t th di i


You can also add the hierarchies to the dimensions


The members are managed in an “Excel like” grid and you can copy and paste (within the list and from Excel), sorting, filtering, and ordering column, and so on. The maximum length of a Member ID can be 32 characters and can accept dash and underscores but cannot accept any other special characters. Member status is displayed in the row headers of the list of all members that have been


Member status is displayed in the row headers of the list of all members that have been edited or changed or added. A icon enables to identify the status of the edited members and a tooltip provides the details of the errors.


Excel has been dropped in this release and dimension members are maintained in the Excel like new interface.Excel like new interface.Delete and Revert buttons are used to undo the changes done to the dimension members but only if the changes are not confirmed. In order to use the dimension formulas, you need to check the “Allow Member Formulas” in th “St t f Di i ”


the “Structure of Dimension” page.

New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewDimension Member FormulaDimension Member Formula

In order to create dimension formulas, you need to use the new Formula editor under the “Rules” option. But first activate the “Allow Dimension formulas” option for the dimension on which you want to create the formulas. In this release, a new Formula editor has been


introduced to create and manage the formulas.

New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewModelModel

The term “Application” in Business Planning and Consolidation for 7.X NetWeaver versions pp ghas been renamed as “Model” in Business Objects Planning and Consolidation 10.0 for NetWeaver . You can access the “Models” view by selecting “Model” under the “Dimensions and Models” domain in the left side panel


domain in the left side panel.


Model TypeThere are 2 types:There are 2 types:

Reporting – Standard – (called as “Generic” in

7.X version)Financial– Financial

– ConsolidationDrivers and Rates (called as “Non-Reporting” in 7.X versions)– Exchange Rates (called as “Rate”

in 7.X versions)– Ownership– GenericYTDINPUT parameter has a new label “Data Entry Mode” in the Administration console and the value can be set now directly


ywhen creating a Model using the creation wizard.


In step 4 while creating ModelIn this step, the dimensions will be p,added to the model. A status panel at the bottom of the wizard gives the information about the missing dimension typesthe missing dimension types. If the source is a blank model then all the required dimensions need to be added to the Model.Y t l t lti lYou cannot select multiple dimensions of the same type except for the user-defined dimensions.Among the selected dimensions you can also set the secured dimensions (for example, the dimensions that will be used to define the data access profiles for


this model).


COMMENT parameter has a new labelCOMMENT parameter has a new label “Enabled Comments” in the Administration console and the value can be set and changed now directly in the structure page and settings of a Modelof a Model.In the previous 7.X versions, comments were enabled for an Application using the Web Application parameters but this has been changed in the current releasechanged in the current release.



APPROVALORG parameter has a new label “Hierarchy” in the Administration console and the value can be set and changed now directly in the Data Locking Settings dialog of a Model (Work Status feature).In the previous 7.X releases this parameter was part of the Web application parameter but has been changed in the p gcurrent versions.


New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewSecuritySecurity

Security:On the front end side there is no h i th BPC 10 itchange in the BPC 10 security

except that the BPC users are NetWeaver users instead of Active Directory users. SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0 NW version, uses the NetWeaver users to login into BPC. It doesn’t support AD users, CMS users anymore. From a functional perspective, the main changes in the security configuration are related to the new guser experience which enables to improve the way to manage users, teams, and profiles and also allows mass maintenance.


New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewSecuritySecurity

It lists all the users assigned to the environmentWe can add, remove, or edit a user.Mass maintenance of users and teams are also allowed. Multiple pedition of users is allowed to enable to modify several users simultaneously. You can see in this list the ID’s ofYou can see in this list the ID s of the users, their last and first names and also their email address. These properties are those from the NW users andthose from the NW users and cannot be changed on the front-end .


New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewBusiness RulesBusiness Rules

Business Rules:Like BPC 7.x version, you no longer , y gneed to select the business rules to activate when creating a Model or modifying a Model. Activation of Business rules activation is done directly ywithin the Business Rules view which you can access under the “Rules” domain.


New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewLogic ScriptLogic Script

In SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, for N W h dNetWeaver, enhancements are made to the Logic script editor. Basically Logic Scripts are defined in a brand new script editor. You can access the “Logic Scripts” view under the “Rules” domain. A list of Planning and Consolidation keywords (K2 functions) and also y ( )MDX keywords are available for selection and insertion. You can use the “Pretty Print” function to make the whole scriptfunction to make the whole script more readable by adding indentations and using upper case for keywords.


New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewLogic ScriptLogic Script

A tooltip describing the valid syntax is displayed for each of themYou can insert a keyword from the list into the text editor by drag and drop, double click or by using the “Insert Keyword” button. Categories of keywords and wrong syntax are highlighted with specific color codingCategories of keywords and wrong syntax are highlighted with specific color coding – Keywords are highlighted with a Blue color– Constant values are highlighted with a Green color– Comments are highlighted with a Grey color– Everything else is highlighted with a Black color– Wrong syntax is highlighted with a Red color


New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewWork StatusWork Status

Work Status: There are no functional changes done to work status in this release other than the new user experience to configure the work status. Work status can be accessed from the “Features” domainA i f h W k S d fi d f h E i d h D l ki


An overview of the Work Statuses defined for the Environment and the Data locking settings by Model is available as the main page of this view.

New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewWork StatusWork Status

Work Status: You can activate the locking process for a Model directly within this view.Also you can configure the email notification settings directly within this view.


Activating both above through the administration parameter is no longer needed unlike BPC 7.x versions.

New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewContext DefaultsContext Defaults

Context Defaults:Context Defaults: This is the new feature introduced in the BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, NetWeaver . “Context Defaults” is available under the “Features” domain. This enables you to specify


what the defaults are used for the scope context.

New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewContext DefaultsContext Defaults

Context Defaults: In the Context Defaults main page, you can specify the default model that will be used when initializing the scope context. In the bottom panel of the main page of this view, you can edit and then specify the defaults per Dimension of the selected Modelper Dimension of the selected Model. The scope context will be initialized with the defaults of the relevant dimensions:– The default Member in a Report– The default Member in Data Input document– Whether the Dimension is displayed in the scope context or not– The Description of the Dimension is displayed instead of the ID– Only the ID of the Members is displayed or only the Description or both


New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewAudit CapabilitiesAudit Capabilities

Audit Capabilities: Changes in the Dimension members are audited if the audit of the Administration activity is enabled on this page.


New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewDrill ThroughDrill Through

D ill th hDrill-through:There are no functional changes but only a new user experience to configure the Drill-throughs.The overall list of Drill-throughs of the Environment is available in a dedicated view which


The overall list of Drill throughs of the Environment is available in a dedicated view which you can access under “Features”

New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewMulti-user Object LockingMulti user Object Locking

M lti i th bj tMulti-users accessing the same object:Multiple users when accessing the same Administration objects like the Dimensions, Models, Security, BPF’s and so on, would result in locking the objects. For example, when the Category dimension is being edited by user “A”, at the same time if user “B” tries to


access the Category dimension then user “B” would get an error message saying that the object is being edited by another user.

New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewTechnical ParameterTechnical Parameter

Some of the Application and Appset specific parameters which were part of the BPC for Web in 7.X versions have been moved to backend BW side. All the other parameters (mainly technical parameters) are now managed in IMG (SIMGH transaction) following the SAP Product Standards requirementstransaction), following the SAP Product Standards requirements. In IMG, some parameters are set at the Environment level or Model level but also in both levels for few parameters.In addition, some parameters are called “global parameters”. They are set at an upper level than the Environment. For example, they are applied to all the Environments.


New BPC NW Administration UI OverviewLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe the new BPC NW Administration UIDescribe the new Web Client and featuresExplain the new terminologyExplain Environment featuresExplain Model FeaturesExplain Security new FeaturesExplain RulesExplain Rules Explain FeaturesExplain IMG screen on BW side















p g g ycountries.


Changes to the Server Environment

Changes to the Server EnvironmentLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain the changes to the server environment


Agendag

1. Platform Requirements and SupportABAP Application ServerABAP Web Application Server

2. Connectivity and Web ServicesyRESTful Web ServiceSOAP Web Service

ABAP Application Server

SAP NetWeaver 7.3 – Application Server ABAP — PI_BASIS 7.3 – Application Server ABAP — SAP ABA 7.3 – Application Server ABAP — SAP BASIS 7.3

Application Server ABAP SAP BW 7 3– Application Server ABAP — SAP BW 7.3 – Kernel (64-bit) and Unicode only

An operating system supported by SAP NetWeaver A database supported by SAP NetWeaver

Note: Both SAP NetWeaver 7.0 and SAP NetWeaver 7.2 are not supported.


ABAP Web Application Server

The new Web-based interface of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation j g10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver is powered by SAP ABAP Web Application Server ( SAP Web AS).

There are the following installation options for the SAP Web AS:

SAP Web Application Server ABAP S t ( ll b th l ft )System. (yellow box on the left.)SAP Web Application Server Java System. (green box on the right.)

N t R l f b th Mi ft NET d W b A li ti (IIS)


Note: Removal of both Microsoft .NET and Web Application server (IIS).

Agendag

1. Platform Requirements and SupportABAP Application ServerABAP Web Application Server

2. Connectivity and Web ServicesyRESTful Web ServiceSOAP Web Service

Connectivity and Web ServicesRESTful Web ServiceRESTful Web Service

REST (Representational State Transfer) Web Service enables communication ( p )between SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Clients and SAP NetWeaver BW (Application Server).

Al k RESTf l W b S i li t t l Cli t / SAlso known as RESTful Web Service relies on a stateless, Client / Server, cacheable communications protocol and in virtually all cases, the HTTP communication protocol is used.

All services will be exposed as RESTful Web services for internal communication between BPC 10 NW clients and server.


Connectivity and Web ServicesSOAP Web ServiceSOAP Web Service

Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP), is a protocol specification for exchanging p j ( ) p p g gstructured information in the implementation of Web Services in computer networks.

SOAP Web services will be used to communicate with external applications such as EPM Applications (that is, FIM).

When SAP BusinessObjects Financial Information Management (FIM) is used to load data into Planning and Consolidation from external data sources (flat files, tables, 3rd party applications, or other EPM applications), this data is often transformed and aggregated.


Changes to the Server EnvironmentLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain the changes to the server environment















p g g ycountries.


Rules: Business Rules

Rules: Business RulesLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain global definitionsExplain how to enable a set of Business RulesDefine all the different types of rules


Business RulesBusiness RulesBusiness Rules

Business Rules (Table-based logic) provides the flexibility for a customer to ( g ) p ycustomize delivered functions (logic), to meet specific business needs, without having to understand either scripting or programming.The business rules can be accessed via the web interface and is located in the Ad i i t ti i t f ithi th R l tiAdministration interface within the Rules section.


Business RulesAccessing the Business RulesAccessing the Business Rules

The business rules can be accessed via the web interface and is located in the Administration interface within the Rules section.



The business rules has Global Definitions as well as a complete overview of all pexisting rules in the selected environment grouped by model.



To open the existing rules, select the rule type and click Open.p g yp p



To add/remove rule types, select the model and click Add/Remove Rule Types.yp yp


Business RulesGlobal DefinitionsGlobal Definitions

Global Definitions are part of the entire list of rules, that is, Methods and Method -pbased Multipliers will be independently listed, as they refer to the environment.



Method-based Multipliers have a header and detail table.pTo open the rules, select the Method-based Multiplier and click Open.The header page opens as shown.



Options available in the Method-based Multipliers header page are:p p p gTo create a new method based multiplierTo edit or delete an existing method based multiplier



Options available in the Method-based Multipliers header page are:p p p gTo create a new method-based multiplier;To edit or delete an existing method based multiplier

The status shows whether the rule is valid or invalid.



Method-based Multipliers detail page can be accessed by clicking the header rule.p p g y gTo validate the rules, click Validate.The system automatically validates when the rule is saved.

Appears if the rule is validated successfully


successfully.

Appears if the rule is saved.

Business RulesModel-specific Business RulesModel specific Business Rules

The business rules for the model can be accessed via the web interface and is located in the Administration interface within the Rules section.

Model


Business RulesModel-specific Business RulesModel specific Business Rules

The different business rules that can be enabled for a model:

Intercompany Bookings Match intercompany transactions

Currency TranslationConvert local currency data into the desired reporting

Currency Translationcurrencies

Eliminations and adjustmentsGenerate all the consolidation entries for the desired groups of entities (such as eliminations, adjustments, reclassifications and minority calculations)reclassifications, and minority calculations)

US EliminationsSpecifically designed to address the posting of intercompany eliminations in simpler scenarios where a full legal consolidation model is not required.g q

Carry-ForwardInitialize the opening balances when a new fiscal cycle starts

Account-based CalculationsCalculate and store amounts, which are required for


Account based Calculationspurposes of account-based calculations

Rules: Business RulesLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain global definitionsExplain how to enable a set of Business RulesDefine all the different types of rules















p g g ycountries.


Rules: Controls

Rules: ControlsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDefine controls, control sets and assignments


Business Example

Controls are an essential part of every consolidation application and p y ppthey might also be useful in planning application.

They are mainly used to control the consistency of financial data (for example that a Balance Sheet is balanced or that flow movements areexample that a Balance Sheet is balanced or that flow movements are matching the with the closing balance)

Controls can be enforced (blocking controls) or just displayed as warnings to inform users of potential problemswarnings, to inform users of potential problems.


ControlsBenefitsBenefits

Benefits of this feature include:Consistency of dataFlexibility – Different level of controls can be defined by entity

C t l t i d b C t d Ti– Control sets are assigned by Category and Time


Process Overview

The following steps are required to define controls1. Assign Security Tasks related to Controls2. Enable Controls3. Create individual controls (and definition of the level for each control)4 C t S t f t l ( f t l )4. Create Sets of controls (group of controls)5. Assign a set of controls by category and timeOn top of that, two more attributes need to be set in the Entity type dimension1 Define for each entity the level of control that should be applied1. Define for each entity the level of control that should be applied2. Possibility to bypass controls in Local Currency (if data are loaded in reporting currency

directly)


Pre-Requisites

The following two attributes are required in the Entity type dimension:– CONTROL_LEVEL (1)– CTRL_CURRENCY_NOT_LC (1)CONTROL_LEVEL• This property controls which level of control is applied for each entity The following four values are• This property controls which level of control is applied for each entity. The following four values are

available:• 1 : Basic• 2 : Standard• 3 : Advanced• 4 : Comprehensive

• The default value (blank) is equivalent to “4”CTRL_CURRENCY_NOT_LC– This property controls whether controls should be executed in the reporting currency instead of LC.This property controls whether controls should be executed in the reporting currency instead of LC.

The following two values are available:o N : Controls are executed in Local Currencyo Y : Controls are executed in the currency defined in the Currency property of the Entity

– The default value (blank) is equivalent to “N”


The default value (blank) is equivalent to N

Controls - Security

The following two take tasks are related to Controls from an administration point of view:– Edit Controls definition– View Controls definition


Accessing and Enabling Controls

In the Administration module, expand Rules and select the Controls items

Before Controls can be used, they need to be enabled from the Controls Administration screen


Navigation

From the Controls Main Page, you can access the different components by clicking on the numbers

When a specific component is open, there is always a link on the top right of the screen for the next step– In Controls – In Control Sets– In Assignments


Controls – Main Screen

The Main screen for controls can be used to add New controls, Edit or Delete existing controls

The drop-down box allows to display all controls or to filter them by a Set of controlsp p y y


Controls – Control Editing (1)

The control definition screen can be split in 2 main sections:– The top of the screen contains the buttons to Save, Close and Validate the control– The header section : specifies the type of control, the threshold and the break-down dimensions– The detail section : specifies which members are compared

TopTop

H dHeader

Detail



The header section– ID : id for the control, no space allowed– Type : Blocking / Warning. All blocking controls must pass before the work status can be changed– Equation type : type of comparison using the equal, different, bigger and smaller operators– Control Level : Level of this control, linked to the “Control Level” property of the Entity dimensionControl Level : Level of this control, linked to the Control_Level property of the Entity dimension– Tolerance Threshold

o In value : absolute valueo In % : percentage is calculated based on the value of the top partBreakdown Dimension(s)– Breakdown Dimension(s)o Up to 2 dimensions can be specified as break-down dimensionso The control will be executed separately for each member of the break-down dimension. In the

example of a break-down by Audit on the member ALL_INPUT, the control will be executed for each member below ALL INPUT (INPUT and INPUT11) in this examplemember below ALL_INPUT (INPUT and INPUT11) in this example

o For a breakdown, the same member must be specified in the top and in the bottom part



The detailed section– Top Part

o Sign: + or -o Account Member from the Account dimension (parent or base level)o Flow Member from the Flow dimension (parent or base level)(p )o Interco: Member from the Interco dimension (parent or base level)o AuditID Member from the AuditID dimension (parent or base level)o Multiply select multiply or divide (for the Value specified)o Value: value to multiply or divide byo Value: value to multiply or divide by

– Bottom Parto Same column as top parto Year Offset use a different year. Values can be a year (2010) or an offset (+1,-1)o Period: use a different period Values can be a period (1) or an offset (+1 -1)o Period: use a different period. Values can be a period (1) or an offset (+1,-1)o Category: use a different category (enter ID of category to use)


Controls - Documents

A document (report or input schedule) can be linked to each control. This will ( p p )provide a hyperlink for the user, so that when a control fails, the user can open that document to understand where the issues is coming from

To set this up, you need to select the document tab

Then click the Add button and select the type of document finally select which document toThen click the Add button and select the type of document, finally select which document to add

The document then show up in a list


Controls - Example

Here is an example of a control that checks that a Balance Sheet is balanced p(with a tolerance of 1) with a breakdown by AuditId (for all AuditId below ALL_INPUT)


Sets of Controls (1)

From the Control Sets screen, click New to create a new set

Enter an ID for the Set (no space allowed)Enter an ID for the Set (no space allowed)


Sets of Controls (2)

Add or remove controls into your set and click OK to close the window


Assignment of Controls (1)

There are two views available to assign the controls:– Categories by Time– Control Sets by Time

Categories by Time– Click Category and Time to select members (you can select more than one member at a time)– Click Show

Cli k Edit ( th t l ft)– Click Edit (on the top left) – Double click to select the cell you want to define controls sets and click once more to display the drop-

down list with all the available control sets and select the appropriate one


– Click Save

Assignment of Controls (2)

Control Sets by Time– Click Control Sets, Category and Time (you can select more than one member at a time)

– Click Show– Click Edit (on the top left)

Tick the checkbox to decide which controls should be assigned for a Category and Time– Tick the checkbox to decide which controls should be assigned for a Category and Time


– Click Save

Rules: ControlsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Define controls, control sets and assignments















p g g ycountries.

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and j gConsolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaverNetWeaver<Unit Name>Business Process Flows - Templates

Business Process Flows - TemplatesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain Process Template ManagementDefine process parameters and create Activities with associated Activity WorkspacesE l i C t t d fi iti b ddi ti i ti t t tExplain Content definition by adding actions, existing content ,or new reports on the flyExplain the LCM template (draft, deploy, archive)

© 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2

TopicsTopics

1. Introduction

2. Process Template Management

3. Template Version Management

4. View and Archive Template Versions

5. Business Process Flow- Activities

Introduction

This function enables you to set up Business Process Flows (BPFs). BPFs organize y p ( ) gbusiness processes into a prepackaged set of application tasks. Any of the available features for users within the Web and Office interfaces can be used by a business process flow. Using a Web interface that is accessible from Office and other Web interfaces users are guided through a set of predefined sequential tasksother Web interfaces, users are guided through a set of predefined sequential tasks.

Based on the BPF template you created, you can generate a BPF instance in the administration console.


Business Examplep

Example: You can set up a single business process flow that can be used across Models within an Environmentacross Models within an Environment.

Based on the BPF template you created, you can generate a BPF instance in the administration console.

One instance of the monthly process Resource Planning uses a specific category dimension member, such as Actual, and a specific time period, such as 20011.JUN.This allows you to distinguish different versions of the same BPFThis allows you to distinguish different versions of the same BPF.


TopicsTopics

1. Introduction





P T l t M t (1 f 11)Process Template Management (1 of 11)Template CreationLogon to BPC->Go to Admin Page->In the left pane, Go to Business process Flow->Choose g g p , pProcess Templates


P T l t M t (2 f 11)Process Template Management (2 of 11)Template Creation•Click New, this will open the Process Template Designer., p p g


P T l t M t (3 f 11)Template Creation•Enter properties in the Process Setting tab.•Name & Description

Process Template Management (3 of 11)

•Name & Description•Context•Process Monitors: The users can monitor all the instances created from this template.


P T l t M t (4 f 11)Template CreationGo to Activities tab->Add new Activity by clicking New in the left side panel.Set properties for the activity.


Set properties for the activity.•Name & Instruction•Dimension and Users: This is for Activity context and Performer/Reviewer.•Opening Criteria.


P T l t M t (5 f 11)Activities->Activity Workspaces

•Open Activity Workspace editor


Open Activity Workspace editor •Click the Create button in Workspaces section. •Then a new workspace tab is open.

Add New Contents: Use 3 ways to add contents;Add New Contents: Use 3 ways to add contents;•Add Content•Add New Report•Add Hyperlink


P T l t M t (6 f 11)Process Template Management (6 of 11)Activities->Activity Workspaces•Add new hyperlinks by clicking the AddHyperlinks buttonHyperlinks button. •A new Hyperlinks view is added in the left side panel. In the main canvas, a new Hyperlink is added.•Go to Hyperlink Editor in the right sideGo to Hyperlink Editor in the right side panel •Set properties in Edit Hyperlink pane in the right hand side•Click the Browse button to navigate toClick the Browse button to navigate to desired report.•Click the Save button to save the hyperlink.


P T l t M t (7 f 11)Process Template Management (7 of 11)

If you want to browse the folder,


go to Administration Security Team. Then add yourself to the team.

P T l t M t (8 f 11)•Set the context: By default, workspace view context will be used unless any change is made on each hyperlink.



P T l t M t (9 f 11)

•You can reset the context to its original setting Use Workspace Context.


p

•Open the member selector, and check the radio button for Automatic (Use Workspace Context).

•Add Related Actions: Open related action editor by clicking the Edit button in the section Related ActionAction.

•Add as many Hyperlinks as you wish by repeating the step above.


P T l t M t (10 f 11)•Hyperlink Validation: You can validate if Hyperlinks are correctly set or not. •Click the Validate button in the view toolbar. Green valid icon is displayed if the Hyperlink is valid while red warning icon is displayed for the invalid


valid while red warning icon is displayed for the invalid.


P T l t M t (11 f 11)•Hyperlink Simulation: You can simulate hyperlinks at Design-time. Using simulation mode, you can verify whether the hyperlinks are well designed as expected. •Click Stop Editing then the name of hyperlink becomes clickable except for the invalid


Click Stop Editing, then the name of hyperlink becomes clickable except for the invalid hyperlinks.


TopicsTopics

1. Introduction





Template Version Management (1 of 7) p g ( )

BPF Templates are managed using version information. There are three types of versions available in BPF Templates: Draft, Deployed, and Inactive.

•Draft is set by default for a new process template.


Template Version Management (2 of 7)p g ( )To see version history of a template. Click the Versions button from the toolbar. In the below example, there is only one version.


Template Version Management (3 of 7)•Draft version can be deployed by clicking the Deploy button.

p g ( )

•At this moment, the version history is below. The “Draft” version has been changed to “Deployed”.


Template Version Management (4 of 7)

•To edit the template, you need to create a new version regardless of process instance existence. Click the New Version button from the toolbar.

p g ( )

•The system creates a new version and sets this version to “Draft”.

•The system will maintain two versions of the template one each for “Draft” and “Deployed”



• To deploy the new version, click the Deploy button.

p g ( )

•The system will change the old template from Deployed to Inactive as well as changing the new template to Deployed from Draft.


Template Version Management (6 of 7)p g ( )

•To edit the newly deployed version, click New Version from the toolbar.

•The system will create a new version and set its status to Draft. •The system also keeps track of older versions which are “Deployed” and “Inactive”.



Note: Template version may have the following possibilitiesOnly 1 Draft version for any given templateOnly 1 Deployed version for a given template

p g ( )

Only 1 Deployed version for a given templateMany Inactive versions for a given template


TopicsTopics

1. Introduction





View & Archive Specific Template Version (1 of 3)p p ( )

Viewing and archiving a specific template version by clicking Versions and selecting View orViewing and archiving a specific template version by clicking Versions and selecting View or Archive.


View & Archive Specific Template Version (2 of 3)p p ( )Note: The View template version opens the template version in read-only so users are not able to modify it.


View & Archive Specific Template Version (3 of 3)

Note: If a user tries to archive a specific template version having active process instances, the archive will not be allowed.

p p ( )

What is the same as template level archive?

Template level archive can be only done only if there are no active instances.


TopicsTopics

1. Introduction





Business Process Flow- Activities (1 of 8)( )

Perform Activities: From the Home Folder, click Activities.•The upper area renders all activities you are involved in.•The lower area renders all instances of a certain activity your are involved in


Business Process Flow- Activities (2 of 8)( )•The Activity lists the process name, context, action required, instances completed, and the Process Manager.

Cli k M lti l A i•Click Multiple Assignees.

•System shows the performers and Reviewers on the next

f th A ti itscreen for the Activity


Business Process Flow- Activities (3 of 8)( )•Select a view in the left panel. It shows the content in the workspace canvas.

•Click the hyperlink to perform the actionyp p



•Click alternate Activities to see other contents as shown below.•Perform the action: Click the hyperlink to launch the action. In the Business Process Flowside panel you can see all the hyperlinks which are in the same type This makes end-side panel, you can see all the hyperlinks which are in the same type. This makes enduser’s work easier as they can perform the same type of actions without going back toActivity Workspace.



•Click the Input Target by Product action and EPM Add-in for Excel automatically opens.

•When you are finished entering data and have saved the data, you can go back to ActivityWorkspace by clicking the Return to Activity Workspace button.


.


•Complete or Submit the Activity Workspace: Click the Complete or Submit button in the toolbar of the workspace to complete that Activity.

•If the Activity doesn’t require review, the button label is “Complete” rather than “Submit”.


Business Process Flow- Activities (7 of 8)( )•To switch activities inside the activity workspace. Click Switch Activity to see available activities. Once you choose one of them, the current activity workspace is closed, and the workspace of the chosen activity will be openworkspace of the chosen activity will be open.



In Place Completion

• Activity instances can be completed without opening the Activity workspace Select one or• Activity instances can be completed without opening the Activity workspace. Select one or more Activity instance(s) in the list, and open the Actions menus in the toolbar. The user can select one of the following: Complete, Approve, or Reject activities.


Business Process Flows - TemplatesLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain Process Template ManagementDefine process parameters and create Activities with associated Activity WorkspacesE plain Content definition b adding actions e isting content or ne reportsExplain Content definition by adding actions, existing content ,or new reports on the flyExplain the LCM template (draft, deploy, archive)


© 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.













p g g ycountries.


Business Process Flows - Instances

Business Process Flows - InstancesLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain how to manage the lifecycle of BPF instances: Create/Start, Suspend, Reset, Archive.Explain how to manage assignment of process and activity instances.E l i E M il tifi tiExplain E-Mail notification


Topicsp

1. Business Example

2. Process Instance Creation

3. Process Instance Management

4. E-mail Notification

Business Example

A BPF instance is an iteration of a business process flow template that is p pin active use.

An authorized user can create a BPF template called quarterly Reportingto coordinate the quarterly reporting activities of various personnelto coordinate the quarterly reporting activities of various personnel.When that user, or another authorized user, creates a business processflow for a specific period, such as December 2010, based on thequarterly Reporting template, the December 2010 BPF is considered aninstance. In this example, there are four instances of the quarterlyReporting BPF, one for each quarter of the year.


Topicsp

1. Business Example




Process Instance Creation

How to create a new process instanceClick the New button on the toolbarClick the New button on the toolbar

The process instance creation wizard appears.



In the wizard,Select the process template which you have created and click NextSet the process instance owner



Set the process instance contextCheck the assignment. You can also change the performers/reviewers.



Create the process instance. You can also start the process by selecting the Start this process instance checkbox.



The process instance Planning for context Budget, 2012 has been created.p g g


Topicsp

1. Business Example




Process Instance ManagementFunctionsFunctions

Function DescriptionStart To start a an process Instance.

Suspend/resume To suspend a running instance, Select the instance and choose suspendTo resume a suspended instance, Select the instance and click resume

Change Assignment process instance owner and activity owners can be changed by selecting change assignment option.

Reset To reset BPF instances back to step 1, choose Reset.

A hi T hi fi li d i ti i t h A hi


Archive To archive finalized or inactive instances, choose Archive.

Process Instance ManagementPerform ActivitiesPerform Activities

This function displays the business process flows that contain steps requiringp y p p q gspecific action by the currently logged-on user.

Home>Activities: Displays the processes and steps in which the currently logged-on usercan perform certain actions. Users can open a specific step region or activity and executet k f th t t itasks for that step region.


Process Instance ManagementPerform Activities StepsPerform Activities Steps

• Go to Home page• Click the Activities link in the left panel. All the process instances which you are involved in

will be listed in the upper table.• Select the process instance that you have created. Only the activity instances which you

are involved in will be listed in the lower tableare involved in will be listed in the lower table.• To open the activity instance, click the name of the Activity instance. It opens the Activity

Workspace which is associated with.


Process Instance ManagementPerform Activities – Activity Workspace (Steps)Perform Activities Activity Workspace (Steps)

Choose Client > Home > Activities > Activity Workspace Select a view in the left panel. It shows the content in the workspace canvas


Click the hyperlink to launch the action




Submit the Activity Workspace: Click a Complete or Submit button in the toolbar of the workspace.

Once submitted, the status will be changed to “Submitted”. And, the labels of the button will be changed to “Approve” and “Reject”


button will be changed to Approve” and Reject”. Close the Activity Workspace by clicking “x” mark in the tab.

Process Instance ManagementMonitor Process InstanceMonitor Process Instance

Choose Web Client > Home > Process MonitorClick the Process Monitor link in the left side pane: All the process instances which you have right to monitor will be listed.

S th d t il f i t Cli k th f i t th t t


See the details of a process instance: Click the name of process instance that you want to see details. Or just select the process instance, and click the Open button in the toolbar. Then, it opens a new tab and shows the details of the selected process instance.

Process Instance ManagementMonitor Process Instance – StepsMonitor Process Instance Steps

See the details of the process instance: It lists all the activity instances with its status.



Switch to Group By mode: Click Show Groups in the toolbar. It shows Groups in the left pane so that you can see only those groups you want to. The groups supported are:– Activity – Context– Action Required– Status



Complete (Finalize) the process instance: You can finalize a process instance if you are the process instance owner. Select a process instance of which activity instance are all completed, then click the Complete button in the toolbar.


Process Instance ManagementArchive a Process InstanceArchive a Process Instance

Choose Administrator > Process InstancesCompleted (Finalized) process instance can be archived. Select the completed process instance, and click Archive on the toolbar.


Topicsp

1. Business Example




E-mail Notification

Email notification is used to notify owners when:BPF Instance is created and actions are takenInstance is completed and ready to be finalizedReviewers are notified by e-mail when a step region is ready for review

Types of BPF e-mailsPlanning and Consolidation contains a number of e-mail templates by defaultThese are S-type (system) templates, which cannot be modifiedA copy of each system template can be created and customized according to theA copy of each system template can be created and customized according to the business needs. These are C-type (customized) templates.


E-mail NotificationSetupSetup

Execute transaction SE80 in the backend system.Choose Package in the left navigation pane, then enter the package name UJB.Click F8. It opens BPC: BPF Email template table overview.



To see the detail of each template, double-click a template.



There are two ways to set body of email template, either using Smart Form Body or Email Body.If both are set, then Smart Form Body will be used. If there is not Smart Form Body, then, Email Body will be used.


E-mail NotificationActivation/DeactivationActivation/Deactivation

To activate/deactivate the email notification,Click the icon to edit. The email template list appears in Edit mode.Change the value in column Is Active to yes or no to activate/deactivate.


E-mail NotificationManage Email Notification Template: Using Smart Form BodyManage Email Notification Template: Using Smart Form Body





Enter the name of the new Smart Form Body and create it.y

Note: Name of custom email template should start with Z or Y. Note: You can create this new template only as a Local object. Or you can transport it by choosing a packageit by choosing a package.



Form Template can be viewed by clicking the Change button. You can create new one using the Create button.



Expand the Pages and Windows until you see the leaf node which is NOTIF_BODY. This node will display the notification text body that you can edit.



Double-click NOTIF_BODY to open the notification text body as shown below.



Example of Email Notification is below.p


E-mail NotificationCreate Custom Email TemplateCreate Custom Email Template

Click the New Entries button in the toolbar...






Business Process Flows - InstancesLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain how to manage the lifecycle of BPF instances: Create/Start, Suspend, Reset, Archive.Explain how to manage assignment of process and activity instances.E plain E Mail notificationExplain E-Mail notification















p g g ycountries.


Work Status

Work StatusLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain the new Work Status features


Work Status Introduction

Creating a Work StatusgYou must specify a name for the work statusYou must also specify who controls the work status

How to create a Work StatusSpecify a name for the work statusYou must specify who controls the work status

The owner (s)The manager (s) or both

You can add a descriptionYou can define who can change the data in the systemg y


Create a Work Status

You must specify a name for this work status.p y

You can add a description.

You must specify who controls this work status:The owner(s)The manager(s)Both

You must then specify which data entry methods are permitted when this status is set to a slice of data. The data entry methods are:

Data manager JournalJournalManual EntryCommentsDocuments


Manage the Work Status

To manage the work status, you can:g yReorder a work statusEdit a work statusDelete a work status


Managing Work StatusBenefitsBenefits

Benefits of this feature include:Managing data locking settings of a modelManaging notifications

For example, there are several benefits related to managing the work status, including:

Reordering a work statusEditing a work statusEditing a work statusDeleting a work status


Manage the Work StatusReorder a Work StatusReorder a Work Status

Click the Reorder button available in the toolbar of the list of work statuses:This command opens a popup window in which are listed all the work statusesSelect the work status (only single selection) you want to reorder and click the Move Down or Move Up buttons A k t t th t i t t l k d t b d dA work status that is set to unlocked cannot be reordered


Manage Notifications

You can enable email notification capabilityUse the Notifications command from the toolbar of the work statuses

Unlocked is the default work status that cannot be deleted nor reordered


Manage Data Locking Settings of a Model

To be able to edit the data locking settings of a model select the corresponding row g g p gin the list at the bottom of the overview page and then click the Edit button (or directly click the Settings for: model ID hyperlink ).


Work StatusLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain the new Work Status features















p g g ycountries.


Supported Server Configurations

Supported Server ConfigurationsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe the supported server configurations


Topicsp

1. Architecture

2. Supported Platforms

ArchitectureChangesChanges

.NET 3.5 Components Onlyp yPure 64 bits processes Single Process no multiple processes (COM+ processes).NET impersonationpNo need for Reporting ServicesConfiguration file for scalabilityWeb server and application server cannot be separateWeb server and application server cannot be separateImplementation of Global Cache


ArchitectureBenefitsBenefits

Benefits of new architectureBetter stability and performances using new NET3 5 frameworkBetter stability and performances using new .NET3.5 frameworkCapacity to use all resources of application server because of capability to use pure 64 bit processesNo need of reporting services required; less maintenance and all the reports from web are using the same technology.NET impersonation is used for security. In this way standard BPC users don’t have any direct access to SQL Server database or SSAS database.Technical configuration of system is done into configuration file web configTechnical configuration of system is done into configuration file web.config. Web server and application server cannot be split anymore because the system exposes just web services starting with this release.Global Cache implementation will help for better performances of the system. For initial

l th f ll i f ti liti ill b i l t drelease the following functionalities will be implemented:– Send/Retrieve data– DM packages– Script Logic


– Log on

ArchitectureDiagramDiagram


Topicsp

1. Architecture

2. Supported platforms

Supported Platforms

The follow Operating Systems are supportedWindows 2008 & R2 series (64 bits only supported) Standard enterprise and DataWindows 2008 & R2 series (64 bits only supported) Standard, enterprise and Data CenterIIS 7.0/7.5NET 3 5 Framework.NET 3.5 Framework

SQL Server 2008 including R2 – Enterprise Edition


Supported Server ConfigurationsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe the supported server configurations















p g g ycountries.

ArchitectureDiagramDiagram


Topicsp

1. Architecture

2. Supported platforms

Supported Platforms

The follow Operating Systems are supportedWindows 2008 & R2 series (64 bits only supported) Standard enterprise and DataWindows 2008 & R2 series (64 bits only supported) Standard, enterprise and Data CenterIIS 7.0/7.5NET 3 5 Framework.NET 3.5 Framework

SQL Server 2008 including R2 – Enterprise Edition


Supported Server ConfigurationsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe the supported server configurations















p g g ycountries.


Dimensions

DimensionsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yManage DimensionsExplain how to enter membersManage Dimension membersManage Dimension StructureManage Dimension FormulasDefine properties and hierarchies


DimensionsDimensions OverviewDimensions Overview

The main overview page contains the list of all the dimensions in the environmentIn the new Admin Web Client, you can access the “Dimensions” view by selecting the


, y y g“Dimensions” under the Dimensions and Models domain in the left side panel.

DimensionsDimensions OverviewDimensions Overview

On the right side you can see the Dimension ID, its description, Type and Status. – Dimension ID: The name of the Dimension– Dimension Description: Description of Dimension– Dimension Type: Specifies the type of Dimension – Status: Indicates the status of dimension like whether the dimensions needs to be processed (yellowStatus: Indicates the status of dimension like whether the dimensions needs to be processed (yellow

icon) or not (green icon)

When you select the Dimension, the toolbar with actions gets activated. “New”: This action enables to create a dimension– New : This action enables to create a dimension

– “Edit Members”: This action enables to edit the list of members– “Edit Structure”: This action enables to edit the structure of the dimension to manage its properties– “Delete”: This action enables to delete a dimension by copying a selected dimension– “Process”: This action enables to process a dimension or a multiple selection of dimensions


DimensionsCreate a New DimensionCreate a New Dimension

Create a New Dimension: In order to create a Dimension, you need to access and select the “Dimensions” view under the “Dimensions and Models” domain in the navigational panel. Click on the “New” button in the toolbar to create a new dimension. Upon clicking new button a dialogs box opens in which you can specify– ID (Mandatory) – Name of the Dimension– Description (Optional) – Dimension Description


Description (Optional) Dimension Description– Type (Mandatory) – Dimension Type

DimensionDimension TypesDimension Types

Below are the different dimension types:Account – (A) Category – (C) Audit – (D) - (“Data Source” in 7.5 version)E tit (E)Entity – (E)Group – (G)Intercompany – (I)Currency – (R)Currency (R)Subtables – (S)Time – (T)User defined – (U)


DimensionStructure of DimensionStructure of Dimension

The new dimension is created and directly opens up the structure of the Dimension whereThe new dimension is created and directly opens up the structure of the Dimension where some specific system properties are automatically generated.System generated properties will be highlighted with a blue background which means that they cannot be modified nor deleted.


You can add some properties, some hierarchies and set some other settings like “Allow dimension formulas”

DimensionStructure of DimensionStructure of Dimension

There are 2 ways to open up the structure of the Dimension:– You can edit the structure of a dimension from the list of dimensions – Edit Structure command in the

toolbartoo ba– Or from the dimension members list page – Edit Structure hyperlink


DimensionAdd Dimension PropertiesAdd Dimension Properties

In all types of dimensions, you can manually add a new user-defined property by using the “Add New Property” menu option. A user-defined property can be deleted. You have to select the property and then use the “Remove” command to delete the property. You can also change the name and the number of characters directly in the cells of the list


You can also change the name and the number of characters directly in the cells of the list of properties. The same for the ID but only if the new property has not been saved yet.

DimensionAdd a Dimension PropertyAdd a Dimension Property

Required Properties for Consolidation, Ownership and Rate:Depending on the type of the Dimension, you can automatically add a set of required properties for Consolidation and / or Ownership and / or Rate Modelproperties for Consolidation and / or Ownership and / or Rate Model.You can use the “Add Required Properties for Consolidation (or Ownership or Rate model) menu in the toolbar to add the required properties. These properties are user-defined and can be changed or removed.


DimensionAdd HierarchiesAdd Hierarchies

In the Structure page of a dimension, hierarchies can be defined by clicking on the “Add” Button which opens a dialog box in which you must specify the name of the hierarchy. The name of the hierarchy is just a caption (display name) and not the ID. In Business Obj t Pl i d C lid ti 7 5 NW i th ID f th t “PARENTH#” iObjects Planning and Consolidation 7.5 NW version, the ID of the type “PARENTH#” is automatically generated by the system.In 10.0 version, you can have breaks in the sequence of hierarchy ID’s ( PARENTH1, PARENTH3, PARENTH4 , and so on)


You can change the Name by editing the field directly and can also remove the Hierarchy by selecting it in the list and use the ‘Remove” command.

DimensionDimension SettingsDimension Settings

Referential integrity setting:g y gDepending on the type of the dimension, you can specify a dimension which will be used as a referential for validating the values for a specific property.values for a specific property. Referential integrity is same as the “Reference Dimension” in the 7.5 version.

Allow Member Formulas setting:Allow Member Formulas setting: This option must be checked in order to be able to specify some member formulas for the dimension in the “Member Formulas” view If this option is not checked theview. If this option is not checked, the dimension is not available in this “Member Formulas” view


DimensionManage Dimension MembersManage Dimension Members

You can edit the list of members directly from the list of dimensions (Edit members y (command in the toolbar) or from the Structure page of the dimension (hyperlink)


DimensionsManage Dimension MembersManage Dimension Members

The members are managed in an “Excel like” grid in which you can use the main features that are expected for the tasks like manually entering the dimension member, copy and paste (within the list and from Excel) sorting filtering and ordering columns


paste (within the list and from Excel), sorting, filtering and ordering columns.

DimensionsCreate Dimension MemberCreate Dimension Member

You can create a dimension member by entering a valid ID. Once saved the ID cannot be changed anymore. The max length of an ID is now up to 32 characters. Also dimension member ID can accept Dash and Underscores but it cannot accept the


Also dimension member ID can accept Dash and Underscores but it cannot accept the special characters.

DimensionCreate a Dimension MemberCreate a Dimension Member

A member status is displayed in the row headers of the list for all the Members that have been edited (new or modified members)A specific icon enables to identify the status of these members: – Member has been inserted– Member to be savedMember to be saved– Errors– A tooltip provides a description of the status and details for errorsYou can identify cells which have been edited The cells which have been edited will have the background color as yellow which helps in easily identifying the edited properties/cells


DimensionManage Dimension MemberManage Dimension Member

Revert: You can revert the changes made to the members as long as these changes are not

fi d h iconfirmed when saving. Select the rows for which you want to abort the changes and click on the “Revert” command from the toolbar. The members will be restored as they were at the last saving.


DimensionManage Dimension MemberManage Dimension Member

Restore deleted members:You can use the Restore deleted members command button from the toolbar in order to restore all or some of the deleted members unless these deletions are not confirmed whenrestore all or some of the deleted members unless these deletions are not confirmed when saving.



Sorting Order / Apply Hierarchy order: By default the list of members is sorted by ascending ID and you can the apply a new sorting order to the column or columnssorting order to the column or columnsIn 7.5 version, the order of members that a user can specify in the list is not persisted when saving.However, the user can manually define the order of members under each node of a

f f /


hierarchy and then apply this specific sorting order to the list of members when he/she wants by using the “Apply Hierarchy Order” command.


You can export the list of members into a CSV file by using the “Export to CSV” command.



View and manage hierarchies in a graphical editor: If hierarchies have been defined for dimensions, you can open a graphical editor to edit th hi hi Cli k th “Vi ” d d li t t l t th “Hi h ” t dit ththese hierarchies. Click on the “View” drop down list to select the “Hierarchy” to edit the hierarchies. Here you can reorder leaves and nodes of a hierarchy directly directly in this editor by using the “Move Up” and “Move Down” button or use drag and drop method to change the


parent/child relationships.


If there are several hierarchies in the dimension, then you can switch from one to another by using the “Show”one to another by using the Show drop down list.You can also choose to display by “Member ID only” or “Member ID and D i ti ” j t “M bDescription” or just “Member Description” by using the “Display” command drop down list.


DimensionDimension Save and ProcessDimension Save and Process

Save: After making modifications to the dimension members you can simply Save the DimensionAfter making modifications to the dimension members you can simply Save the Dimension and Process it later.If there are any errors while saving the dimension members then a detailed error message will be shown.


While closing a dimension if dome changes have not been saved due to some errors, then these changes will be lost.

DimensionDimension Save and ProcessDimension Save and Process

Save and Process: Y di tl di i f th li t f b (li t hi h i ) bYou can directly process a dimension from the list of members (list or hierarchy view) by using the “Save and Process” command from the toolbarYou can also process the dimension from the main list of dimensionsAny errors encountered while processing the dimension will be detailed in the message


y p g gdisplayed in the status panel.

DimensionManage Dimension FormulasManage Dimension Formulas

Member Formulas: You can access the “Member Formulas” view by selecting the “Member Formulas” under the “Rules” domain in the left side panel. Upon selecting the Member Formulas, it would show the list of all the dimensions for which member formulas are allowed. You can see the ID and description of the dimensions , the number of formulas it has and the status of the dimension whether it needs to be processed or not


and the status of the dimension whether it needs to be processed or not. Toolbar options “Open” enables to open the list of formulas of the dimension and “Process” option will enable to process a dimension or multiple selection of dimensions.

DimensionCreate a Member FormulaCreate a Member Formula

To create a new formula, open the list of formulas of the dimension and then use the “New” button which opens the Formula editor. You can select the member that must be calculated and then type the syntax of the formula.


DimensionCreating Dimension FormulasCreating Dimension Formulas

Dimension Formulas toolbar contains the following actions:“New” button enables to create a member formula“Edit” button enables to open a formula“Delete” button enables to delete a formula (multiple selection allowed)“Processing the dimension” button enables to process the dimension


DimensionDimension FormulasDimension Formulas

The formula is validated when processing the dimension.The formula editor only checks if the selected member does not already have a formulaThe formula editor only checks if the selected member does not already have a formula and that the syntax doesn’t have more than 255 characters.When a formula is added or changed, the dimension needs to be processed. This enables to identify which formulas in a dimension that needs to be processed after creation or modification


modification.

DimensionsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Manage the dimensionsManage the dimension membersManage the dimension structureManage the HierarchiesManage the Member formulas















p g g ycountries.

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and j gConsolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaverNetWeaver<Unit Name>Troubleshooting and Debug Tools

Troubleshooting and Debug ToolsLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yAnalyze Trace and Log FilesExplain Useful Transaction codesCheck different transaction codes for logs and ExceptionsTrace file for Debugging logicCheck Data Manager log filesCheck Solution Manager DiagnosticsCheck Workload monitorCheck Workload monitorUse Appsight Black Box ServiceGenerate and Analyze Trace Files using E2E TraceExplain Troubleshooting Transportsp g pExplain Fiddler logs


Troubleshooting PC 10 NWOverview

While working with the product there is a possibility of getting an error. An error can occur due to number of reasons, so in order to find the root cause of an error it is important to check the different logs and traces. With the help of the logs and traces, an issue can be narrowed down easily. At the backend NetWeaver system, both Application and System related logs can be y , pp y ggenerated. All the exceptions, dumps, warnings will be logged in the NetWeaver system. You need to know where and what to check, for example:– All the Application related logs will be logged in SLG1 transaction code

ST22 is where all the dumps will be logged likewise– ST22 is where all the dumps will be logged likewise – SM21 is the transaction code to analyze the system logs This lesson provides an overview of the available logs and traces in the NetWeaver system.


TroubleshootingUseful Transaction Codes

NetWeaver offers tracing capabilities as well as debugging capabilities. Tracing capabilities within a NetWeaver system will help to troubleshoot the BPC issues. ST22: Check this transaction code to see if any ABAP dumps have occurred. It may be caused due to programming bugs or may be due to system issues, so check the details of the errors to see the root cause.SM21: Check this transaction code to see any system connection issues and errors.ST05 and ST01: These transaction codes are set to enable to RFC trace.SLG1: Check this transaction code to see if there are any application related error messages.SLG2: This transaction code is used for maintenance of the application logs.UJFS: This transaction code is used to access the Planning and Consolidation File Server .


TroubleshootingSLG1

All logs related to runtime exceptions are recorded in SLG1. When an exception occurs, the detailed information is written in the log item and is saved in the database. You can check the Business User Interface logs in SLG1.In the SLG1 log, the object is identified as UJ and the sub-object is identified as UJK for logic script UJJ for journals UJD for Data manager and so onlogic script, UJJ for journals, UJD for Data manager, and so on.


TroubleshootingUJFS

UJFS is called as the File Server. Logic Script logs and Data Manager logs are stored in UJFS. Logic Script logs are recorded in a file called debuglogic log and stored at the followingdebuglogic.log and stored at the following location: Root\Webfolders\Environment\Model\Privatepublication\Username\DateThe Data Manager logs are stored atThe Data Manager logs are stored at Root\Webfolders\Environment\Model\Privatepublication\username\tempfiles. The name of the log file contains the name of th k ti t d ththe package, a timestamp, and the extension.log.The log files need to be deleted at regular intervals since they take up considerable


amount of space.

TroubleshootingST22

Check this transaction code to see if any ABAP dumps have occurred. It may be caused due to programming bugs or may be due to system issues so check the details of theissues, so check the details of the errors to see the root cause.


TroubleshootingSM21

All the system connections and yrelated logs can be checked in SM21 transaction code.


TroubleshootingST05

RFC Trace in ABAP can be set in ST05 transaction code.


TroubleshootingST01

Other system traces can ybe generated in ST01 transaction code:

Authorization check (for ABAP authorizationABAP authorization objects)Kernel functionsDB Access (SQL Trace)Table Buffer TraceRFC CallsLock Operations


TroubleshootingWorkload Monitors

ST03N: is the transaction code which can be used to observe the workload records at the application server level.


TroubleshootingAppsight Black Box Service

Download the Appsight Black Box install files from the Service Marketplace. You can check the SAP Note:1356729 for downloading and installation instructions. Install the Black Box service in the standalone mode.You need to create a folder called Identity in the C:\Drive and copy the Startservice.bat and Stopservice bat files Start the Startservice bat file in order to start the loggingStopservice.bat files. Start the Startservice.bat file in order to start the logging.Once you start the application, the Identity folder contains an .ASL file, which is the log that will write all the information from the application. To maintain the logs on the system, stop and start the service at the end of each day, copy th fil t th f ld d h th li ti tthe file to another folder, and have the application create a new one.


TroubleshootingE2E Trace

You can generate trace files on client and server components for troubleshooting purposes using E2E Trace. Trace files collect information about client and server interactions presenting trace information about the entire request and response of a business process step. Trace files can be uploaded to the server for analysis in SAP Solution ManagerTrace files can be uploaded to the server for analysis in SAP Solution Manager Diagnostics.

Prerequisites:Ensure the latest Planning and Consolidation clients with the E2E Trace plug in areEnsure the latest Planning and Consolidation clients with the E2E Trace plug-in are installed on your client machine.Ensure Introscope Workstation has been downloaded to the PC.Ensure the DotNet agent of the Planning and Consolidation server is online.



Generating and analyzing trace files using E2E Trace involves the following tasks:g y g g g1. Enable tracing in the ABAP back-end system2. Perform a trace in the Administration module3. Perform a trace in the Microsoft Excel module4. Upload the trace file to SAP Solution Manager Diagnostic5. Evaluate the trace file in SAP Solution Manager



Enable Tracing in the ABAP Back-end Systemg y1. Enter the Root cause Analysis work center of SAP Solution Manager2. Choose End-to-End Analysis3. Select the query that contains all systems involved within the E2E trace and select the

t ID f th Pl i d C lid ti ABAP t ksystem ID of the Planning and Consolidation ABAP stack4. Choose Trace Analysis, which opens a new window with the E2E Trace Analysis

application5. Select the Trace Enabling tab5. Select the Trace Enabling tab6. Select the system ID of the Planning and Consolidation ABAP stack7. Select Enable, a green icon displays besides the system ID


TroubleshootingSolution Manager

Evaluation of Traces in SAP Solution Managerg1. In SAP Solution Manager, access the Root Cause Analysis work center2. Choose End-to-End Analysis3. Select the query that contains all systems involved within the E2E Trace and select all

tsystems4. Choose Trace Analysis to open a new window with the e2E Trace Analysis application 5. Select the trace from the list6 If you want the SMD to collect corresponding server side trace data choose Select6. If you want the SMD to collect corresponding server side trace data, choose Select

systems for Trace collection dynamically7. Select the first step of the recorded E2E Transaction Trace and choose Display8. Select the Summary tab and Message table tab


TroubleshootingSolution Manager

9. Expand the tray Server Analysis and choose the Request tree tab.10. Choose Expand all to see incoming http calls, outgoing DOTNET Connector calls and

incoming RFC calls and then do one of the following:o To view Introscope Transaction Trace data, select a line with incoming http calls, then choose

Display Introscope Transaction Trace.p y po To view ABAP Trace data, select a line with incoming RFC calls, then choose Display aggregated

ABAP Trace.o To view ABAP SQL Trace data, select a line with incoming RFC calls, then choose Display ABAP

SQL Trace Summary


Troubleshooting Transports

Transports allow you to move an environment across a landscape. When objects are deleted either in source or target system, the two major object types exhibit different behavior patterns during the import of a transport into the target system.When an environment is deleted, you can make sure that all data has been removed. Use program UJT CHECK TABLE ENTRIES to check how many records exist in the UJ*program UJT_CHECK_TABLE_ENTRIES to check how many records exist in the UJ database tables for a particular environment. Never change the data model (environment, model, dimensions, or properties) in the target systems. If you change objects in a target system, the transports that originate from development will no longer import correctly Other components such as reports inputdevelopment will no longer import correctly. Other components, such as reports, input schedules, or data manager packages (not data model related) can be changed in any instance. Do not change the structure or definition of Planning and Consolidation related data model bj t i BW th t i I f A I f b d M lti id I f Obj t If h itobjects in BW that is InfoArea, Infocube and Multiprovider, InfoObjects. If you change it

then transport will fail. Change in the technical name of the of objects between landscapes will not effect the transports.


TroubleshootingFiddler logs

The communication between Web Admin Client and Server takes place through RESTful Web Service.Communication takes place between the EPM Applications through SOAP Web Services.Fiddler is a HTTP Debugging proxy tool which inspects all the HTTP traffic and logs the traffic between your computer and the internet This is useful to debug the Wed Admintraffic between your computer and the internet. This is useful to debug the Wed Admin issues and so on.


Troubleshooting and Debug ToolsLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Analyze Trace and Log FilesExplain Useful Transaction codesCheck different transaction codes for logs and ExceptionsTrace file for Debugging logicCheck Data Manager log filesCheck Solution Manager DiagnosticsCheck Workload monitorCheck Workload monitorUse Appsight Black Box ServiceGenerate and Analyze Trace Files using E2E TraceExplain Troubleshooting Transportsp g pExplain Fiddler logs















p g g ycountries.


Journal Templates

Journal TemplatesLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain the new Journal Templates features


Introduction

Journal Template: pJournals were rewritten as a web component but can still be invoked from the Excel client.Accessed from the Admin Web Client, journal templates can be created for Planning and Consolidations models.


Business Example

Journal templates are input forms where users enter journal entries.p p j

For example, a journal template can be created for each model. You can set up multiple templates for each model in SAP BPC.


The New Journal Template and FeaturesBenefitBenefit

A benefit of this feature includes:By selecting a journal template it activates/deactivates available actions that can be performed.– Open, Journal Parameters, Delete Journals


The New Journal Template and FeaturesAccessing the Journal TemplateAccessing the Journal Template

A new journal template is defined in the Administration section.j p



An existing journal template can be deleted in the Administration section, but only g j p yafter all journal entries using that template have been deleted as well.



All existing journal entries can be deleted in this Administration section.g j



Journal parameters can be configured for all journal entries associated with the p g jdefined template.


The New Journal Template and FeaturesJournal Template FeaturesJournal Template Features

Click the journal template name and a new tab opens, revealing the template j p p g pconfiguration options.



Select the journal header dimension by highlighting the desired dimension on the j y g g gMembers area (left side) and using the arrow buttons to add/remove the dimension into the Detail Column for Header area (right side).



The journal template can define how the journal entries will be displayed. By j p j p y ychecking the Balance by Entity option, the journal entries will be subtotaled and checked for balances across each Entity (the Balance by Currency works in a similar fashion).


Journal TemplatesLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain the new Journal Templates features















p g g ycountries.


Context Defaults

Context DefaultsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain the new Context Defaults features


Topicsp

1. Configure the Context DefaultsContext defaults overview pageHow to set a model as defaultConfigure the defaults for a model

Configure the Context DefaultsContext Defaults Overview PageContext Defaults Overview Page

To access Context DefaultsChoose the Administration tabChoose Features > Context DefaultsContext Defaults


Configure the Context DefaultsSet a Model as DefaultSet a Model as Default

To set a model as defaultSelect the modelClick the Set as Default button


Configure the Context DefaultsConfigure the Defaults for a Model (1)Configure the Defaults for a Model (1)

To configure the defaults for a model (1)Select the modelClick the Edit button in the toolbar of bottom pane


Configure the Context DefaultsConfigure the Defaults for a Model (2)Configure the Defaults for a Model (2)

To configure the defaults for a model (2)Specify for each dimension of the selected model


Context DefaultsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain the new Context Defaults features















p g g ycountries.


Drill-Through

Drill-ThroughLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain the new Drill-Through featuresCreate a new Drill-ThroughSpecify the specific parameters of a Drill-ThroughDelete any parameterTest a Drill-Through


Business Example

Your company is doing a planning report based on regional data.p y g p g p g

During reporting, you need to have more information about the selected region.

The Drill-Through functionality is linked to an online search webside, giving you all necessary information.


Create a New Drill-ThroughPrerequisitesPrerequisites

Before performing (or using) the Drill-Through feature, ensure that the following p g ( g) g gprerequisites have been met:

You are logged on to any BPC Environment with administration authorizationsFrom the Home Screen, switch to the Administration Area by clicking the Planning and Consolidation Administration linkConsolidation Administration link


Create a New Drill-ThroughAdministrationAdministration

Inside the Administration Area you will find the Drill-Through maintenance in the y gcontent tree under the Features node.



Click the New button on the toolbar of the overview page to create a new definition. p g



General settings:gEnter an ID (mandatory)Enter a description (optional)Specify the target URL– There is basic control performed while typing the URL to check that the address starts with http://Select the model from which the drill can be launched.


Create a New Drill-ThroughCreate a Google Search Drill-ThroughCreate a Google Search Drill Through

Create a Drill-Through to Google Search Engineg g gIn the ID field, enter SearchGoogle (without any Spaces)In the Description field enter a descriptionIn the Target URL field enter http://google.com/search?In the Drill can be launched from model field, choose Consolidation



Parameter mappingpp gTo finalize the configuration of the definition, you need to configure the mapping of parameters that will be used in the URL to drill from a report to the target data.

Click the Add button to insert a new parameter in the mapping table.



In the Parameter column, enter the code q of the parameter.q p

In the second column you can specify that the mapping of this parameter will beIn the second column you can specify that the mapping of this parameter will be based on a user-defined value or a dimension assigned to the model. For this example, select the Account dimension.



Finally, in the last column, you can either specify a value that will be passed to the y y p y pparameter (if you have chosen User defined-values or specify that the mapping of the parameter will be based on the ID of the dimension member or one of the properties of the dimension.F thi l l t ID th t f th A t di iFor this example, select ID as the property of the Account dimension.


Create a New Drill-ThroughCreate a Google Search Drill-Through

If the mapping of a parameter is not valid, a status icon displays indicating an error.

Create a Google Search Drill Through

pp g p p y g


Create a New Drill-ThroughCreate a Google Search Drill-Through

Remove the p parameter by

Create a Google Search Drill Through

p p ySelecting the parameterClick the Remove button

Click the Save button at the top of the screen to save the query.


Create a New Drill-ThroughTest the Query

This command opens a popup window in which you have to manually enter a value

Test the Query

p p p p y yto simulate the mapping of the parameters that will use a member ID of the Account dimension.

In the Property or Value column, enter Gross Margin. This simulates a later


p y gselection of an account selection by gross margin.

Create a New Drill-ThroughTest the Query

As a result

Test the Query

The screen indicates a successful status.

The browser opens a new window showing the Google webpage with pre-selected search content.


Drill-ThroughLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain the new Drill-Through featuresCreate a new Drill-TroughSpecify the specific parameters of a Drill-TroughDelete any parameterTest a Drill-Trough















p g g ycountries.


Audit

AuditLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain Activity Audit changesExplain new audited tasks for Data Audit


Audit AdministrationMaintenanceMaintenance

In the Administration Area you will find the Audit maintenance in the content tree yunder the Features node.



The overview page of the Audit view is split into two distinct panes.p g p p

1

2



In the top pane, you can view and edit the settings of the activity audit.p p y g y

An activity audit type is set to Off if disabled and On if enabled.



In the pane below, you can see the main data audit settings configured for each p y g gmodel in the environment.

For each model, data audit is set to Off if disabled and On if enabled.If enabled, you can see for which categories in the model., y g


Audit AdministrationActivity Audit ConfigurationActivity Audit Configuration

You can edit the activity audit settings by clicking the Edit button.y g y g

This command opens a dialog box in which you can enable or disable each type of activity audit, by flagging or unflagging the specific type.


Audit AdministrationActivity Audit ConfigurationActivity Audit Configuration

After clicking the Save button, the settings are activated.g g


Audit AdministrationData Audit ConfigurationData Audit Configuration

You can edit the activity audit settings for each Model.y gSelect one Model in the list

Click the Edit button

Or use the Configuration for: … hyperlink



On this page, you can manage a matrix that enables you to activate the data audit p g y g yfor each of the categories (members of the category dimension) and also for each type of data management task independently.

Select Yes in the drop-down list of each intersection to activate the data audit.You can also specify, for each category, a frequency for a data audit purge (that is, archiving

f d b i DM k )


process performed by running a DM package).


Click Save to validate the selections.



If the data audit is enabled for at least one task in one category, the audit trail status g yis set to On.

The list of categories is also updated accordingly.g p g y


AuditLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain Activity Audit changesExplain new audited tasks for Data Audit















p g g ycountries.

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and j gConsolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaverNetWeaver<Unit Name>FIM Integration Set-up

FIM Integration Set-upLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain FIM Integration Set-up


Topicsp1. Pre-requisites

CMS authenticationConfigure link between BPC 10 and CMS

2. ConfigurationAdd users to BPCAdd users to BPCConfigure Link to FIM 10 from BPC 10

CMS Authentication

Central Management Systemg y

• The CMS is used to manage user authentication.

•You must declare users in the Central Management System.

• This will provide Single Sign On for users between BPC 10 and SAP FIM 10.

• You can install CMS with either BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 4.0 or as a stand alone mini platform, SAP BusinessObjects Information Platform Services 4.0.


Configure link between BPC 10 NW and CMS

Configuring CMS authentication in SAP BusinessObjects Planning and g g j gConsolidation 10

• You must configure the system to delegate its authentication to the SAP NetWeaver system.NetWeaver system.

• ZSAP_BPC_WS_USER allows users to use the BPC Web Services.


BPC Configuration

Adding users

You can add users to BPC using the Administration ConsoleYou can add users to BPC using the Administration Console.

• In the Navigation pane Select Security > Users, then click Add New Users from the Action Pane.


BPC Configuration

Adding Users

Th Add N U i d di l b h• The Add New Users wizard dialog box opens as shown.


BPC Configuration

Configuring the Link to FIM From SAP BusinessObjects Planning and g g j gConsolidation 10

• Launch SPRO transaction.

• On the Display IMG page double click Set Environment Parameters.


BPC Configuration

Enter the environment for which to set the parameters and the required information p qin the Environment Parameters page.


BPC Configuration

Update Environment Parametersp

After you have entered the appropriate parameters to configure the external link to FIM click Update. In the Administration console or the Web client the link will be displayed.displayed.


FIM Integration Set-upLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain FIM Integration Set-up















p g g ycountries.


Other Administration Parameters

Other Administration ParametersLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yCreate/Change administrative parameters in web UI and IMG– Functional Parameters– System Parameters

Technical Parameters– Technical Parameters


Topicsp

1. Introduction 4. Setup of BPC Technical P t

2. Business Example

3. Web Admin Task

ParametersSetup IMG parameter (Transaction SIMGH)Setup IMG parameter process

BPC 7.5 – Web Admin TasksChanges in BPC 10Examples of parameters moved to UI

Setup IMG parameter process

5. List of Parameters

Introduction

Administration parameters are used to change/enhance the functionality and p g yconfiguration of BPC Application.

For example ALLOW FILE SIZE

Functional Parameters

Configuration Parameters

For example, APPROVALORG

For example, ALLOW_FILE_SIZEConfiguration Parameters

System Parameters For example, AVAILABLEFLAG


Topicsp


2. Business Example

3. Web Admin Task





Business Example

Administration parameters are necessary components of every p y p yBusiness planning and consolidation application.

They are mainly used to change and enhance the functionality of the application.application.

Admin Parameters can be enforced at different levels in BPC.


Topicsp


2. Business Example

3. Web Admin Task





BPC 7.5 - Web Admin Tasks


Changes in BPC 10

BPC NW 7.5 – Set Application Set / Application parameters

“Functional” parameters “Configuration” parameters “System” parametersFunctional parametersset by the user

e.g. APPROVALORG

Configuration parametersset by the user

e.g. ALLOW_FILE_SIZE

System parameterscontrolled by the system

e.g. AVAILABLEFLAG

BPC NW 10.0

Table = UJA_USER_DEF

EXAMPLE:The Application Setup Tasks include these main steps:1. Manage the KPI Library

Controlled only throughthe related functions

or options in the

Set these parameter valuesin the UI of the

Administration Workspace

Set these configurationparameter values

in IMGg y2. Manage Roles3. Manage Conversion Factors4. Manage Reporting Frameworks

Administration Workspace

e.g. “Change Status” functione.g. “Hierarchy” setting

managed in the Work Status view

Transaction = SIMGH


5. View Organization Hierarchy6. Manage Audit Logs

Tables = UJA_PARAM (Cross Environment level) / UJA_PARAM_APP (Environment & Model level)Except for few “system” parameters which are still stored in UJA_USER_DEF

Examples of Parameters Moved to UI – 1/2


Examples of Parameters Moved to UI – 2/2


Topicsp


2. Business Example

3. Web Admin Task





Set IMG ParametersPrerequisitesPrerequisites

Before performing changes in IMG parameters, ensure that the following p g g p gprerequisites have been met:

BPC 10 Installation - CompleteBPC 10 Post Installation Configuration - CompleteId tif th t d t b h dIdentify the parameters needs to be changedImpact of parameter change should be analyzed/assessed


Setup IMG ParameterTransaction SIMGHTransaction SIMGH


Setup IMG Parameter Process-1/4








Topicsp


2. Business Example

3. Web Admin Task





Functional and System Parameters Managed Through the Admin UI and Functions – 1/2Level Category Parameter Name Parameter Description Optional Storage table

Model Work Status APPROVALORG If you w ant to use the w ork status feature, you must use this field to identify the hierarchy level (H1, H2, H3, ..., Hn) for w hich you w ant to track the w ork status of deliverables.You can define only one hierarchy for each application w ithin an application set. For alternate organizations, "No Status" is displayed w hen view ing those members in the w ork status screen.If this field is left blank, w ork status tracking is not enabled.

Required UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment Work Status APPROVALSTATUSMAIL Defines w hether ow ners and managers receive an e-mail w hen there is a change to an assigned w ork status Optional UJ0 PARAM APP

Admin UI and Functions 1/2

Environment Work Status APPROVALSTATUSMAIL Defines w hether ow ners and managers receive an e mail w hen there is a change to an assigned w ork status.Has the follow ing possible values:Yes: Send e-mailNo: Do not send e-mailIn the Microsoft version of Planning and Consolidation, the follow ing SMTP application set parameters must be set up as w ell to use e-mail notif ications in the system: SMTPAUTH, SMTPPASSWORD, SMTPPORT, SMTPSERVER, and SMTPUSER.In the NetWeaver version of the system, the ABAP SMTP service is used for sending e-mails.

Optional UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment Work Status APPROVALSTATUSMSG Allow s you to define a custom e-mail message that is sent to the ow ners and managers of a w ork status w hen a w ork status code is changed. The message is applicable to all applications in the application set.You can customize the message using the follow ing variables:


You can customize the message using the follow ing variables:

%USER% — Name of user w ho changed this status%STA% — Work status%OWNER% — Entity ow ner (Microsoft version only)%TIME% — Time of change%REGION% - Lock region (NetWeaver version only) — For example: ENTITY: CG1, TIME: 2009.Q1, DATASRC: DC_1, PROJECT: PRJ_1, PRODUCT: PRO_1ExampleYou can create a message such as, This is to inform you that %USER% has updated the w ork status for %REGION% on %TIME%%REGION% on %TIME%.

Environment Audit AUDIT_ADMIN Optional UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment Audit AUDIT_BIZRULE Optional UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment Audit AUDIT_BPF Optional UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment Audit AUDIT_USER Optional UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment Environment Mngt AVAILABLEFLAG Controls w hether the system is offline or not. 1 means the system is online and available for sending data to the database. You can take the system off line by changing the value to 0. This setting can also be controlled w ithin the administration console. Default value = "Current Appset status is available"


Environment Environment Mngt AVAILABLEMSG The message that is displayed to users w ho try to access an application that is offline (AVAILABLEFLAG = 0). For example, the message might be “Business Planning and Consolidation is temporarily unavailable due to scheduled maintenance. Please try again later.”


Model Consolidations CALCULATION This parameter is f lag for account transformation of business rules. This value can be changed (checkbox) in the “Business Rules” view . Default = deactivated = 0Valid Value = 1 = activated

Optional UJA_USER_DEF

Model Model Mgmt COMMENT This parameter controls w hether comments are allow ed in the Application(Optional)Valid values:



• ON• OFFDefault value is ON

Model Consolidations OPENINGBALANCE This is a flag for opening of business rules. This value can be changed (checkbox) in the “Business Rules” view . Default = deactivated = 0Valid Value = 1 = activated


Functional and System Parameters Managed Through the Admin UI and Functions – 2/2Admin UI and Functions 2/2

Level Category Parameter Name Parameter Description Optional Storage table

Model Consolidations INTERCOMPANY This is a f lag for Eliminations of business rules. This value can be changed (checkbox) in the “Business Rules” view . Default = deactivated = 0Valid Value = 1 = activated


Model Consolidations FXTRANS This is a f lag for Currency translation of business rules. This value can be changed (checkbox) in the “Business Rules” view .


Default = deactivated = 0Model Consolidations INTCOBOOKINGS This is a f lag for intercompany booking of business rules. This value can be changed (checkbox) in the

“Business Rules” view . Default = deactivated = 0


Model Journals JRN_BALANCE Use this parameter to control w hether it is necessary for Journals to be balanced.Valid values are:0 – Journals need not be balanced 1 – Journals need to be balancedThe default value is 0.This parameter is used in Interface for Office - Journal.(N t N Y l t d f hi t i )


(Nota: N or Y are also accepted for historic reason)Model Journals JRN_MAXCOUNT Use this parameter to specify the maximum number of journal entries returned from a query in the Journal

Manager. This is useful if you have a large number of Journal Entries and w ant to protect a user from launching a long query.The default value is blank.


Model Journals JRN_REOPEN Use this parameter to define the default for reopening journals.Valid values are:0 – Does not allow reopening of journals1 – Allow s the reopening of journalsThe default value is 0.This parameter is used in Interface for Office – Journal.


p(Nota: N or Y are also accepted for historic reason)

Model Journals JRN_REOPEN_PROPERTY Use this parameter to specify the property name in the account dimension that is used to further f ilter the journals to reopen.A valid value is a property in the account type dimension.The default value is GROUP.If this parameter is not set, the GROUP property must exist in the account type dimension. Alternatively, to use a property other than GROUP, change the value of the ACCOUNT_PROPERTY column in the Journal Translation template. This value can be any property in the account type dimension, or *.


Environment BPC Web MAXLRCOLUMNS The maximum number of columns to display in a live report in BPC Web. The value includes header and data columns. For example, if you specify a value of 5, one heading column and four data columns are displayed. If th l f th ti d t i t i th db t bl it ill i d f lt l 30


the values for these option do not exist in the db table, it w ill give default value 30Environment BPC Web MAXLRROWS The maximum number of row s to display in a live report in BPC Web. The value includes header and data row s.

For example, if you specify a value of 5, one heading row and four data row s are displayed. the values for these option do not exist in the db table, it w ill give default value 1000


Model Legal Consolidation ORG_INTCO The non interco member in the Intercompany dimension in the ow nership application if using dynamic hierarchies.


Model Legal Consolidation ORG_PARENTPROPERTY This parameter is used w ith dynamic hierarchy statutory applications w hen defining f ixed hierarchies. The value must match the value in the ParentProperty property value of entities in the statutory application's supporting


Environment Excel Reporting TEMPLATEVERSION Current version number of the dynamic templates in your application set. Whenever you add to or change your input schedule or report dynamic templates, you should increment this version number so that users w ill automatically get the new templates dow nloaded w hen they log on to this application set. You can also reset the



automatically get the new templates dow nloaded w hen they log on to this application set. You can also reset the Model Consolidations USELIM This is a f lag for US eliminations of business rules. This value can be changed (checkbox) in the “Business

Rules” view . Default = deactivated = 0


Model Controls VALID This is a f lag for controls. This value can be changed (checkbox) in the “Controls” view . Default = deactivated = 0Valid Value = 1 = activated


IMG Parameters – 1/3Level Category Parameter Name Parameter Description Optional Storage table

Environment File Service ALLOW_FILE_SIZE This is the maximum file size a user is allow ed to upload. The default value is 100 MB. Required UJ0_PARAM_APP

Environment Security ALLOW_SSO_HTTP By default, SSO information can only be sent through an https URL.This parameter enables to remove this limitation and so allow s to send SSO information through an http URL.If the value = 1, in a Drill-Through def inition you can use and set the user-defined


parameter "SSO" to "true" even if this is an http URL.

Environment File Service ALLOW_EXTENSIONS Defines allow ed file extensions for upload. If [ALL], it allow s all extension in BPC. This w as in BPC 4.x and w as reintroduced in BPC 5.1 SP2.


Environment Interfaces AV_INT_LOC_1BPC Shall support no more than 5 Additional Available Interfaces. The number ‘1’ in the parameter above (or 2,3,4 and 5) would indicate what parameters are for what interface (each distinct available interface would having the 4 parameters all with the same trailing #)

= “A,O,W” User could choose w hat BPC Interface the Available Interface w ill show up in. User could choose ‘A’ alone for Admin or any combination of ‘O’ (Office) and ‘W’ (Web)


the 4 parameters all with the same trailing #)Environment Interfaces AV_INT_NAME_1

BPC Shall support no more than 5 Additional Available Interfaces. The number ‘1’ in the parameter above (or 2,3,4 and 5) would indicate what parameters are for what interface (each distinct available interface would having the 4 parameters all with the same trailing #)

= “FIM Main Application Page”Represents w hat the link looks like – a generic Icon is acceptable but w e have time the ability to provide distinctive jpeg or gif w ould be a nice to have.


Environment Interfaces AV_INT_SSO_1 BPC Shall support no more than 5 Additional Available Interfaces. The number ‘1’ in the parameter above (or

= “Yes” If SSO = No, then w e don’t include this in the SSO information in the SOAP header


2,3,4 and 5) would indicate what parameters are for what interface (each distinct available interface would having the 4 parameters all with the same trailing #)

Environment Interfaces AV_INT_URL_1BPC Shall support no more than 5 Additional Available Interfaces. The number ‘1’ in the parameter above (or 2,3,4 and 5) would indicate what parameters are for what interface (each distinct available interface would having the 4 parameters all with the same trailing #)

= “http://hostname and port for FIM/”The URL to the FIM Main Page associated w ith the FIM server


Environment Comments CLR COMMENTS HISTORY Deletes the comment history except for the last comment entered Optional UJ0 PARAM APPEnvironment Comments CLR_COMMENTS_HISTORY Deletes the comment history except for the last comment entered.Possible values for this parameter are:0: This is the default value and saves the history of comments.1: The historical comments are deleted and only the latest comments remain.


Environment File Service DEFAULT_EXTENSIONS This is the list of default extensions that are allow ed. This list includes: XLS,XLT,DOC,DOT,PPT,POT,XML,MHT,MHTML,HTM,HTML,XLSX,XLSM,XLSB,ZIP,PDF,PPTX,PPTM,POTX,POTM,DOCX,DOCM,DOTX,DOTM,CDM,TDM,PNG,GIF,JPG,CSS,MRC


Environment Technical LOGLEVEL Controls the minimum level of ABAP messages to store in the log in terms of severity, w hich you view by the transaction SLG1.The default value for this parameter is Info.



The possible values for this parameter are:DonothingInfoWarningErrorFatal

IMG Parameters – 2/3


Environment Technical TRACEUSER Defines the Planning and Consolidation user for w hich the system performs remote tracing, in the form DomainName\UserName. This parameter is blank by default, and is populated by an administrator only w hen conducting tracing activities for a specif ic client.


Environment and Model Data Manager background_server_group(formely called "EXECSERVER")

Use this parameter to specify the server group on w hich the Data Manager packages w ill run.If there is a server group specif ied at the Application level and is different than the one specif ied at the Application Set level, the Application level w ins.


Environment and Model Data Manager DM_WRITE_ZERO_DATA Use this parameter to enable Data Manager packages to w rite Zero data w hen loading transaction data to BPC (including from flat f ile, BW InfoProvider).If there is a parameter specif ied at the Application level and is different than the one specif ied at the Application Set level, the Application level w ins.Possible values for this


parameter are:Yes (1): Enables to support w riting zero dataDefault = No (0)

Environment and Model Data Manager Parallel_server_group Use this parameter to specify in w hich RFC server group data manager parallel executing unit should be.


Global Technical MIN_CHUNK_SIZE When user uses export function, w e w ill split the Enviornment data to different chunk size to avoid memory dump, this parameter specify the minum chunk size w e w ill read from exported data

Optional UJ0_PARAM

Global Technical CLM CURRENT CHUNK Record w hich chunk read from the database Optional UJ0 PARAMGlobal Technical CLM_CURRENT_CHUNK Record w hich chunk read from the database Optional UJ0_PARAM

Global Technical MAX_CHUNK_SIZE When user uses export function, w e w ill split the Enviornment data to different chunk size to avoid memory dump, this parameter specify the maximum chunk size w e w ill read from exported data

Optional UJ0_PARAM

Global Parameters (cross Environments) Technical EnablePrinting If "Yes”, printing capabilities are available for users (through crystal engine)If "No”, printing button is hidden in all areas of the Web UI and w e don’t have printing capabilities.

Optional UJ0_PARAM

Global Parameters (cross Environments) BPC Web MaxSystemReportQuerySize Maximum query size in cells (before zero compression) before w e ask the user if he Required UJ0 PARAMGlobal Parameters (cross Environments) BPC Web MaxSystemReportQuerySize Maximum query size in cells (before zero compression), before w e ask the user if he w ants to continue or cancel the query.Used for System reports.

Required UJ0_PARAM

Global Parameters (cross Environments) BPC Web MaxWebReportQuerySize Maximum query size in cells (before zero compression), before w e ask the user if he w ants to continue or cancel the query.Used for Web reports.

Required UJ0_PARAM

Global Parameters (cross Environments) Technical SMTPAUTH The authentication method of the SMTP server. (Required)0 = Anonymous1 = Basic

Required UJ0_PARAM


2 = NTLMThis setting does not change the method on the SMTP server, but must match the type of authentication enabled on it. Failure to set this appropriately can result in errors from the email server.

IMG Parameters – 3/3


Global Parameters (cross Environments) Technical SMTPPASSWORD The passw ord for the sending email user name. (Required) Required UJ0_PARAM

Global Parameters (cross Environments) Technical SMTPPORT Port number for your SMTP email server. Default is port 25, the default SMTP server port number. (Required)

Required UJ0_PARAM

Global Parameters (cross Environments) Technical SMTPSERVER The name or TCP/IP address of the SMTP email server the system uses to send email. (R i d)

Required UJ0_PARAM(Required)

Global Parameters (cross Environments) Technical SMTPUSER The user name from w hich email f rom the system originates. (Required) Required UJ0_PARAM

Model Application Mgmt BPC_STATISTICS The valid values are ON/OFF.BPC Statistics can be used to monitor system performance. Certain modules in BPC w ill w rite out detailed runtime statistics to tables UJ0_STAT_HDR and UJ0_STAT_DTL, so that you can better analyze w here performance bottle necks are occurring.


Model Data Manager DTSLOGPAGESIZE Use this parameter to set the number of records that display in the Data Manager Status View .Enter the number of records to display


Enter the number of records to display.The default value is 300.This parameter is used in Data Manager - Status View .

Model Legal Consolidation ORG_ACCOUNTOWN parameter allow s customers to provide an alternative account to PGROUP in ow nership cube


Model Technical SIGNED_DATA_FORMAT Use this parameter to specify the decimal precision and scale of the signeddata column of the tables tblFact, tblFac2 and tblFactWB in an application.The default value is 25,10 (25 for precision and 10 for scale).This parameter is used in Admin – Add a new application, Modify application, and Copy an application


application.Model Script Logic VALIDATE_MBR_LOGIC Use this parameter to specify that the system validates members w hen processing logic.

The performance of processing logic decreases due to this validation.Valid values are:1 – The system filters records that w ould otherw ise post to a parent member to a member that no longer exists or a member calculated dimension formula0 – The system bypasses this validationThe default value is 0.This parameter is used in Script Logic – posting data during running script logic.


Model Technical YTD_NECJ_RETRIEVE Use this parameter to specify the query type to improve the performance of data retrieval w hen retrieving YTD measures on Periodic applications or the opposite.This parameter is useful in the follow ing circumstances:YTD / QTD measures data is retrieved on periodic application or Periodic / QTD measures data is retrieved on YTD application.The retrieval range is huge, but the portion of the data existing cells is small.ColKeyRange or Row KeyRange has more than tw o dimensions.The retrieval range has no members w ith a dimension formula.Valid values are:



1 – To use the NonEmptyCrossJoin query0 – Not to use the NonEmptyCrossJoin queryThe default value is 0.This parameter is used in Retrieve data functions EVDRE, EVGET, EVGTS, EVSND, EVINP.

Other Administration ParametersLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Create/Change administrative parameters in Web UI and IMG

Functional ParametersSystem ParametersTechnical Parameters















p g g ycountries.


Security Model Changes

Security Model ChangesLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe the new Security Model with BPC 10 in SAP NetWeaver with EPM Add-inDescribe the new Security Model with EPM Web UI


Topicsp

1. The New Security Overview

2. NetWeaver Authorizations

3. BPC Web UI Authorizations

4. Data Access Profile

The New Security Overview

The BPC 10 application is built on an Adobe Flex client architecture, which pprequires Adobe Flash 10.1The NetWeaver security for 7.3 also applies to the BPC 10 application


User Authorizations in BPC 10

This means two sets of user authirzations will be application in BPC10:– Netweaver (The Classical Netweaver Secuirty. For example, SU01, PFCG, and so on)– BPC Web UI The installation user can access the administration workspace from any client machineTh t d i i t t f ll d i i t ti t k b t d t hThe system administrator can perform all administrative tasks but does not have any access to membersUpon installation, there is one admin team (ADMIN) defined in Web UI which can be used as a sampleUpon installation, there are three task profiles defined in Web UI which can be used as samples– PrimaryAdmin: Full Administration previledges

SecondaryAdmin: Access to Public Folder & Dimension– SecondaryAdmin: Access to Public Folder & Dimension– SystemAdmin: Full Administration & Dimension accessThe following types of users are created in SAP NetWeaver Application server first:– For administrative related tasks, define dialog users


, g– Adobe Flex Client uses Internet users– Content Lifecycle Management uses Dialog users

Steps to Define Security

Manage Users and roles in SAP NetWeaver Application server using g pp gSU01 & PFCG.Add user in Web Admin UIAssign users to team (optional)Assign users to team (optional)Assign task profiles to users or teamsAssign data access profile to user or teams


Topicsp





BPC Netweaver Authorizations

BPC 10 uses the Classic Netweaver authorization concept whereBPC 10 uses the Classic Netweaver authorization concept where authorizations are assigned to roles and profiles are generated.


BPC NetWeaver Authorizations

For BPC10 end user, standard roles are provided. Recommendations are , pto copy and adopt:– /POA/BUI_FLEX_CLIENT: This role is required to start the Flex Client– /POA/BUI UM USER: This role is required to work with User/POA/BUI_UM_USER: This role is required to work with User

ManagementCLM Standard Roles:– /POA/CLM BPC USER: BPC & CLM features/POA/CLM_BPC_USER: BPC & CLM features– ZSAP_BPC_CLM_EXPORT: Extraction– ZSAP_BPC_CLM_IMPORT: Deployment

SAP QAP RFCACL DEVELOPER R t F ti C ll– SAP_QAP_RFCACL_DEVELOPER: Remote Function Call– SAP_QAP_RFC_DESTINATIONS: Trust System– ZSAP_BPC_BTCH_JOB: Background Job


– Z_BUI_S_ADMIN_USER: Logon Web Client– Z_BUI_S_DISPLAY_USER: Logon Web Client

BPC Netweaver Authorizations (Cont.)

Standard BPC Authorization Objects:j– /POA/A_BUI: Authorizations of a BUI user regarding content types,

resource types, applications, and activities.– /POA/A BPT: BUI Authorization Object including partitions/POA/A_BPT: BUI Authorization Object including partitions– S_DEVELOP: General authorization object for objects in the ABAP

Workbench & Flex Client. Object type should SMIM for MIME repository– /POA/A RST: SBC REST Authorization Object It is used for user/POA/A_RST: SBC REST Authorization Object. It is used for user

management service– S_USER_AGR: Authorization used for Retrieving roles and user info

S USER GRP: Authorization used for Retrieving roles and user info– S_USER_GRP: Authorization used for Retrieving roles and user info


BPC Netweaver CLM Authorizations

CLM Authorizations:– /POA/CLMAC: Authorization Object for CLM actions and applications.– /POA/CLMRP: Authorization Object to Execute CLM Utilities– S TABU DIS: Table Maintenance for CLM with values of CLMC &– S_TABU_DIS: Table Maintenance for CLM with values of CLMC &

CLMA– S_APPL_LOG: Check Application Log Entries

S BTCH JOB: Control background job creation For CLM– S_BTCH_JOB: Control background job creation. For CLM, JOBACTION should be RELE

– S_DEVELOP: CLM to generate XSLT code to validate inbound XML documents Object Type should be XSLT & SMIMdocuments. Object Type should be XSLT & SMIM

– S_ICF: Authorization Object for controlling outbound RFC calls.– S_START: Authorization to start or run an application/development

object (in this case CLM Web Dynpro application)


object (in this case, CLM Web Dynpro application)

Topicsp





BPC Web UI Authorizations

BPC Web UI Authorizations are made available using an internet gbrowser by using Adobe Flash technologyAll user authorizations are managed from Web UI Admin client


BPC Web UI Task Profile

The following default administrative task profiles permit a specific set of tasks:– SystemAdminSystemAdmin– PrimaryAdmin– SecondaryAdminA System Administrator (SystemAdmin) by default has the followingA System Administrator (SystemAdmin), by default, has the following task rights:– Manage Environments

M S it– Manage Security– Use System When Offline


BPC Web UI Task Profile (Cont.)

A Primary Administrator (PrimaryAdmin), by default, has the following task rights:– Manage Models– Manage Business Rules– Manage Dimensions

M D t L k d W k St t– Manage Data Locks and Work Status– Manage Environment Status– Manage Drill Throughs– Manage TemplatesManage Templates– Manage Audit– Use Offline Distribution– Edit Comments– Edit Book and Distribution templates– Publish Books– Run Documents from EPM add-in

M S it


– Manage Security– Administer Documents

BPC Web UI Task Profile (Cont.)

A Secondary Administrator (SecondaryAdmin), by default, has the y ( y ), y ,following task rights:– Manage Dimensions– Edit content of Public FolderEdit content of Public Folder

Tips for Assigning Task ProfilesTh b f t k fil d i i t t i t i tThe number of task profiles administrators can assign to a user is not limited. However, SAP recommends that you do not assign multiple task profiles to users because it may cause you confusion in determining their ultimate access rightsultimate access rights.Task access security is cumulative, and tasks cannot be explicitly denied. As a result, assigning multiple task profiles can create a situation where users have access to tasks that you may not want them to have


users have access to tasks that you may not want them to have.

Administration Task Profile Description

Task Can be assigned to Description

Manage Business Rules Primary Administrator Can define business rulesManage Business Rules Primary Administrator Can define business rules

Manage Data Locks and Work Status Primary administrator Can define and edit work status codes

Manage Dimensions Primary and secondary administrators Create, modify, process, and delete dimensions and membersdimensions and members.

Manage Document Types Any user or team Can categorize collaboration postings, which is useful when filtering collaboration postings to see certain types. Subtypes can be managed by administrators or created by users asadministrators or created by users as they post.

Manage Drill Through Primary administrator Can create and modify drill-through setup.

Manage Environment Status Primary administrator Can view environment status.g y

Manage Environments System administrator Can create and modify environments, and set environment parameters.

Manage Models Primary administrator Can create, modify, and delete models in an environment, make


models in an environment, make changes to dimensions and add dimensions, and optimize models.

Analysis and Collection Task Profile Description


Manage Templates Any user or team Can access templates from the public folder, and restrict workbook options. A team member or team leader withmember or team leader with this task can access and save templates to their respective team folder.

Run Drill Through Any user or team Can execute drill-through.

Use Input Forms and Save Data

Any user or team Can access the built input schedules and send data. Can use spread weightCan use spread, weight, and trend options. Controls submitting data from the web reports.


Audit Task Profile Description

Task Can be assigned to Descriptiong p

Manage Audit Any user or team Can manage activity anddata auditing


Business Process Flow Task Profile Description

Task Can be assigned to Descriptiong pUse Offline Distribution Any user or team Can use the Offline

Distributor.Use Offline Collection Any user or team This user or team collects

changes to offline input schedules and sends data to a database.


Comments Task Profile Description


Administer Comments Any user or team Can add, modify, and remove comments for all users.

Edit Comments Any user or team Can add modify andEdit Comments Any user or team Can add, modify, and remove his or her own comments.


Consolidations Task Profile Description


Dismiss Blocking Controls Any user or team Can force failing controls to Dismissed status

Edit Ownership Manager Any user or team Can add, modify, and remove his or her own commentshis or her own comments.

Edit Controls definition Any user or team This user or team has write access to the Ownership Manager, but cannot run the ownership calculation routineownership calculation routine.

Reset Control Dismissal Any user or team Can set up controls in Administration.

View Consolidation Monitor Any user or team Can reset a Dismissed control status to its previous statusstatus to its previous status.

View Consolidation Monitor Any user or team Can reset a Dismissed control status to its previous status.


Consolidations Task Profile Description (Cont.)


Run Consolidation Tasks Any user or team Can access the Consolidation Monitor, but cannot perform any actions.

Run Controls Any user or team Can run currency translation andRun Controls Any user or team Can run currency translation and consolidations in the Consolidation Monitor.

Run Ownership Calculations Any user or team Can access Controls Monitor and run control calculationsand run control calculations.

View Controls Any user or team Can access Controls Monitor in read-only mode.

View Controls definition Any user or team Can read Control Manager definitionsdefinitions.

View Ownership Manager Any user or team Can access the landing page of the Ownership Manager.


Data Manager Task Profile Description


Run Admin Packages Any user or team Can run Admin packages within Data Manager.

Edit Packages Any user or team Can maintain packages within Data Manager.

Edit Transformation Files Any user or team Can maintain transformation files within Data Manager.

Edit Conversion Files Any user or team Can maintain conversion files within Data Manager.

C l A U P k A t C l k ithi D tCancel Any User Packages Any user or team Can cancel user packages within Data Manager.

Edit Package Schedules for any user Any user or team Can change the package schedule for any user within Data Manager.

Run Packages Any user or team Can run packages within DataRun Packages Any user or team Can run packages within Data Manager

Edit Package Links Any user or team Can maintain package links within Data Manager.

Upload Data Any user or team Can upload data within Data Manager.


Download Data Any user or team Can download data within Data Manager.

Folder Access Task Profile Description


Edit content of Public Folders

Secondary Admin Can add and manage content in the public folder, including creating new folders User also needsfolders. User also needs document type access rights, such as Edit Workspaces or Edit ReportsReports.


Journal Task Profile Description


Edit Journals Any user or team Can create or modify journal entries.

Lock/Unlock Journals Any user or team Can lock and unlock journal entries

Manage Journals Any user or team Can manage journals as follows:

Create and maintainCreate and maintain journal templatesClear journal tablesCreate Journal

Post Journals Any user or team Can post journalsPost Journals Any user or team Can post journals.

View Journals Any user or team Can view journals.

Unpost Journals Any user or team Can Unpost journal entries.


Reopen Journals Any user or team Can reopen journals.

Publish Task Profile Description

Task Can be assigned to Descriptiong pEdit Book and Distribution templates.

Primary Admin Can create, edit, and save book and distribution templates.

Publish Books Primary Admin Can publish a book of reports.

Run Documents from EPM add-in

Primary Admin Can run documents from the EPM Add-in for Microsoftadd in EPM Add in for Microsoft Office.


System Reports Task Profile Description


Run Audit Reports Any user or team Can run audit reports.

Run Comment Reports Any user or team Can run a comment report.

Run Security Reports Any user or team Can run security reportsRun Security Reports Any user or team Can run security reports.

Run Work Status Reports Any user or team Can run a work status report.


System Security Task Profile Description

Task Can be assigned to Descriptiong pUse System When Offline System Admin Can log onto Planning and

Consolidation when the status of an environment is Not AvailableNot Available.

Manage Security System and primary administrators

Can manage users, task, and data access profiles.


Transport Task Profile Description


Manage Transport System Admin Can retrieve Planning and Consolidation TLOGO


Web Report Profile Description


Edit Documents Any user or team User can use documents, can add, edit, and delete their own documents, and can access all documents shared with them.

Edit Reports Primary Administrator User can create web reports, and can open and edit their web reports and those of other users. Gives these rights in all folders the user has write access.

Administer Documents Primary Administrator Can use documents, and can add, edit, and delete all documents.

Edit Workspaces Any user or team Can create and update workspaces.

Edit Crystal Dashboards Any user or team Can create and modify, and save Crystal Dashboards.


Web Service Profile Description

Task Can be assigned to Descriptiong pAccess BPC from FIM and SSM

Any user or team Can access Planning and Consolidation from the Financial Information Management and StrategyManagement and Strategy Management applications.


Work Status Profile Description


Use Work Status Any user or team Can change the work status on a data region.


Topicsp





Data Access Profile

Data access profile must be defined for secured dimensions of the modelpAfter creating the data access profile, you assign it to users as neededData Access Security is based on:– By default, no one other than the system administrator has access to members.

Member access must be explicitly granted.– A user can be assigned data access individually and through team membership– Data access privileges flow down the hierarchy, from parent to child– When in conflict, the least restrictive data access profile is applied– In case of a conflict between individual and team data access, the least

restrictive setting is applied– Denial of data access can be set only at the user levelWhen defining access to a secured dimension that has one or more defined hierarchies, security is applied to the member and all of its children


Creating Data Access Profile


Modifying Data Access Profile


Copying Data Access Profile


Removing Data Access Profile


Security Model ChangesLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe the new Security Model with BPC 10 in SAP NetWeaver with EPM Add-inDescribe the new Security Model with EPM Web UI















p g g ycountries.


Models

ModelLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain Model Page OverviewCreate a ModelDescribe Different Types of ModelsManage Model settingsExplain Features used with ModelsCopy Model, Delete Model, and Optimize Model


ModelModel Page OverviewModel Page Overview

The term “Application” in Business Planning and Consolidation for 7.X NetWeaver versions pp ghas been renamed as “Model” in Business Objects Planning and Consolidation 10.0 for NetWeaver . You can access the “Models” view by selecting “Model” under the “Dimensions and Models” domain in the left side panel


domain in the left side panel.

ModelModel Page OverviewModel Page Overview

O th M d l i th ID th D i ti d th t f M d lOn the Models overview page, you can see the ID, the Description and the type of Model. For each Model, the following actions can be performed. – “New”: Enables to create a Model– “Delete”: Enables to delete a model or a multiple selection of modelp– “Copy”: Enables to create a model by copying a selected model– “Optimize”: Enables to run a optimization process (full or light mode) on the selected model.


ModelCreate a new ModelCreate a new Model

Step 1: Name and DescriptionUpon clicking the “New” buttonUpon clicking the New button from the toolbar, a 6 steps wizard open in order to create a Model. First step asks for the ID ( d t ) d D i ti(mandatory) and Description (optional) of the model.



Step 2: Model TypeThere are 2 types:There are 2 types:

Reporting – Standard – (called as “Generic” in

7.X version)Financial– Financial

– Consolidation

Drivers and Rates (called as “Non-Reporting” in 7.X versions)– Exchange Rates (called as “Rate”

in 7.X versions)– Ownership– Generic



There are 2 data entry modes: Periodic and Year to Date. By defa lt Periodic is selecteddefault Periodic is selectedDepending on the type selected, you can specify a model that contains the exchange rates (for Financial and Consolidation types) and also Ownership model (Consolidation type)If there are only one model of type “Exchange Rates” and one of type “Ownership” in the environment, they are selected by default.



Step 3: Source ModelIn BPC NW 10.0, you can createIn BPC NW 10.0, you can create a new model from scratch. Use a model as a source to create a new one is no longer mandatory.You can also create a modelYou can also create a model using an existing model. For this select the “An existing model” radio button and then select the model to use as a sourcemodel to use as a source.


ModelCreate a New ModelCreate a New Model

Step 4: DimensionsIn this step the dimensions will be padded to the model. A status panel at the bottom of the wizard gives the information about the missing dimension typesthe missing dimension types. If the source is a blank model then all the required dimensions needs to be added to the Model.Y t l t lti lYou cannot select multiple dimensions of the same type except for the user-defined dimensions.Among the selected dimensions you can also set the secured dimensions (i.e. the dimensions that will be used to define the data


access profiles for this model).


The list of the required dimensions depend on the type of the model:q p ypAll model types must have the 4 following dimensions types:– C – Category– T – Time

E Entity– E – Entity– A – Account In addition to the 4 common dimensions, the “Financial” type model should have the following dimension types:– R - CurrencyAlong with 4 common dimensions, the “Consolidation” model type should have the following dimension types:– R – Currencyy– I – Intercompany– D – Audit ( called as Datasource in 7.5 version)– G – Group

S Subtables


– S – Subtables


In addition to the 4 common dimensions, the “Ownership” type model should have the following dimension types:– I – Intercompany– G – Group For the “Rate” model, along with 4 common dimensions, it should also have theFor the Rate model, along with 4 common dimensions, it should also have the – R – Currency



Step 5: Copy from SourceDepending on the type of source model you selected and the content of the source model, you can specify in this step if you want to copy some of the specific objects types:– Data Manager Packages (all model

types)– Journal Templates (all Reporting types)– Control definitions (Financial and (

Consolidation types) new option in 10.0Each of the two last options is only enabled if some corresponding objects exist in source modeljIn this version, you do not activate the business rules when creating a new model but directly in the Business rules view


rules view.


Step 6: Review and CreatepThis step enables to review what will be the configuration of the model being created.


ModelEdit and Modify a ModelEdit and Modify a Model

Yo can edit and modif the model b selecting it from the list of models either b clickingYou can edit and modify the model by selecting it from the list of models either by clicking on Edit button from toolbar or by clicking on the model hyperlink.This would open a page to view and manage the structure of the models dimensions, its type and other general settings and properties.


ModelEdit and Modify a ModelEdit and Modify a Model

Change Type : In the model edit page, you have the option to change the model type by clicking on the “Change Type” button in the toolbar. This command opens a 3 steps wizard that enables to change the type and change some of the dimensions assigned to thethat enables to change the type and change some of the dimensions assigned to the model.– Step 1: Model Type: Gives an option to change the model type. In this step the type of the model you

select depends on the type currently assigned to the model. If the model is of type “Reporting”, then you can only select one of the 3 Reporting types and if the model is of type “Drivers and Rates”, youyou can only select one of the 3 Reporting types and if the model is of type Drivers and Rates , you can only select one of the 3 Drivers and Rates types.

– Step 2: Gives the option to add or remove the dimensions to the model– Step 3: Review and CreateAdd/Remove dimensions: Using this option you ca change the set of dimensions assignedAdd/Remove dimensions: Using this option you ca change the set of dimensions assigned to the model. This command opens a dialog that enables to remove and /or add some dimensions. In this dialog you cannot set the secured dimensions but you can modify the secured dimensions of the model directly in the list of the dimensions assigned to the model but not in the dialog which opens after clicking the Add/Remove dimensions buttonmodel but not in the dialog which opens after clicking the Add/Remove dimensions button.


ModelModel General SettingsModel General Settings

In the Edit model page, under the General Settings:

Description filed enables to enter a description for theDescription filed enables to enter a description for the model In most of the model types, all other settings in this section are information and thus cannot be changed di tl i thidirectly in this page.The list of settings depends on the type of the model.In all models, the “Data Entry Mode” setting (“YTDINPUT” web admin parameter in 7.5) can no ( p )longer be changed in any way once the model is saved.

You can set a value to the “Non-interco member in Ownership” setting by selecting a member of the dimension of type “Intercompany” “ORG INTCO”dimension of type Intercompany . ORG_INTCO web admin parameter in 7.5You can set a value to the “Parent/child property used for hierarchy of Groups” setting by selecting a property (For example: PARENT GROUP) of the dimension of


(For example: PARENT_GROUP) of the dimension of type “Group”. “ORG_PARENTPROPERTY” web admin parameter in 7.5

ModelFeatures Used With the ModelFeatures Used With the Model

Features used with the Model:Work Status: Is set to “On” if the Work Status andWork Status: Is set to On if the Work Status and data locking settings are enabled for the model. Data Audit: Is set to “On” if the Data audit features is enabled for the model.Journal Templates: This one is only revelent for Reporting models. This is set to “On” if there is a journal template specified for the model. Enable Comments: Upon checking this option would enable to use the comments in the input reports. This is equivalent to “Comment” web admin parameter in 7.5 version.Use as Source of Data: Upon checking this option,Use as Source of Data: Upon checking this option, would allow external applications to use this model as the source of data. This would generate a virtual provider on top of the cube (model) which enables the ODBO clients to retrieve the data of the model.


e O O c e s o e e e e da a o e ode

ModelDeleting a ModelDeleting a Model

Delete a Model: From the models overview page , you can delete the one or multiple models by using the “Delete” command from the toolbar. Except for the UI, there are no changes compared to the 7.5 versions.


ModelCopy a ModelCopy a Model

Copy a Model: In the Models overview page you can select and then copy a model using the “Copy”In the Models overview page you can select and then copy a model using the Copy command in the toolbar. Except for the UI, there are no changes compared to the 7.5 versions.


ModelOptimizationOptimization

Optimize: In the models overview page you can select and then optimize a model using the “Optimize” command in the toolbarOptimize command in the toolbar.Like previous versions, there are 2 types of optimization: Lite Optimization and Full Optimization; except for the UI, there are no changes compared to the 7.5 versions.


DimensionsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain Model Page OverviewCreate a ModelDescribe Different Types of ModelsManage Model settingsExplain Features used with ModelsCopy Model, Delete Model, and Optimize Model















p g g ycountries.


Security

SecurityLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain User ManagementExplain Team ManagementExplain Task Profile Management Explain Data Access Profiles Management


SecuritySecurity Page OverviewSecurity Page Overview

Security:yOn the front end side there is no change in the BPC 10 security except that the users are NetWeaver users instead ofNetWeaver users instead of Active Directory usersThe new web UI has a different look and feel but the concept of adding the users teams taskadding the users, teams, task profiles and data access profiles is still the same


SecurityUser ManagementUser Management

It lists all the users assigned to the environmentWe can add, remove, or edit users.Mass maintenance of users is also allowed. Multiple edition of pusers is allowed to enable to modify several users simultaneously. You can see in this list, the ID’sYou can see in this list, the ID s of the users, their last and first names and also their email address. These properties are those from the NW users andthose from the NW users and cannot be changed in the front-end .



In the next step, you can assign all the users you have selected in the previous step to one or more teams.This is not mandatory and thus yyou can leave the new users not assigned to any teams.The added users are now inserted in the main list of usersinserted in the main list of users assigned to the environment.



You can use the search function to filter this list of available users.You can then select some users and use the “Add” button to assign these users to the environment.You can also remove some users from the list of selected users by using the “Remove” button.“Add all” and “Remove all” enableAdd all and Remove all enable to manage the full lists.



BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0 version for SAP NetWeaver will be directly usingNetWeaver will be directly using NetWeaver users to logon into the BPC application from the Web client or Excel client. Windows Active Directory users or CMSWindows Active Directory users or CMS users are no longer supported. There are two role parts to be assigned to a BPC business user in BW end and are t t t B itransparent to Business users: – Static Roles: /POA/BUI_FLEX_CLIENT and

/POA/BUI_UM_USER – Dynamic Roles: When a user is added to any

i t i i d ithenvironment or a user is assigned with any BPC security task from Admin console.

Task profile is the only security object that uses the NetWeaver authorization objects

hil th t f th bj t i f t d


while the rest of the objects info are stored in BPC specific ABAP tables.


Modify User:yYou can either edit one user or multiple users simultaneouslyIn the “Teams” tab, you can see which team(s) the user(s) is/are assigned toIf only one user is edited, you can manage the “team lead” setting



Modify User:yIf Multiple users are being edited, then you cannot manage the Team Lead settingAs for the teams, you can distinguish, in this tab, the teams to which all the edited users are assigned (‘All Users’ value)Yo can also se the “Assign to all” f nction to assign all the edited sers to a team


You can also use the “Assign to all” function to assign all the edited users to a team


Modify User:In the “Task Profiles” tab, if it’s a single user, then task profiles will be assigned to the user directly and also will inherit through the teams he\she is assigned to.



For Multiple users, task profiles do not get inherited.Y dd t k fil t i th t ll th l t dYou can add task profiles to assign them to all the selected users.You can see the list of all the task profiles assigned to one user in the selection and distinguish those that are assigned to all the edited users. “Assign to all” in this tab enables one to assign a task profile to all the edited users.


g g p


In the “Data Access Profiles” tab, in case of single or multiple users; these are exactly the same principles/behaviors as in the “Task Profiles” tab.


SecurityTeam ManagementTeam Management

Here you can see the list of all teams of the environmentFrom this list, you can create or delete a teamYou can also edit multiple teamsYou can also edit multiple teams simultaneously. For example, mass maintenance is possibleIn addition to the ID and the description of the teams you candescription of the teams, you can see how many users are assigned to each of them as well as the number of task profiles and data access profilesaccess profiles.You can create a team without any users assigned to it



Modify Teams:yYou can edit or change multiple teams simultaneously. Only the common changes which are made while editingwhich are made while editing will be applied to the set of teams and all other things which are not changed will remain the sameremain the same



If you edit multiple teams at a time, then under the “Users” tab you can see the list of all users assigned to the selection of teams.If a user is assigned to all the edited teams, the value in the “Assigned to” field is “All teams”If a user is not assigned to the edited teams, the value in the “Assigned to” field is “Some teams only”You can use the “Assign to all” functions to assign a user to all the edited teams


You can use the Assign to all functions to assign a user to all the edited teamsYou can also add the new user to the edited teams by clicking the “Add\Remove” option


Same rules as in “Users” tab apply for the “Assigned to” column in Task profilesIf a task profile is assigned to all the edited teams, then “All teams” value is shown under “Assigned to” columnAssigned to columnIf a task profile is not assigned to all the edited teams, then “Some teams only” value will be shownIn the above screenshot, “Assign to all” function enables one to assign the task profile to all


the edited teams.


You can assign a set of task profiles to the selection of teams.


SecurityTask Profile ManagementTask Profile Management

Here is the list of all the task profiles created in the environment.From this list, you can create a task profile from scratch or copy an existing one. You can also edit and delete a task profile (multiple deletion istask profile (multiple deletion is allowed)In addition to the ID and the description of a task profile, you can see how many teams and users havesee how many teams and users have this task profile.



The same behavior as in the “Users” and “Task Profiles” tab is applied for the “Data Access Profiles” tab



There are 3 system-generated task profiles (System Admin, Primary Admin, S d Ad i )Secondary Admin)These default task profiles cannot be changed but you can copy them.



Click the “Add” button to create a new task profile. This command opens a

i d h blwizard that enables to create a team through 3 distinct steps. In the first step, you must specify an ID and you can also add a description.



In the second step, you have to select the task you want to assign to this ne task profileto this new task profile.The list in the left pane contains all the available security tasks that are grouped by domain (nodes).You can select a task or a node to add all its tasks simultaneously and use the “Add” button to add it to the selection. Multiple selection is also allowed.In the list of the selected tasks, the tasks are also grouped by domain (nodes).(nodes).



In this last step you can check the number of tasks that will be assigned to the profileassigned to the profile.Click “Finish” to create the task profile.



After adding the Task profile you can also editprofile, you can also edit the task profile by clicking the task profile. We can, for instance, enrich the profile byenrich the profile by adding some security tasks to the initial list.


SecurityData Access Profile ManagementData Access Profile Management

Here is the list of all the data access profiles created in the environment.From this list, you can create a data access profile from scratch or copy an existing one. You can also edit and delete a data access profile (multiple deletion is p ( pallowed).In addition to the ID and the description of a data access profile, you can see how many teams and users have this datamany teams and users have this data access profile.



Click “New” to add a new data access profile.



For each secured dimension of a model, you have to specify one or several access rights to the members.You must define an access right to some members to all the secured dimensions of a model, otherwise the access is denied to the entire model.To specify the same accessTo specify the same access right to all the members of a dimension, you can use the “All members” value.



To assign an access right to a specific of members of the di i th “S l tdimension use the “Select members” value.This enables one to open the member selector dialog in which you can select the set of members you need.When selecting a node, all the children are automatically yselected.There is a search function in this dialog.If there is at least one hierarchyIf there is at least one hierarchy in the dimension, this hierarchical view is displayed in this dialog. In case of multiple hierarchies you can select the


hierarchies, you can select the hierarchy you want to use for selecting the members.This is a flat list if no hierarchy.


The access rights you can assign to a set of members are:“Write”

“ Read Only” “Denied”DeniedAssign the access rights to the members of the Application and click Save t th d tto save the data access profiles




SecurityLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain User ManagementExplain Team ManagementExplain Task Profile Management Explain Data Access Profiles Management















p g g ycountries.


Rules: Member Formulas

Rules: Member FormulasLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe the new formula editorCreate a member formula


New Member Formula Editor

A new member formula editor has been introduced with EPM 10 NWMember formulas allow you to create and execute formulas and calculations on dimension membersIt guides you through the creation of new member formulasA i t iti i t f h b id dA more intuitive interface has been providedYou can save formulas and then process them at a later time


Business Example

Suppose you want to calculate the account E1521 – Income tax on pp yactuarial GL as a percentage of the E1520 – Actuarial GL, before tax. Let’s assume that the percentage is 13%.

The formula would be:The formula would be:

E1521 = E1520 * 0.13

Now we will see the prerequisites and where to setup this formula.o e see t e p e equ s tes a d e e to setup t s o u a


New Member Formula EditorBenefitsBenefits

There are several benefits by using the new member formula editor:y gYou will be guided to correctly compose your formula;No need to remember dimension members: drop down combo and a list box will help you choose the right members.Y h t b i li t hi hi l iYou can choose to see members in a list or hierarchical view.


New Member Formula EditorPrerequisitesPrerequisites

In order to use member formulas on a dimension, you need to enable this feature yfor that dimension. A flag can be found inside the dimension definition: It allows you to define if you want to enable or disable member formulas on a particular dimension.


Process Overview

This is the list of steps that will allow you to correctly define a dimension formula:p y y1. Open the Planning and Consolidation Administration2. On the left pane, expand the Rules branch and click the Member formulas item3. Click the dimension on which you want to set up the formulay p4. Click the New button5. Pick up the name of the member on which you want to apply the formula6 Write the formula by typing it or by using the editor6. Write the formula by typing it or by using the editor7. Save the formula8. Process the dimension


Create a new Member Formula: Step 1 of 8

Open Planning and Consolidation Administration



On the left pane, expand the Rules branch and click Member formulas



Click the dimension on which you want to set up the formula



Click New



Pick up the name of the member on which you want to apply the formula



Write the formula by typing it or by using the editor



Save the formula



Process the dimension


Topic Summary: New Member Formula Editor

Member formulas allow you to create and execute formulas and calculations on dimension membersThe Member formula editor will help and guide you through the creation of new member formulasYou no longer need to remember and type the name of the dimension members: they canYou no longer need to remember and type the name of the dimension members: they can be easily chosen within a list box.


Rules: Member FormulasLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe the new formula editorCreate a member formula















p g g ycountries.


Rules: Logic Scripts

Rules: Logic ScriptsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe Logic ScriptsExplain the Logic Script EditorCreate a new Logic Script


Logic Scripts

This function allows you to create files called logic scripts that contain instructions y g pfor performing calculations with special requirements on Planning and Consolidation data.

You can perform logic calculations on base level members only. In addition, logicYou can perform logic calculations on base level members only. In addition, logic is specific to each model.

Planning and Consolidation provides a library of MDX formulas and the Shell sample environment contains a number of logic functionssample environment contains a number of logic functions.


Business Example

Suppose that you want to copy base members values of all the TBS pp y pyaccounts from the category ACTUAL to the category BUDGET. A typical example of this kind of logic would be:

*XDIM_MEMBERSET ACCOUNT = BAS(TBS)

*WHEN CATEGORY

*IS ACTUAL

*WHEN ACCOUNTWHEN ACCOUNT

*IS BAS(TBS)

*REC(FACTOR = 1.20, CATEGORY = BUDGET)

*ENDWHEN

*ENDWHEN

*COMMIT


Logic Script EditorBenefitsBenefits

The benefits of logic script editor can be summarized as below:g pPredictive entry while typing logic keywordsEase of selection from right panel:– Planning and Consolidation Keywords

MDX K d– MDX Keywords– Dimensions of current model– Dimension members with the member selectorErrors raised by the logic are more intuitiveAbility to format the script by using the Pretty Print featureAbility to easy Comment and Uncomment code lines


Logic Script EditorPrerequisitesPrerequisites

No particular prerequisites are needed for using logic script editor.p p q g g p


Process Overview

1. Open Planning and Consolidation Administration2. On the left pane, expand the Rules branch and click the Logic scripts item3. Click the model where you want to create the new logicy g4. Click the New button5. Enter name (this will also be a Logic Script File Name) and click Create6 Write the logic by typing it and/or using the keyword sidebar6. Write the logic by typing it and/or using the keyword sidebar7. Validate the logic8. Check for possible errors9 Save the logic9. Save the logic


Create a New Logic Script

Let us now examine how to create a new logic script inside the Consolidation g pmodel. We will use the example provided in the slide named Business Example .


Create a New Logic ScriptStep 1 of 9Step 1 of 9

Open the Planning and Consolidation Administration.p g



On the left pane, expand the Rules branch and click the Logic Scripts item.p p g p



Click the model where you want to create the new logic.y g



Click the + New button.



Provide the Logic Script File Name and click Create.g p



Write the logic by typing it and/or using the keyword sidebar.g y yp g g y

Logic script keywordsMDX KeywordsDimensions of the model

Member selector



Validate the logic.g



Check for possible errors, correct them and validate again.p g



Save the logic.g


Create a New Logic ScriptFinal ResultFinal Result

This is just an example of the execution of the logic we have created: the values are j p gcopied on the destination increased by 20%.

+ 20%


Topic Summary: Logic Script Editor

The logic script editor allows you to easily create new logic script. It has a new interface that can assist you with the following features:– Predictive feature– A keyword sidebar– A Pretty Print buttony– A window to display the error raised by the logic validation.This new logic script editor highly facilitates the logic script editing.


Rules: Logic ScriptsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe Logic ScriptsExplain the Logic Script EditorCreate a new Logic Script















p g g ycountries.


New UI for Performing BPFs in MS

New UI for Performing BPFs in MSLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , ySelect a process instancePerform the steps


Topicsp

1. Select a Process

2. Perform the steps

Select a Process

The Process (Business process flow) guides users through a prepackaged set of tasks. The defined Process (Business Process Flow) contains the steps that must be completed sequentially. Business Process

f CFlows setup, configured under Planning and Consolidation Administration console are made available within Processes on the Web Interface.

Select Process Select Process Context Click “Open Process”


Select a Process (Cont)

1 - Select ProcessT d fi d d i d B i P FlTo access defined and assigned Business Process Flows.

2 - Select Process Context

This presents the data region where this Process should be performed.

3 - Click “Open Process”To start performing assigned Tasks


To start performing assigned Tasks.

Topicsp

1. Select a Process

2. Perform the steps

Perform Steps

This “Open Process” button will show the set of steps predefined under another tab. Each Step includes Task and instructions toEach Step includes Task and instructions to proceed.

Note: List of Steps can be refreshed, expanded, collapsed.

Resetting the Process is also possible from this windowthis window.


Perform StepsRunning Process Instances on the WebRunning Process Instances on the Web

On the web part, a new tab is opened for each process instance launched by a SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation user. It is then possible to open multiple Process instances of the same Process, or even multiple Processes., p

Steps can be completed and approved after performing required actions.

If review actions are defined for a step, they will be displayed in the BPF Actions panel, on the right side.


New UI for Performing BPFs in MSLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Select a process instancePerform the steps















p g g ycountries.


New Installation Process

New Installation ProcessLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain the main steps involved in installing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for Microsoft


Topicsp

1. Installation Overview

2. Server Installation

3. Client Installation

Installation Overview Introduction

Installation Overview: New architecture benefitsPlatform requirementsPrerequisitesProcess OverviewClient tier


Business Example

You are planning a new Planning and Consolidation installation. p g g

Understanding system topology, software units, and the installation process are key aspects of a successful installation


New ArchitectureBenefitsBenefits

Benefits of new architectureBetter stability and performances using new NET3 5 frameworkBetter stability and performances using new .NET3.5 frameworkCapacity to use all resources of application server because of capability to use pure 64 bit processesNo need of reporting services required; less maintenance and all the reports from web are using the same technology.NET impersonation is used for security. In this way, standard BPC users don’t have any direct access to the SQL Server database or SSAS database.Technical configuration of system is done into configuration file web configTechnical configuration of system is done into configuration file web.config. Global Cache implementation will help for better system performance. For the initial release the following functionalities will be implemented:– Send/Retrieve data– DM packages– Script Logic– Log on


Server Installation OverviewPlatform RequirementsPlatform Requirements

Windows Server 2008 & Windows Server R2 series (64 bit only)( y)Standard/Enterprise/DataCenterIIS 7.0/7.5NET 3 5 framework.NET 3.5 framework

SQL Server 2008 & SQL Server 2008 R2 Enterprise edition onlySupport Globalization/Multiple language server OS


Server Installation OverviewPrerequisitesPrerequisites

Before performing an installation of Planning and Consolidation 10, version for p g gMicrosoft, ensure that the following prerequisites have been met:

MSXML 4.0 SP2 or laterADOMD .NET 9.0C t l R t 2008 R ti SP3Crystal Reports 2008 Runtime SP3SAP User Management Client 10.0 (if BOE authentication is used)Anti-Cross Site Scripting Library 3.1– The component must be downloaded before installing the serverThe component must be downloaded before installing the serverAnti-Cross Site Scripting Library 3.1Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 Runtime Libraries SP1Microsoft Access Database Engine 2010 64bit….


Process Overview

The server installation involves the following steps:g p1. Determine the server configuration2. Install all prerequisites requested3. From application server, install the Planning and Consolidation serverpp , g4. Perform post-installation configurations


Client Tier

The client is now common with several other EPM 10 applicationsThe Administration client looks similar with the one existing in SBOP PC7.5


Topicsp




Server Installation Introduction

Server Installation Steps: pCheck the prerequisitesInstall the application serverIf the platform contains multiple application servers in NLB, you need to perform the i t ll ti f h li tiinstallation of each application server. Perform Post-installation configuration steps


Installation Setup Process


Installation Setup Process (Cont)
















Prerequisite Checks


Installation Setup Process




Post-Installation Configuration

The post-installation configuration involves the following steps:p g g p1. Connect your SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation system to

Solution Manager Diagnostic to allow support staff and identity2. Enable and configure the Management Console3. Configure .NET Application Server


Post-installationEnable the Management ConsoleEnable the Management Console

The Management Console can be enabled following these steps:g g pChange SQL Server authentication mode to “SQL Server and Windows Authentication mode”Create a SQL user having db owner role for AppServer database.E t th SQL i f ti i t BPC M tDSN t DSN i D t SEnter the SQL user information into BPC_ManagementDSN system DSN in DataSource(ODBC)Change from “Active log format” to “ODBC logging” into IIS web site of Planning and Consolidation:– DSN is BPC_ManagementDSN– Table is BPCLog– SQL username and password you createdRestart IISRestart IIS


Post-installationConfigure .NET Application ServerConfigure .NET Application Server

You can modify the machine.config file in order to ensure the right balance between y g gthe number of working threads and deadlock occurrences.

\WINDOWS\Microsoft.NET\Framework\v2.0.50727\Config\machine.config


Topicsp




EPM Add-in for Microsoft Office Installation

Planning and Consolidation 10 now uses the EPM 10 Add-in to Microsoft Office, that is common to several other EPM application. The installation of the add-in has been covered in a specific Learning Map and will not be covered in this document


Administration Client Installation

Planning and Consolidation Administration client need to be separately installed.


Administration ClientPrerequisitesPrerequisites

Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0,8.0 or Mozilla 3pMicrosoft Office 2007 or 2010.NET Framework 2.0 or higherPentium IV (1GHz CPU)512 RAM100Mb free hard disk space into My documents folder20Mb free hard disk space for the Administration installation files


Administration ClientProcess OverviewProcess Overview

Open the browser and point to Planning and Consolidation web:p p g– http://<PC_server:port>/sap/bpc/webSelect Download Center.Select Planning and Consolidation Administration and start the installation.


New Installation ProcessLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain the main steps involved in installing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for Microsoft















p g g ycountries.


Performing Activities

Performing ActivitiesLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yCreate a Performing Activity TemplateDeploy a Performing Activity InstanceUnderstand how the Process Monitor tracks progressExplain how activity execution is linked to the Activity Instance


Performing Activities

Performing Activities (formally known as Business Process Flows) guide you g ( y ) g ythrough a sequence of tasks within a defined business process. Depending on your role, the activities available to you can involve completing actions, or reviewing submitted actions.A t l t i d l d i th BPC Ad i li t Thi t l t th b i dA template is developed in the BPC Admin client. This template can then be copied into a number of active instances. Assigned end-users can access these instances to perform the prescribed tasks. This is the same behavior as with previous BPC versions.


Performing ActivitiesUser InterfaceUser Interface

The main change in this development and deployment process is the user interface. g p p y pThe templates are created in the BPC 10 enhanced Administration Web Client.


Creating a Performing Activity TemplatePrerequisite for Creating a Performing Activity TemplatePrerequisite for Creating a Performing Activity Template

The prerequisite for creating a Performing Activity template is a driver dimension p q g g y pwith properties that define an owner and a reviewer for BPFs.


Creating a Performing Activity Template

To create a new templatepClick +New



Enter Name and Description, identify Model and Dimension(s) (used to uniquely identify each instance).



To create new activitiesClick +New


Creating a Performing Activity TemplateProcess Settings TabProcess Settings Tab

Enter a name and description of the new templateIdentify the model and one or more dimensions that will be used to uniquely identify any instances deployed from this template.Indentify the Process Monitor user (the person who will be able to monitor all instances from this template and who will be able to finalize instances)from this template and who will be able to finalize instances).


Creating a Performing Activity TemplateActivities TabActivities Tab

To define a new activityyClick the Activities tab


Creating a Performing Activity TemplateActivities TabActivities Tab

Defining the activity is similar to previous version of BPC:g y p1. You will need to provide a desciption of the activity2. Identify a driving dimension and a specific member to identify the

performers/reviewers associated with this activity3. Identify the property of the driver dimension that contains the performer

(formally called the “owner“) of this activity4. Activate the need for a reviewer (checkbox), then identify the property where

tha name of the reviewer is stored5. Determine opening criteria (same as in previous versions)6. Allow this activity to be reopened (checkbox)7. Link in a workspace that can contain one or more Actions.


Creating a Performing Activity TemplateCreating ActivitiesCreating Activities

Activities (formally known as step and sub-steps) provide a hyperlinked set of ( y p p ) p yppredefined actions to all end-user BPC functionality. Actions can:

Open workspacesOpen reports and input schedules in BPC ExcelOpen BPC Word and BPC PowerPoint interfacesRun Data Manager packagesSet Work StatusSet Work StatusRun Consolidation functionsLink to external URLsOpen Audit functionspOpen BPC Library and Document storage



Collections of Activities can be defined for the person who will be completing the p p gactions (the performer). The same set of activities developed for the reviewer can be accessed by reviewers, or if desired, a separately defined workspace can be constructed for the

l i f th i Th k di b tt l t t l thiexclusive use of the reviewer. The workspace radio button selector controls this selection.

Th k (th i ’ k if l t d th i ’ k )The workspace (the reviewer’s workspace or, if selected, the reviewer’s workspace) is accessed by clicking the Edit button(s) provided.



Activities can contain one or more actions and each action can consist of one or more sub-actions and each sub-action can be linked to one or more related action.


Creating a Performing Activity TemplateCreating ActionsCreating Actions

Actions may include:yLinks to unstructured data (documents) stored in BPCA web reportHyperlinks to access all BPC functionalityHyperlinks to access external URLs



To Add Content ActionsClick Add Content and the selection box appears



Add New Report Actions:p

Click Add New Report and an Untitled New Report template opensConfigure and rename using the same techniques in any other BPC web-based report



Add Hyperlinks Action:yp

Click Add Hyperlinks and a New Hyperlink action is created



Defining a Hyperlink Action:g ypEnter name and descriptionSelect a target action to be associated with the hyperlink



Defining a Hyperlink Action:g ypDepending on your action selection, a second selection box may appear to refine the specific action.



Defining a Hyperlink Action:g ypSome action selections may require the location of a specific report or Data Manager package.



Defining a Hyperlink Action:g ypSome actions will require the selection of the specific dimensional context to be used when executing the action. Options include:– Use the dimension value specified by the workspaceUse the dimension value specified by the workspace– Use a specific dimension value selected at the time of the

action’s configuration



Defining a Hyperlink Action:g ypRelated Actions can be linked into the action definition. Click the Edit button and a popup appears allowing you to enter additional actions to be made available for selection when executing the main action being definedwhen executing the main action being defined.In the example below, the related action allows the user to check the package status after executing a currency conversion package.


Creating a Performing Activity TemplateTemplate AdministrationTemplate Administration

Saved templates can be validated, locked, copied, deleted, archived, and deployed (readied for instance creation).Templates can be copied into another version to allow the continued operation of existing instances based on an older version of the same template.


Deploying Performing Activity Instances

Once a template has been defined, saved, and validated, the administrator can pdeploy instances (copies of the template) for execution.

To start the instance creation:Click +New


Deploying Performing Activity InstancesStep 1Step 1

Creating the instance is a five step wizard driven process. g p p1. Select the process template.



2. Select the instance owner (this person will receive email updates).



3. Select the context that the instance will be identified with.



4. Review and update assignments, use the Change Performer and Change Reviewer options to reselect new individuals.



5. Review all selections. You have the option to start the instance (make the new instance available to the assigned users) immediately if desired.



If the instance was created successfully, you will see a green status bar.



Once the instance is created, it will be displayed in the Process Instance administration view.If the option to immediately start the instance was not selected during the instance creation, the instance will initially be set to a suspended status. The suspended status stops any user from using this instance until it is ready for final deployment.



The suspended instance can be selected and started (made available to the assigned users), and changes can be made to individual assignments, or the g ), g g ,instance can be Archived.

Once a process instance has been archived, it cannot be restored or recovered.



Changing the assignment will cause a popup to appear that allows the selection of a new process owner and new activity owners. p y



Starting a suspended instance will make the activities contained within the instance available to the activity owners and reviewers. yStarting the instance changes the instance status to Running.



A running instance can be suspended (all new activity processing stopped).

A suspended instance can be resumedA suspended instance can be resumed.



A non-running instance can be reset (resetting takes the instance back to a running status and all activities back to their initial state).)



The Instance owner is informed of all status changes via email.

Hyperlink to the Process MonitorMonitor


Performing ActivitiesProcess MonitorProcess Monitor

The instance owner can run the BPC web-based Process Monitor to view all assigned instances.The Process Monitor lists a percent completion for each instance and can be sorted by template and/or instance status.



Click an instance in the Process Monitor and a new tab opens exposing the details p p gof the selected instance.Click the Perform action to open the defined action.


Performing ActivitiesActivity ExecutionActivity Execution

Once the defined action opens (in the case illustrated below, BPC Excel is opened p ( pand a Data Manager package is presented for execution), the user is presented with a detailed Business Process Flow action pane that links all related actions and other actions in one location. When the activity has been completed, the user can click the Return to Activity Workspace button to continue to the next activityclick the Return to Activity Workspace button to continue to the next activity.



Upon returning to Activity Workspace, the Process Monitor is updated with current p g y p pstatus and activity statistics (number complete).


Performing ActivitiesLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Create a Performing Activity TemplateDeploy a Performing Activity InstanceUnderstand how the Process Monitor tracks progressExplain how activity execution is linked to the Activity Instance















p g g ycountries.


New Installation Process

New Installation ProcessLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain the main steps involved in installing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver


Topicsp




Installation Overview Introduction

Installation Overview: Changes from 7.xPrerequisitesProcess OverviewClient Tier


Business Example

You are planning a new Planning and Consolidation installation. p g g

Understanding system topology, software units and installation process are key aspects of a successful installation


Changes From 7.xBenefitsBenefits

The server is now running entirely on the SAP NetWeaver platform :g y pNo more .NET serverThe BPC server can now run on any platform supported by NetWeaver 7.3This brings flexibility and simplifies the topology


Server Installation OverviewPrerequisitesPrerequisites

Before performing an installation of Planning and Consolidation 10, version for SAP p g gNetWeaver, ensure that the following prerequisites have been met:

SAP NetWeaver 7.3 is installedApplication Server ABAPTh i i 64 bit d U i d k lThe server is using 64-bit and Unicode kernelThe server can use any Operating System and Database that is supported by SAP NetWeaver 7.3 (Please refer to the Product Availability Matrix )SP2 is mandatory for NetWeaver 7.30y


Process Overview

The installation involves the following steps:g p1. Provisioning the server, including the NetWeaver installation with BW configured2. Installing the Planning and Consolidation add-ins3. Applying notes and service packs as neededpp y g p4. Performing post-installation configurations


Client Tier

The client is now common with several other EPM 10 applicationsThe administration is now web-based


Topicsp




Installation Introduction

Installation Steps: pInstalling the add-insApplying updates (notes, support packs)Post-installation configuration stepsg p


Installing the Add-insUsing Transaction Code SAINTUsing Transaction Code SAINT


Applying UpdatesUsing Transaction-Codes SNOTES and SPAMUsing Transaction Codes SNOTES and SPAM

There are no updates at this timep


Post-Installation Configuration

The post-installation configuration involves the following steps:p g g p1. Making the Namespace and software Components changeable2. Creating Service user3. Creating RFC destinationg4. Configuring IMG with RFC Destination5. Installing the Environment Shell6 Configuring the Flex Client6. Configuring the Flex Client7. Setting up Virus Scan and e-mail8. Configure the Print Service Proxy


Making the Namespaces and Software Components ChangeableChangeable

Namespaces– /CPMB/– /1CPMB/– /B28/– Customer Name RangeCustomer Name Range– General SAP Name range

Software Components– CPMBPC– HOME– LOCAL


Creating the Service UserUsing Transaction Codes PFCG and SU01Using Transaction Codes PFCG and SU01

Copy SAP-delivered role SAP_BPC_SERVICE to customer namespace Create Dialog user BPC_SERVICECopy above role to this userChange user type to Communication Data


Creating RFC DestinationUsing Transaction Code SM59Using Transaction Code SM59

Create an RFC destination pointing to the same clientUse user BPC_SERVICE


Configuring IMG With RFC DestinationUsing Transaction Code SPROUsing Transaction Code SPRO


Installing the Environment ShellUsing Transaction Code SE38Using Transaction Code SE38

Use program UJS_ACTIVATE_CONTENTThe user performing this should have SAP_BW_CONTENT_ADMIN rightsFirst Run: Install the Environment ShellSecond Run: Load the data


Configuring the Flex ClientUsing Transaction Codes SICF and SMICMUsing Transaction Codes SICF and SMICM

Ensure two SBC ICF services are activated(Tcode SICF)– default_host/sap/poa/fcp– default_host/sap/poa/sbcConfigure HTTPS for ICF(Tcode SMICM, SICF)Configure FCP Server(command /o/poa/sfcpconfig)Configure FCP Server(command /o/poa/sfcpconfig)Update the Persistence Service


Setting up E-mail and Virus ScanUsing Transaction Code SCOTUsing Transaction Code SCOT

E-Mail should be set as a jobMinimum period is 1 minuteVirus Scan on message attachments is enabled by setting the VSCAN parameter on the preference table to TRUE


Topicsp




Client Installation Introduction

Planning and Consolidation 10 now uses the EPM 10 Add-in to Microsoft Office, that is common to several other EPM application. The installation of the add-in has been covered in a specific Learning Map and will not be covered in this documentThe following slides illustrate connecting the add-in to a Planning and Consolidation 10The following slides illustrate connecting the add in to a Planning and Consolidation 10, version for SAP NetWeaver server


Connecting the Add-in to a Server

Open Microsoft Excel, select the EPM tab and click Log On:p g



The Connection dialog box appears. Click the Selection button:g pp

Then click the Create button



The “Create Connection” window appears. Select Planning and Consolidation, enter pp gthe server URL in the following format: http://<server>:<port>/sap/bpc ,select Version for SAP Netweaver, and click the Connect button



After authentication the Environment list will be populated, and upon selection of an p p penvironment to which the user has rights, the Model list will also be populated.Give the connection a name and click OK to save it.



The new connection will now appear in the Connection Managerpp g


New Installation ProcessLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain the main steps involved in installing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver















p g g ycountries.


Upgrade Considerations

Upgrade ConsiderationsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain the software upgrade processExplain the Application Set migration process


Topicsp

1. Software Upgrade

2. Migrate Application Sets

Upgrade to SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, Microsoft VersionConsolidation 10.0, Microsoft Version

Direct upgrade from previous versions is not possible!pg p pOnly Windows 2008 and Windows 2008 R2 are supportedOnly 64 bit platforms are supported.Only SQL2008 and SQL 2008 R2 Enterprise Edition are supportedMost part of BPC components are 64bit now


Topicsp

1. Software upgrade

2. Migrate Application Sets

MigrationPrerequisitesPrerequisites

Moving appset backups to the new platformg pp p pMigrate appsets from BPC 5.x to BPC 7.x, in case of migration from BPC 5.xBackup your existing appsets on your BPC 7.x platforms– Use BPC Server Manager to backup your BPC 7.x appsetsCopy appset backup folder to the new BPC 10.0 environment

Restore BPC 7.x appsetsppRestore appset backups to the BPC 10.0 environment– Use BPC Server Manager to restore environments


Process Overview

Migration process should follow the steps:g p pRestore appset backups to the BPC 10.0 environment

– Use BPC Server Manager to restore environmentsMigrate the environment using SAP Server Manager menuP f th l i ti tPerform the manual migration steps


Upgrade ConsiderationsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain the software upgrade processExplain the Application Set migration process















p g g ycountries.


Upgrade Considerations

Upgrade ConsiderationsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain the considerations for upgrading


Topicsp

1. OverviewMethodsDefinitions

2. Technical Considerations

3. Application Considerations

Upgrade Overview

Existing Planning and Consolidation 7.5 for SAP NetWeaver systems can be g g yupgraded to version 10

Only upgrades from version 7.5 are supportedIt is important to understand the implications of such upgradeTh i h t dThere are various approaches to an upgrade


Methods

An upgrade can be done using various approachespg g ppDirect upgrade on an existing serverUpgrade on a copy of the existing systemNew Installation and data import


Definitions

Some very important keywords that have changed with version 10:y p y gModel : This was called “Application” in previous versionsEnvironment: Know as “Appset” in previous versions. Consists of one or several Models


Topicsp




Technical Considerations

There are three upgrade scenariospgDirect upgrade on the existing systemUpgrade on a copy of the existing systemInstallation of a new system and import of existing data


Technical ConsiderationsDirect Upgrade on the Existing SystemDirect Upgrade on the Existing System

The upgrade is performed directly on the existing systempg p y g yThe existing server is upgraded to NetWeaver 7.3 and Planning and Consolidation is upgraded from 7.5 to 10The Migration Program is then executed to migrate 7.5 data into 10 format

This is the simplest approachNo need to setup additional hardwareThe database and operating systems have to be supported by NetWeaver 7.3

It is a disruptive scenarioThe existing system will not be available to users during the upgrade

It involves some riskIt makes changes to an existing, unique environment

It is NOT an advisable scenario


Technical ConsiderationsUpgrade on a Copy of the Existing SystemUpgrade on a Copy of the Existing System

The upgrade is performed on a copy of the existing systempg p py g yThis is scenario has the advantage of combining simplicity and safety

It is performed on a server that is not in productionNo interruption for the users

The database and operating systems can be changed during the system copyThe Upgrade is then performed like in the previous scenarioThis scenario is advisable on systems that are dedicated to Planning and Consolidation (for example where BW is not used outside of Planning and Consolidation)


Technical ConsiderationsInstallation of a new System and Import of DataInstallation of a new System and Import of Data

The upgrade is treated as a new installationpgThis is the least disruptive scenario

All that is needed from the existing system is a backup of the appsets This is especially advisable when the existing environment is shared with other SAP applications (BW, etc)

It allows the upgrade of Planning and Consolidation without interfering with the requirements of other applications

After the new system is installed the data from the 7 5 system is imported usingAfter the new system is installed, the data from the 7.5 system is imported using UJBR , and the environment is then migrated from 7.5 to 10 format using the Migration Program


Topicsp




Application Considerations

The environments are migrated from version 7.5 to version 10 using the Migration g g gprogram

All data is migratedAll setting from Administration are migrated. Th h i th di tti dThere are some changes in the wording; some settings are renamedThe users must be created in NetWeaver and mapped to the version 7.5 users in a spreadsheetSecurity is migrated but there are a few changesy g gJournals are migratedBusiness Rules are migratedValidations are migrated (named Controls in Version 10), with a few changesXcelsius dashboard are NOT migrated. Manual migration is requiredData Manager elements are migrated, but the logs are notLive Reports are not migratedContent Library elements are migrated with some limitations


Content Library elements are migrated with some limitations

Application Considerations (Continued)

Business Process Flows are migratedExcel Reports and Templates can be migrated, with some limitationsCustom Menus are not migratedCustom solutions that use the 7.5 APIs will not work with version 10


Upgrade ConsiderationsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain the considerations for upgrading















p g g ycountries.

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and j gConsolidation 10.0, version for MicrosoftMicrosoft<Unit Name>Upgrade Steps

Upgrade StepsLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain how to run the automatic migration partExplain the manual migration steps


Topicsp

1. Software Upgrade

2. Content migration

Technical StepsInstallation of a new system

The upgrade is treated as a new installationpgPlanning and Consolidation 10 should be installed into a new environment (please refer to the Installation presentation).

Once the system has been tested and validated , the migration of the 7.5 Appsets can proceed.


Topicsp

1. Software upgrade

2. Content migration

Content MigrationAdministration content

Administration content automatically migrated:S tti d fi tiSettings and configuration – Settings defined in 7.5 Admin Console– Settings defined in Web Admin (appset and application parameters)DimensionsDimensions Business rulesLogic

Administration content which needs manual migration:Task profiles need to be manually checked because some task profiles have been replaced some others have been removed The replaced or removed tasksbeen replaced, some others have been removed. The replaced or removed tasks can be checked into the generated log file.


Content MigrationApplication content

Features automatically migrated:D t MData Manager– Old transformation & conversion files supported without modifications.– Dynamic scripts are supported– Package authorizations are supportedPackage authorizations are supported– Only SSIS 2008 packages are migratedContent Library – Documents & URLs



Features which need manually migration:EVDRE tEVDRE reports– Use “Evdre Migration tool” for standard use of EVDRE. In case of customized report,

manual adjustments will be required. Business Process Flow – partially migratedBusiness Process Flow partially migrated– There are added and removed BPF tasks.Published books– Books definition in Excel is fully supported– Books have to be published again – only PDF format supported



Features not migrated:Live reportsContent library – custom web pagesCustom menus– Supported in the previous version only for backward compatibility with 4.2. The go-

forward functionality in 10 is Workspaces and BPF.Data Manager– SQL 2005 SSIS packages will not run on SQL2008W k t tWork statusInsightAPI – not supported


Content MigrationData

All data is automatically migrated:T ti l d tTransactional dataJournalsComments


Process Overview

Content migration process should follow these steps:Content migration process should follow these steps:Restore appset backups to the BPC 10.0 environment

– Use BPC Server Manager to restore environmentsMigrate the environment using SAP Server Manager menuMigrate the environment using SAP Server Manager menuPerform the manual migration steps


MigrationRestore environments










MigrationMigrate environments








Upgrade StepsLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain how to run the automatic migration partExplain the manual migration steps















p g g ycountries.


Upgrade Steps

Upgrade StepsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain how to run the automatic migration partExplain the manual migration steps


Topicsp

1. Software Upgrade

2. Content Migration

Technical StepsUpgrade on a Copy of the Existing SystemUpgrade on a Copy of the Existing System

The upgrade is performed on a copy of the existing systempg p py g yThe upgrade consist of upgrading NetWeaver 7.01 to 7.3, and the Planning and Consolidation ABAP component from 7.5 to 10, using the SAINT program.

The post-installation configuration described in the Installation slides should then be performed.

Once the system has been tested and validated with the default Environment Shell, the migration of the 7.5 Appsets can proceed


Technical StepsInstallation of a new System and Import of DataInstallation of a new System and Import of Data

The upgrade is treated as a new installationpgPlanning and Consolidation 10 should be installed (please refer to the Installation slides)

Once the system has been tested and validated with the default Environment Shell, the import and migration of the 7.5 Appsets can proceed


Topicsp

1. Software Upgrade

2. Content Migration

Content Migration

If the “new Installation” scenario was chosenThe appsets on the version 7.5 system must be backed up using UJBR, and then restored on the new system also with UJBR

The following steps are independent of what scenario was initially chosen


Content MigrationThe Migration ProgramThe Migration Program

The program name is UJT_MIGRATE_75_TO_10p g _ _ _ _It is called from Transaction Code SE38



The transactional data as well as the comments are migrated automatically to g yversion 10 Models

The Administration settings and configurations are all migrated The user-defined order of members is not retainedSome settings are in the Web client, others are now accessed through the SAP GUI

Parameters can also be migrated automatically



User management and Securityg yPlanning and consolidation 7.5 was using either Active Directory or CMS accounts. Version 10 instead uses NetWeaver accounts.As part of a migration, the user accounts must be recreated in NetWeaver, and any reference to the user accounts in the Environment must be updated to reflect the new security model.

Once the new accounts have been created in SU01, a mapping file (Excel spreadsheet) with two columns should be created., as follows

This spreadsheet should be saved as a Tab-delimited file



User management and Security (continued)g y ( )References to the userIDs in the OWNER or REVIEWER properties of dimensions will be properly migrated. References to userIDs in custom-defined properties will NOT be migratedTh Fil S i t t ill b d t d di l d i f ld ill b dThe File Service structure will be updated accordingly, domain folders will be removedTeams are migratedTask Access profiles are migrated but will have new, more descriptive names Member access profiles are migrated and are called Data Access profilesMember access profiles are migrated and are called Data Access profiles



Journals can be automatically migratedBusiness Rules can be automatically migratedValidations are now called Controls and can be automatically migrated



Xcelsius DashboardThe dashboards are NOT migrated

The following manual steps are required for migration:g p q gOpen the old .xlf file in Dashboard DesignerRemove the old EPM connectorRecreate the new connection and set its parameters appropriately



Data ManagergMost Data Manager elements are migrated

The log files are not migrated g g



Web ClientLive Reports are NOT migrated, and would need to be recreated

The Content Library can be automatically migratedy y gHowever custom web pages are not migrated



Business Process FlowsBPFs can be automatically migratedArchived instances are not migratedDeprecated actions or actions linking to non-existing content are not migratedp g g g



Excel Reports and Templatesp pThe Excel reports and templates are NOT migrated by the Migration Program

Existing 7.5 EVDRE reports and schedules can be converted in the EPM add-in to a g pnative version 10 format .

However complex reports might require some manual modifications, especially in p p g q p ythe following cases:

Multiple EVDRE reports in a complex arrangement or sharing some KeyRangesFormulas to calculate parameters

f fUse of cell reference indirections to determine EVDRE parameters.Use of VBA to call the internal object model of the 7.5 Excel client.EVDRE inserted in another EVDRE.

After conversion the log function will contain information about the results


After conversion, the log function will contain information about the results.


Custom MenusCustom Menus are NOT migrated.That functionality is replaced by the Workspaces and BPF Activity Workspaces


Upgrade StepsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain how to run the automatic migration partExplain the manual migration steps















p g g ycountries.


Data Manager UI in the EPM add-in for Excel

Data Manager UI in the EPM Add-in for ExcelLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe the Data Manager UI in the EPM add-in for Excel


Business Example

In every Budgeting and Forecasting cycle, as well as Consolidation, y g g g y , ,there is a need to work with data (import, move, delete, and so on), and also a need of automating some processes (running currency conversion, and so on). This presentation will go over the new Data Manager UI (User Interface) which works exactly the same as inManager UI (User Interface), which works exactly the same as in previous BPC versions, however the tab is different.


Data Manager UI

The ability to access the Data Manager User Interface is only possible with a y g y pWebservice connection, using the standard Planning and Consolidation connection type:

ra rIf you connect to a BPC environment using the ODBO provider (for MS or NW), the Data Manager ribbon will be grayed out:Data Manager ribbon will be grayed out:


Data Manager UI

The access to the new Data Manager UI is performed from a dedicated Data g pManager tab, next to the EPM one (only used for report layout):

Using a “Webservice” connection type, the connection to the Data Manager is the same than the one used in the EPM tab. In that case, the Data Manager tab inherits the connection from the EPM one. Notice that you can also connect to a BPC model on whatever side.

Using an ODBO connection type on the EPM tab, you’ll have to logonto a Webservice connection on the Data Manager tab, in order to work with data manager features. In that case, there is no inheritance


from the EPM tab.

Data Manager UI

Two ribbons are available in the Data Manager tab:g

Connection: place where you define the Webservice connection to reach in order to work with Data Manager features.

Data Manager Group: place where you can perform all BPC 7.5 data manager tasks:– Run package or package links– View package, package links ,and schedule statusp g , p g ,– Upload data– Download data– Data preview

Organize package or package links list– Organize package or package links list– Create and manage Transformation files– Create and manage Conversion files– The More button will allow you to either Clear the prompt values or change the dedicated connection

f D t M


for Data Manager.

Data Manager UI

With the exception of the new Data Manager tab, there is no big change, in p g g gterms of Data Manager functionalities, compared to the BPC 7.5 version. However be aware of the following:

P k li k till l il bl f BPC NW d t f BPC MSPackage links are still only available for BPC NW, and not for BPC MS.

Opposite to the reporting part, when working with the Data Manager, you can only connect to one connection (back-end) at the same time. Of course, multiple connections could be ( ) , psetup in the Active Connection drop-down list, but before accessing any Data Manager tasks, you should choose which one will be used for Data Manager tasks.

This example shows two connections on which toThis example shows two connections on which to report, one for Consolidation model, and another onefor Ownership model. Using the Data Manager will force the user to choose the correct one before working on any Data Manager features


working on any Data Manager features.

Data Manager UI in the EPM Add-in for ExcelLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe the Data Manager UI in the EPM add-in for Excel















p g g ycountries.

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and j gConsolidation 10.0, version for MicrosoftMicrosoft<Unit Name>Setting up authentication & SSO

Setting up authentication & SSOLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain SSO authentication


SSO (Single Sign-On)

Single Sign-Ong gSingle sign-on (SSO) is mechanism whereby a single action of user authentication and authorization can permit a user to access all computers and systems where he has access permission, without the need to enter multiple passwords. Single sign-

d h j t f t f il d i th fon reduces human error, a major component of systems failure and is therefore highly desirable but difficult to implement. (www.Opengroup.org)

In our case it will allow you to access for example from the start web page directlyIn our case it will allow you to access, for example, from the start web page directly the Excel client and vice versa.


Business Example

The user is already connected with the EPM 10 Web interface and now ywants to access the Excel EPM Add-In. He needs to click the related link without providing his credentials again.


SSOBenefits

The multiplicity of clients, back-end, communication protocols and technology p y p gystacks leads to an overall complex situation.


SSOEPM 10.0 Security Principles (1/3)

EPM 10.0 is made of the following products:g pSAP BO EPM solutions 10.0, add-in for Microsoft Office (The EPM add-in)SAP BO Financial Consolidation 10.0 (FC)SAP BO Financial Information Management 10.0 (F.I.M)SAP BO Intercompany 10.0 (IC)SAP BPC 10.0, version for the Microsoft platform (PC_MS)SAP BPC 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver (PC_NW)SAP BO Profitability and Cost Management 10 0 (PCM)SAP BO Profitability and Cost Management 10.0 (PCM)SAP BO Strategy Management 10.0 (SSM)

Some of these products can be used in stand alone configuration, while others are dd i i t ti ith SAP l tfadd-ons, or require integration with SAP platforms.

When more than 1 product is used, a common security directory is needed.A central security repository is needed if many products are used together.


y p y y p g


Some products (FC without Cube Designer, IC, PC_MS, PCM, SSM) have their own i t t d it h i hi h i ti t d h th d lintegrated security mechanism, which is activated when they are used alone:

These integrated security mechanisms are provided for clients who are migrating from a previous version, or want to install the minimal landscape for only 1 product.

These integrated mechanisms are deprecated, and it is highly recommended to use the common security mechanism.

Some products (EPM-Add-in, FC with Cube Designer, FIM, PC_NW) do not provide p ( g _ ) pintegrated mechanisms because they are not intended to be used alone.

All other products can be set to BusinessObjects Enterprise authentication.User authentication is delegated to a BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 4.0 platform, or to a g jBusinessObjects Information Platform Services 4.0 platform.The BusinessObjects platform can delegate authentication to other directories:

LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) or Active DirectorySAP NetWeaver


SAP NetWeaver


Advantage for EPM 10.0 products:g pThe BusinessObjects platform is the central user repository.Users are the same for all EPM 10.0 applications, and also for BI (Business Intelligence) components provided with the BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 4.0 platform.If it i d l t d t diff t di t (AD LDAP N tW ) th fi ti iIf security is delegated to a different directory (AD, LDAP, NetWeaver), the configuration is done only once.It is possible to implement Single Sign-On mechanism between applications.

This BusinessObjects platform is unique:Even if each EPM Product is provided with an SAP BusinessObjects Information Platform Services 4 0 setup it has to be installed only once and shared by all EPM ProductsServices 4.0 setup, it has to be installed only once and shared by all EPM Products.When SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation for NetWeaver is used, then the BusinessObjects platform has to be set to delegate security to the NetWeaver platform.


SSOEPM 10.0 Products for Windows only

The central user repository is BOE.

The EPM add-in

IC FC PC MS SSMPCMF.I.M. _

BOE/IPS- LDAP- AD…


SSOAll EPM 10.0 Products Together

Central user repository is NetWeaver, accessed through BOE for Windows p y gproducts.

The EPM add-in

The EPM add-in

IC FC PC_NWPC_MS SSMPCMF.I.M

NetWeaverBWBOE/IPS


BW

SSOPrerequisites

EPM 10.0 application for Windows require that users are created internally:A BOE (Business Objects Enterprise) platform is installed: it will be the same for all EPM Applications.Users are created in the EPM 10.0 application, and then associated to an external login, or alias, which is a BOE user. At connection time, authentication is done with the external loginexternal login.Users rights are managed in each EPM 10.0 application.

For EPM 10.0 Windows applications:First, create the user in the BO platform (For example: Scott)Then for each EPM 10.0 application used:– Create the user in the application.– Associate the user with the BOE (Business Objects Enterprise) user Scott created at the first step.– Define users rights in the EPM 10 0 applicationDefine users rights in the EPM 10.0 application.It is now possible to use the same login Scott for all EPM applications.

User creation can be simplified: every EPM 10.0 application provides tools to t ti ll i t f th BO l tf


automatically import users from the BO platform.

Process OverviewSSO – How it works 1/3

The communication between the BPC client and server is conversational. Yet, we do not want to pay the price of a full blown user authentication on each callwe do not want to pay the price of a full blown user authentication on each call. The standard solution is to set a security context up on the first call which enables fast authentication of the subsequent requests. For the standard web application and the REST web services, we choose to have a standard cookie based authentication (automatically handled by the browser or the middleware).



Single Sign-On can be implemented between EPM 10.0 applications.SSO (Single Sign-On) is for Web applications only.Once a session is opened in an EPM 10.0 web application, or on the BusinessObjects Enterprise BI (Business Intelligence) launch pad web site, you don’t have to re-enter your credentials for login to other EPM 10.0 applications.y g ppThis Single Sign-On is based on a session cookie, delivered by the BusinessObjects platform.

Once delivered, the cookie can be reused to enter another EPM 10.0 product.EPM 10 0 web sites must all use the same DNS (Domain Name System) URL name in order forEPM 10.0 web sites must all use the same DNS (Domain Name System) URL name in order for the cookie to be valid, including the BusinessObjects enterprise web sites and web services.

Example:http://SRV1/Finance and http://SRV1/Intercompany SSO will work, as both products use the DNS name SRV1 URL.http://SRV1/Finance and http://SRV2/Intercompany will not work, as cookie emitted from the SRV1 DNS URL is not valid on SRV2 DNS name.



How to ensure that all EPM 10.0 web applications use the same DNS (Domain pp (Name System) URLs?All web applications can be deployed on the same server:

OK for small configuration, with small amount of usersOK for not too many EPM 10.0 applications, 2 or 3 maximum, in addition to the BOE (Business Objects Enterprise) web applicationsNo redundancy, because there is only 1 server for all web applications.

Access EPM 10.0 web applications through a Reverse Proxy:Allow to put in place as many servers as needed.Allow redundancy, with help of load balancing devices.y, p gAllow to give final users a virtual URL, that can then redirect to real servers.Implies to have a Reverse Proxy.


Process Overview

User connectedLaunch thick Client

Office client workflow

Prompt for User’s credentials Set Authorization header

SSO parameters?Set HTTP

headerYES

POST Session Resource

Authentication mode?

Automatically handled. Middleware sets

Authorization header

Windows(negociate)

Basic

HTTP

Response status = 200 OK

YES


Valid Session Cookie?

NO

C t S it C t t dAuthenticatedResponse status = 401

U th i d Unknown user


Authenticate request

Create Security Context and set Session Token in Cookie

AuthenticatedUnauthorizedSet proper WWW-Authenticate

Challenge

Unknown user

Process OverviewFlex client workflow


Process OverviewSSO and Client to Client communication

It’s possible to navigate from one BPC client to the other with single sign-on. In addition, we are able to pass BPF actions between clients. For the Office clients, we launch a new client t h dl BPF ti h bl t d t t i Fl li t d itto handle a BPF action, however, we are able to detect a running Flex client and re-use it.


Process OverviewLaunching the Office client from Flex client

HTML proxy BPC Server Flex client page

GetReentranceInfo

Signed Office Launcher object

ExternalInterface.call()

«create»

Launch(ConnectionInfo, Action)

Office Application

«create»


POST Session resource


Process OverviewLaunching the Flex client from Office client


Topic Summary: SSO

SSO will allow us to have one single point of access for all the parts of the Business Object Planning and Consolidation.


Setting up authentication & SSOLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain SSO authentication















p g g ycountries.


Data Manager UI in the EPM add-in for Excel

Data Manager UI in the EPM Add-in for ExcelLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe the Data Manager UI in the EPM add-in for Excel


Business Example

In every Budgeting and Forecasting cycle, as well as Consolidation, y g g g y , ,there is a need to work with data (import, move, delete, and so on), and also a need of automating some processes (running currency conversion, and so on). This presentation will go over the new Data Manager UI (User Interface) which works exactly the same as inManager UI (User Interface), which works exactly the same as in previous BPC versions, however the tab is different.


Data Manager UI

The ability to access the Data Manager User Interface is only possible with a y g y pWebservice connection, using the standard Planning and Consolidation connection type:

ra rIf you connect to a BPC environment using the ODBO provider (for MS or NW), the Data Manager ribbon will be grayed out:Data Manager ribbon will be grayed out:


Data Manager UI

The access to the new Data Manager UI is performed from a dedicated Data g pManager tab, next to the EPM one (only used for report layout):

Using a “Webservice” connection type, the connection to the Data Manager is the same than the one used in the EPM tab. In that case, the Data Manager tab inherits the connection from the EPM one. Notice that you can also connect to a BPC model on whatever side.

Using an ODBO connection type on the EPM tab, you’ll have to logonto a Webservice connection on the Data Manager tab, in order to work with data manager features. In that case, there is no inheritance


from the EPM tab.

Data Manager UI

Two ribbons are available in the Data Manager tab:g

Connection: place where you define the Webservice connection to reach in order to work with Data Manager features.

Data Manager Group: place where you can perform all BPC 7.5 data manager tasks:– Run package or package links– View package, package links ,and schedule statusp g , p g ,– Upload data– Download data– Data preview

Organize package or package links list– Organize package or package links list– Create and manage Transformation files– Create and manage Conversion files– The More button will allow you to either Clear the prompt values or change the dedicated connection

f D t M


for Data Manager.

Data Manager UI

With the exception of the new Data Manager tab, there is no big change, in p g g gterms of Data Manager functionalities, compared to the BPC 7.5 version. However be aware of the following:

P k li k till l il bl f BPC NW d t f BPC MSPackage links are still only available for BPC NW, and not for BPC MS.

Opposite to the reporting part, when working with the Data Manager, you can only connect to one connection (back-end) at the same time. Of course, multiple connections could be ( ) , psetup in the Active Connection drop-down list, but before accessing any Data Manager tasks, you should choose which one will be used for Data Manager tasks.

This example shows two connections on which toThis example shows two connections on which to report, one for Consolidation model, and another onefor Ownership model. Using the Data Manager will force the user to choose the correct one before working on any Data Manager features


working on any Data Manager features.

Data Manager UI in the EPM Add-in for ExcelLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe the Data Manager UI in the EPM add-in for Excel















p g g ycountries.

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, Version for SAP Consolidation 10.0, Version for SAP NetWeaver

Transport & CLM (Content Lifecycle Management)

Transport & CLM (Content Lifecycle Management)Lesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yUnderstand the new improved granular transport featureDescribe how to set up and run transports from the SAPGUIUnderstand the new feature Content Life Cycle Management (CLM)


Topicsp

1. Transport

2. CLM (Content Life Cycle Management)

Transport Introduction

Transport Introduction: The purpose of transport is to move the contents of environments across a landscape at granular level.With Business Planning and Consolidation 10, version for SAP NetWeaver granular object transport behavior is introduced.Full integration with CTS (Change and Transport System) is available.Normal and Delete mode of transport are supported.Standard NW transport transactions and debugging can be used.


New Improved TransportsBenefitsBenefits

Benefits of this feature include:Better Performance during transportFlexible transport process due to granular object transport behaviorGood benefit to backend system administrators as transport process is fully integrated into t d d NW CTS f kstandard NW CTS framework

Better debugging optionsTight dependency checks during the transport process (explained in a separate section)


TransportsPrerequisitesPrerequisites

Before performing transports, ensure that the following prerequisites p g p g p qhave been met:

Configuration of the SAP NetWeaver Transport Framework by creating transport domains, routes and other aspects of a transport.Configure the system to import client dependent objectsConfigure the system to import client dependent objects.– Create user ALEREMOTE (BW background user)– Create a RFC destination to allow the import method to be executed in the correct client.


Transport Modes

Normal Mode: For modifying and creating objects

Environment objects that support Normal Mode:

Environment Dimension BPF Template Dimension MemberModel Task Profile DM Package Report TemplatesWork Status Report Files DM Files Drill ThroughWork Status Report Files DM Files Drill ThroughDM Data Files Teams Controls Script Logic FilesJournal Template Library Business Rules DM Package GroupData Access Profile DM Package Link Model Configurationg gEnvironment Configuration Book Template Hierarchy of Dimension


Transport Modes

Deletion Mode: For deleting objects

Environment objects that support Deletion Mode:

ModelDimensionData Manager PackageData Manager PackageData Manager Package GroupData Manager Package Link


Transport Dependency Check

Dependency check of each object: p y jThere are some dependencies that exist among the objects of Environment and during

transports there are three types of dependency checks:During transport creation processD i I tDuring Import processDuring Data Checker process


Transport StepsNormal ModeNormal Mode

How to Create TransportNormal ModeNormal Mode

Logon to Source System via SAP GUI and enter transaction code RSA1Select Transport Connection on left column



In the left column, choose SAP Transport > Object TypesIn the middle column, choose More Types > Environment and double-click Select ObjectsIn the middle column, choose More Types Environment and double click Select Objects



In the dialog box, select the environment to be transported and click the Transfer Selections buttonSelections button.



In the right column, the objects in the environment are listed. Select the objects to be transported by selecting or deselecting the corresponding objecttransported by selecting or deselecting the corresponding object.Click the Transport Objects button.



Transport object for the selected objects have been created.Generate a customizing request to include the transport objects and release theGenerate a customizing request to include the transport objects and release the customizing task for transporting.


Transport StepsDeletion ModeDeletion Mode

All the steps are the same with Normal Mode transport except this step.In the left column choose SAP Transport > Object Types in the middle column chooseIn the left column, choose SAP Transport > Object Types, in the middle column, choose More Types > BPC Deletion and double-click > Select Objects


Transport StepsDebugging Transport IssuesDebugging Transport Issues

Transport logs help to debug issues during TransportsLog on to Source System via SAP GUI and enter transaction code SLG1Log on to Source System via SAP GUI and enter transaction code SLG1In the Object field, enter UJ and in the Subobject field, enter UJTClick Execute to get the log


Topicsp

1. Transport

2. CLM (Content Life Cycle Management)

Content Life Cycle Management Introduction

CLM (Content Life Cycle Management) aims to: ( y g )Deliver a reusable software component for the Customers by the EcosystemEstablish a common channel for delivering the application contentsAnalyze the contents from different vendors in a manageable way


Content Life Cycle ManagementBenefitsBenefits

Main benefits of CLM are:Enables Best Practice and Application delivering through contentEnables scaling, fast and more flexible go to marketReduces the implementation effort for customersProvides expertise knowledge of the partner ecosystem to the customersReduces the costs and provides speed deployment opportunities to customers


Content Life Cycle ManagementTerminologyTerminology

Content Groups:pA consistent collection of content records that are defined at a specific point in time

Packages:Packages:A collection of content groups, combined with metadata and attachments


Content Creation Modes

SAP Content: SAP creates content by industry CustomersSAP

Partner/Vendor Content: Vendors/Partners create content by industry

Vendors/ Partners Customers

C t C t tCustomers

Customer Content: Customers create content for themselves


Content Life Cycle Management (CLM)PrerequisitesPrerequisites

Before using CLM, ensure that the following prerequisites have been met:g g p qBPC and CLM Roles AssignmentCLM RFC DestinationCLM System Configuration


Content Life Cycle Management (CLM)Process FlowProcess Flow


Content Life Cycle Management (CLM)Process StepsProcess Steps

How to work with CLM1. Launch CLM via SAP GUI and enter transaction code NWBC2. After logon, choose Manage Content Groups to start working with CLM3. More details on how to use CLM are documented in the help portal. Check the link below.


Transport & CLM (Content Lifecycle Management)Lesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Understand the new improved granular transport featureDescribe how to set up and run transports from the SAPGUIUnderstand the new feature Content Life Cycle Management (CLM)















p g g ycountries.

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver<Unit Name>

Data Manager Enhancements and Updates

Data Manager Enhancements and UpdatesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe the Data Manager Enhancements and Updates


Topicsp

1. Technical Improvements

2. Security and Task Profiles

3. Data Manager Packages

4. Data Manager Data Maintenance

Technical Improvements

REST (Representational State Transfer) Web Service enables communication between SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Clients and SAP NetWeaver BW (Application Server).

Al k RESTf l W b S i it li t t l Cli t / SAlso known as RESTful Web Service, it relies on a stateless, Client / Server, cacheable communications protocol and in virtually all cases, the HTTP communication protocol is used.All services will be exposed as RESTful Web services for internal communication between BPC 10 NW clients and server.

RFC Calls are now replaced by RESTful Web Services to improve Data Manager Debugging during troubleshooting activities.One unified Class* is used to implement and enhance master dataOne unified Class is used to implement and enhance master data attribute/text/hierarchy loading and making it consistent.


Topicsp





Security and Task Profiles

Task Profiles are located under the Security section of the WebSecurity section of the Web administration page.

Specific Data Manager tasks are p gaccessible on the Data Manager section, when editing a particular profile.


Security and Task Profile Descriptions

Task Profile DescriptionRun Admin Packages Can view and run packages set to type "admin".

Edit Packages The ability to edit, create, delete packages. Can change package type. Can add transformation and conversion files but cannot change them. Apply for maintenance of both admin and user package types.

Edit Transformation Files The ability to edit, create, and delete transformation files.

Edit Conversion Files The ability to edit, create, and delete conversion files.

Cancel any User Packages Provides the ability to cancel other user packages.Only NW provides the ability to Cancel.

Edit Package Schedules for any users This task provides the ability to view logs and change schedules for any package. Detailed logs may contain sensitive data, thus this type of task is required.

Run Packages User will be able to run packages from the folders he has the right to read into (depending on team membership), and including private folder.

Edit Package Links The ability to edit, create, and delete package links.

Upload Data The ability to upload a data file.

Download Data The ability to download a data file and perform "data preview“.


Topicsp





Data Manager Packages

Here is the new behavior and execution mode when running Import Packages:Here is the new behavior and execution mode when running Import Packages:Importing Transaction Data from Flat File (Append mode):The existing data in the target application won’t be overwritten or cleared; the key figure of new and old data with the same data range will be accumulated automatically; the new d hi h d h h d ill b di l d d i hdata which does not have the same data range will be directly appended into the application.If Model has DataSrc dimension type, only the target data, which is in the data range of the dimensions with type of DataSrc, Entity, Time, Category from the source, will be cleared.If Model has no DataSrc dimension type, only the target data, which is in the data range of the dimension with type of Entity, Time, Category from the source, will be cleared.


Data Manager Packages: Running IMPORT Packages

IMPORT Package Package Description File Name

Import Description Import Master Data Text from flat file /CPMB/IMPORT_DESCRIPT

Import Master Data Attrib and Hier Flat File Import Master Data Attributes/Hierarchies from flat file /CPMB/IMPORT_MASTER

Import Master Data Attrib and Text InfoObj Import Master Data Attributes/Texts from BW

InfoObject /CPMB/IMPORT_IOBJ_MASTER

Import Master Data Hierarchies I f Obj Import Master Data Hierarchies from BW InfoObject /CPMB/IMPORT IOBJ HIERInfoObj Import Master Data Hierarchies from BW InfoObject /CPMB/IMPORT_IOBJ_HIER

Import Transaction Data Aggregate Overwrite Mode Import Transaction Data (Aggregate Overwrite Mode) /CPMB/IMPORT_APPEND

Import Transaction Data LastImport Transaction Data Last Overwrite Mode Import Transaction Data (Last Overwrite Mode) /CPMB/IMPORT

Import Transaction Data Last Overwrite Mode FTP Import Transaction Data from FTP (Last Overwrite

Mode) /CPMB/IMPORT_USING_FTP


Mode)

Topicsp





Data Manager Data Maintenance

Data Manager Packages may dump during execution. Data stored and remaining in the temporary tables will impact system performance.Data Manager Maintenance Program (UJD_BACKEND_DATA_MAINTENANCE ) retrieves and displays all obsolete data entries and can be deleted to improve performance.


Data Manager Enhancements and UpdatesLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe the Data Manager Enhancements and Updates















p g g ycountries.

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and j gConsolidation 10.0, version for MicrosoftMicrosoft<Unit Name>CTS+ (Enhanced Change and Transport System)

CTS+ (Enhanced Change and Transport System)Lesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain CTS+ (Enhanced Change and Transport System)


CTS+ Introduction

CTS+ (Enhanced Change and Transport System): ( g p y )


CTS+ Purpose

CTS+ (Enhanced Change and Transport System) Purpose: ( g p y ) p


CTS+ Activities

CTS+ (Enhanced Change and Transport System) Activities: ( g p y )


CTS+Prerequisites

Before using CTS+, ensure that the following prerequisites have been met:g g p qInstall the required prerequisite applicationsSetup the Environment Variable SettingsConfigure the CTS+ Settings


CTS+ Transport Types/Objects

CTS (Change and Transport System): Object Type NoteReports File Update/sync( g p y )<Description or highlights><Description or highlights><Description or highlights>

p p yInput Schedules File Update/syncDM conversion files File Update/syncDM transformation files File Update/syncp g gDM transformation files File Update/syncDM packages File Update/syncScript logic files File Include all library files Update/syncDimensions DB MBR table & processing SyncTable driven logics DB syncSecurity profile DB User is not transported updateSecurity profile DB User is not transported updateWeb Contents DB Live report, Workspace,

folderupdate


CTS+ Export Process Flow

CTS + (Enhanced Change and Transport System) Export Process Flow: ( g p y ) p

DB objects are extracted as

xml file

User chooses objects to be transported

Compress as one single zip file Transported to CTS+


transported single zip file

CTS+ Export Process Flow (Admin Console step 1)


CTS+ Export Process Flow (Admin Console steps 2 & 3)




CTS+ Export Process Flow (Admin Console steps 5 & 6)










CTS+ Import Process Flow

CTS+ (Enhanced Change and Transport System) Import Process Flow:

Trigger import from TMS system

Copy file to target server


target serverPost import process

(dimension process, copy files)

CTS+ (Enhanced Change and Transport System)Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain CTS+ (Enhanced Change and Transport System)















p g g ycountries.

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and C lid ti 10 0 V i f Mi ftConsolidation 10.0, Version for Microsoft

Web Client Structure

Web Client StructureLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe the Home tab, built-in screens and use of tabs


Topicsp1. Home Tab

2. Built-in Screens

Home Tab

The Home Tab can be broken into five parts:• Header• Built-in Screens• Creation Area• Launch Area• Footer


Header

The Header area shows the following information:• Current user• Current user• Logoff button• Link to custom Preferences• Link for Help


Preferences (1 of 2)

The Text Size as well as Theme can be customized for the User.



Language and Region can also be customized


Create Area (1 of 4)

The Create Area allows users to create new Workspaces, Reports, and p pInput Forms.



Creating New Workspaces opens a new Tab.g p p



Creating a New Report opens a new Tab.g p p



Creating a New Input Form opens a new Tab.g p p


Launch Area

The Launch Area allows users access to EPM Office Add-in Excel, EPM Office Add-in Word, EPM Add-in Powerpoint, Planning and Consolidation Administration, and FIM integration.


Footer Area

The Footer Area shows the current Environment the user is logged in to, ggthe access rights of the user, a hyperlink to download the EPM Add-in software, and an About link for Planning and Consolidations.


Environment

To change the Environment, click the Environment hyperlink and all g ypavailable Environments will be listed.


Show Access Rights

The current user can see their Access Rights by clicking Show Access g y gRights.


Download Center

To install the EPM Add-in for Microsoft Office, click the Download Center hyperlink.


Topicsp1. Home Tab

2. Built-in Screens

Built-in Screens

The Home Tab comes with built-in screens for Processes, Library, yDocuments, Consolidation Central, Analysis and Audit.


Processes

Processes guide users through a prepackaged set of application tasks g g p p g ppthat must be completed sequentially.


Library

The Library enables you to store and modify objects like Workspaces, y y y j pReports, Input Forms, Crystal Dashboards, and books.


Documents

Documents is a central repository for storing files and websites.p y g


Consolidation Central (1 of 3)

Consolidation Central allows the user to manage consolidated data.g



Journals



Ownership Managerp g


Analysis (1 of 3)

Automated variance analysis (AVA) provides analysis in real-time, y ( ) p yremoving the manual effort of investigation. It can evaluate the data stored within a given model and navigates the model automatically, determining the key contributors of performance.


Analysis (2 of 3)

By clicking AVA Admin, a user can setup Global Indexes, Default y g pComparisons, and Traversal Dimensions.


Analysis (3 of 3)

By clicking KPI Admin, a user can setup different KPI’s, users who can y g paccess them (Authorization), what the comparisons should be, performance indexes specifically for that KPI, as well as the Constraints (specifying the dimension members).


Audit

Audit allows the user to run reports containing system information.p g y


Web Client StructureLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe the Home tab, built-in screens and use of tabs















p g g ycountries.

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and j gConsolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaverNetWeaver<Unit Name>Setting up authentication & SSO

Setting up authentication & SSOLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain SSO with CMS or NWExplain NW ABAP Authentication


SSO (Single Sign-On)

Single Sign-Ong gSingle sign-on (SSO) is mechanism whereby a single action of user authentication and authorization can permit a user to access all computers and systems where he has access permission, without the need to enter multiple passwords. Single sign-

d h j t f t f il d i th fon reduces human error, a major component of systems failure and is therefore highly desirable but difficult to implement. (www.Opengroup.org)

In our case it will allow you to access for example from the start web page directlyIn our case it will allow you to access, for example, from the start web page directly the Excel client and vice versa.


Business Example

The user is already connected with the EPM 10 Web interface and now ywants to access the Excel EPM Add-In. He needs just to click on the related link without providing his credentials again.


SSOBenefits

The multiplicity of clients, back-ends, communication protocols and technology p y p gystacks leads to an overall complex situation.



EPM 10.0 is made of the following products:g pSAP BO EPM solutions 10.0, add-in for Microsoft Office (The EPM add-in)SAP BO Financial Consolidation 10.0 (FC)SAP BO Financial Information Management 10.0 (F.I.M)SAP BO Intercompany 10.0 (IC)SAP BPC 10.0, version for the Microsoft platform (PC_MS)SAP BPC 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver (PC_NW)SAP BO Profitability and Cost Management 10 0 (PCM)SAP BO Profitability and Cost Management 10.0 (PCM)SAP BO Strategy Management 10.0 (SSM)

Some of these products can be used in stand alone configuration, while others are dd i i t ti ith SAP l tfadd-ons, or require integration with SAP platforms.

When more than 1 product is used, a common security directory is needed.A central security repository is needed if many products are used together.


y p y y p g


Some products (FC without Cube Designer, IC, PC_MS, PCM, SSM) have their own integrated security mechanism which is activated when they are used alone:security mechanism, which is activated when they are used alone:

These integrated security mechanisms are provided for clients who are migrating from a previous version, or want to install the minimal landscape for only 1 product.

These integrated mechanisms are deprecated and it is highly recommended to use the commonThese integrated mechanisms are deprecated, and it is highly recommended to use the common security mechanism.

Some products (EPM-Add-in, FC with Cube Designer, FIM, PC_NW) do not provide integrated mechanisms because they are not intended to be used alone.

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver is a NetWeaver application, so it relies on NetWeaver security.

All other products can be set to BusinessObjects Enterprise authentication.User authentication is delegated to a BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 4.0 platform, or to a g j p p ,BusinessObjects Information Platform Services 4.0 platform.The BusinessObjects platform can delegate authentication to other directories:

LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) or Active DirectorySAP NetWeaver



Advantage for EPM 10.0 products:g pThe BusinessObjects platform is the central user repository.Users are the same for all EPM 10.0 applications, and also for BI (Business Intelligence) components provided with the BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 4.0 platform.If it i d l t d t diff t di t (AD LDAP N tW ) th fi ti iIf security is delegated to a different directory (AD, LDAP, NetWeaver), the configuration is done only once.It is possible to implement Single Sign-On mechanism between applications.

This BusinessObjects platform is unique:Even if each EPM Product is provided with an SAP BusinessObjects Information Platform Services 4 0 setup it has to be installed only once and shared by all EPM ProductsServices 4.0 setup, it has to be installed only once and shared by all EPM Products.When SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation for NetWeaver is used, then the BusinessObjects platform has to be set to delegate security to the NetWeaver platform.


SSOPlanning and Consolidation for NW as a Stand-Alone product

The central user repository is NetWeaver. The EPM p yadd-in

PC NWPC_NW

NetWeaverBW


BW

SSOAll EPM 10.0 Products Together

Central user repository is NetWeaver, accessed through BOE for Windows p y gproducts.

The EPM add-inadd in

IC FC PC_NWPC_MS SSMPCMF.I.M

NetWeaverBWBOE/IPS


BW

SSOPrerequisites

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver j grelies on the NetWeaver users:

Users are created in NetWeaver.Users rights are managed in SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation.

For all EPM 10.0 applications, including SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver:

Fi t t th i th N tW l tfFirst, create the user in the NetWeaver platform.Then import the user in the BusinessObjects platform (which is set to use the NetWeaver authentication mode).Then create users in other EPM 10.0 applications, as described previously.pp p yIt is now possible to use the same login for all EPM applications.



The communication between the BPC client and server is conversational. Yet, we do not want to pay the price of a full blown user authentication on each call. The standard a t to pay t e p ce o a u b o use aut e t cat o o eac ca e sta da dsolution is to set a security context up on the first call which enables fast authentication of the subsequent requests. For the standard web application and the REST web services, we choose to have a standard cookie based authentication (automatically handled by the browser or the middleware). )



Single Sign-On can be implemented between EPM 10.0 applications.SSO (Single Sign-On) is for Web applications only.Once a session is opened in an EPM 10.0 web application, or on the BusinessObjects Enterprise BI (Business Intelligence) launch pad web site, you don’t have to re-enter your credentials for login to other EPM 10.0 applications.y g ppThis Single Sign-On is based on a session cookie, delivered by the BusinessObjects platform.

Once delivered, the cookie can be reused to enter another EPM 10.0 product.EPM 10 0 web sites must all use the same DNS (Domain Name System) URL name in order forEPM 10.0 web sites must all use the same DNS (Domain Name System) URL name in order for the cookie to be valid, including the BusinessObjects enterprise web sites and web services.

Example:http://SRV1/Finance and http://SRV1/Intercompany SSO will work, as both products use the DNS name SRV1 URL.http://SRV1/Finance and http://SRV2/Intercompany will not work, as cookie emitted from the SRV1 DNS URL is not valid on SRV2 DNS name.



How to ensure that all EPM 10.0 web applications use the same DNS (Domain pp (Name System) URLs?All web applications can be deployed on the same server:

OK for small configuration, with small amount of usersOK for not too many EPM 10.0 applications, 2 or 3 maximum, in addition to the BOE (Business Objects Enterprise) web applicationsNo redundancy, because there is only 1 server for all web applications.

Access EPM 10.0 web applications through a Reverse Proxy:Allow to put in place as many servers as needed.Allow redundancy, with help of load balancing devices.y, p gAllow to give final users a virtual URL, that can then redirect to real servers.Implies to have a Reverse Proxy.


Process Overview

User connectedLaunch thick Client

Office client workflow

Prompt for User’s credentials Set Authorization header

SSO parameters?Set HTTP

headerYES

POST Session Resource


Automatically handled. Middleware sets

Authorization header

Windows(negociate)

Basic

HTTP

Response status = 200 OK

YES


Valid Session Cookie?

NO

C t S it C t t dAuthenticatedResponse status = 401

U th i d Unknown user


Authenticate request

Create Security Context and set Session Token in Cookie

AuthenticatedUnauthorizedSet proper WWW-Authenticate

Challenge

Unknown user

Process OverviewFlex client workflow


Process OverviewSSO and Client to Client communication

It’s possible to navigate from one BPC client to the other with single sign-on. In addition, we are able to pass BPF actions between clients. For the Office clients, we launch a new client t h dl BPF ti h bl t d t t i Fl li t d itto handle a BPF action, however, we are able to detect a running Flex client and re-use it.


Process OverviewLaunching the Office client from Flex client

HTML proxy BPC Server Flex client page

GetReentranceInfo

Signed Office Launcher object

ExternalInterface.call()

«create»


Office Application

«create»


POST Session resource


Process OverviewLaunching the Flex client from Office client


SSO modes

• From NW Web toBPC NW Excel

FIM

• From BPC NW Excel toBPC NW Web

FIM

• To BPC NW fromEPM Connector

BOE

FIM


Topic Summary: SSO

SSO will allow us to have one single point of access for all the parts of the Business Object Planning and Consolidation.


Setting up authentication & SSOLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain SSO with CMS or NWExplain NW ABAP Authentication















p g g ycountries.


Web Client Structure

Web Client StructureLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe the Home tab, built-in screens and use of tabs


Topicsp1. Home Tab

2. Built-in Screens

Home Tab

The Home Tab can be broken into five parts:• Header• Built-in Screens• Creation Area• Launch Area• Footer


Header

The Header area shows the following information:• Current user• Current user• Logoff button• Link to custom Preferences• Link for Help



The Text Size as well as Theme can be customized for the User.



Language and Region can also be customized



The Create Area allows users to create new Workspaces, Reports, and p pInput Forms.



Creating New Workspaces opens a new Tab.g p p



Creating a New Report opens a new Tab.g p p



Creating a New Input Form opens a new Tab.g p p


Launch Area

The Launch Area allows users to access the EPM Office Add-in Excel, EPM Office Add-in Word, EPM Add-in Powerpoint, and Planning and Consolidation Administration.


Footer Area

The Footer Area shows the current Environment the user is logged in to, ggthe access rights of the user, a hyperlink to download the EPM Add-in software, and an About link for Planning and Consolidations.


Environment

To change the Environment, click the Environment hyperlink and all g ypavailable Environments will be listed.


Show Access Rights

The current user can see their Access Rights by clicking Show Access g y gRights.


Download Center

To install the EPM Add-in for Microsoft Office, click the Download Center hyperlink.


Topicsp1. Home Tab

2. Built-in Screens

Built-in Screens

The Home Tab comes with built-in screens for Activities, Process Monitor, Library, Documents, Consolidation Central, and Audit.


Activities

Activities lists the processes that you, as the currently logged-on user, p y y ggcan access to perform or review actions.


Process Monitor

The Process Monitor displays a list of Processes, and the full set of p yprocess instances.


Library

The Library enables you to store and modify objects like Workspaces, y y y j pReports, Input Forms, Crystal Dashboards, and books.


Documents

Documents is a central repository for storing files and websites.p y g



Consolidation Central allows the user to manage consolidated data.g



Consolidation Managerg



Controls Managerg



Journals



Ownership Managerp g


Audit

Audit allows the user to run reports containing system information.p g y


Web Client StructureLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe the Home tab, built-in screens and use of tabs















p g g ycountries.


Documents

DocumentsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain how to add external documents, filter, and archive


Topicsp1. Adding Documents

2. Open Documentsp

3. Properties

4. Archive

5. Filter

6. Only My Documents6. Only My Documents

Documents

Documents is a repository for storing or sharing files and is a built-in p y g gscreen on the Home tab.


Adding Files (1 of 5)

To post files or URL, select Add from the Home Folder.p



When adding unstructured data, the user can browse their hard drive or a gnetworked drive by selecting Browse.



The user can further distinguish the document by using Type and Sub-g y g yptype.

An administrator defines the different ad st ato de es t e d e e tTypes and Sub-types.



Storing the document by Context.g y



Adding Security to the documentg y



2. Opening Documentsp g

3. Properties

4. Archive

5. Filter


Opening a Document

To open or view the document, double click on the document or select pOpen from the menu bar.




3. Properties

4. Archive

5. Filter


Properties of a Document

To view or edit the properties of a document, select the document and p pselect Properties from the menu bar.

The user can view or edit the properties description Type Subproperties description, Type, Sub-type, Context, as well as the security of the document.




3. Properties

4. Archive

5. Filter


Archiving a Document


Before the document is archived, a warning message is rendereda warning message is rendered.




3. Properties

4. Archive

5. Filter


Filtering for a Document

A user can use Filtering to find a certain document.g




3. Properties

4. Archive

5. Filter


Only My Documents

A user view only the documents they have added by checking the y y y gcheckbox Only My Documents and clicking Refresh.


DocumentsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain how to add external documents, filter, and archive















p g g ycountries.


Documents

DocumentsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain how to add external documents, filter, and archive



2. Open Documentsp

3. Properties

4. Archive

5. Filter


Documents

Documents is a repository for storing or sharing files and is a built-in p y g gscreen on the Home tab.



To post files or URL, select Add from the Home Folder.p



When adding unstructured data, the user can browse their hard drive or a gnetworked drive by selecting Browse.



The user can further distinguish the document by using Type and Sub-g y g yptype.

An administrator defines the different ad st ato de es t e d e e tTypes and Sub-types.



Storing the document by Context.g y



Adding Security to the documentg y




3. Properties

4. Archive

5. Filter


Opening a Document

To open or view the document, double click on the document or select pOpen from the menu bar.




3. Properties

4. Archive

5. Filter


Properties of a Document


The user can view or edit the properties description Type Subproperties description, Type, Sub-type, Context, as well as the security of the document.




3. Properties

4. Archive

5. Filter


Archiving a Document

To Archive or delete a document, highlight the document and click g gArchive.

Before the document is archived, a warning message is rendereda warning message is rendered.




3. Properties

4. Archive

5. Filter


Filtering for a Document

A user can use Filtering to find a certain document.g




3. Properties

4. Archive

5. Filter


Only My Documents

A user view only the documents they have added by checking the y y y gcheckbox Only My Documents and clicking Refresh.


DocumentsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain how to add external documents, filter, and archive















p g g ycountries.


Audit Reports

Audit ReportsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe Audit Reports


Topicsp

1. Overview

2. Administration

3. Security

4. Data

Overview

The auditing capabilities have been broken into three groups: Processes, g p g pSecurity, and General.


Topicsp

1. Overview

2. Processes

3. Security

4. Data

Processes

There are three different Processes audit reports: Process Details, Process pOverview, and Process Operations.


Processes Details (1 of 2)

Process details returns the actual steps and sub-steps for a Process Template p p p(BPF).


Processes Details (2 of 2)

The Detail report shows the instance (intersection, of data), the steps needing p ( ) p gto be performed, as well as the status (Action Required or not).


Processes Overview (1 of 2)

This report gives you audit information on the statuses of steps in all active p g y pand completed processes.


Processes Overview (2 of 2)

This report renders the BPF (Process Template), Model, the activation date, as p ( p )well as the current status.


Processes Operations

This report renders the operations performed in steps for all active and p p p pcompleted processes.


Topicsp

1. Overview

2. Processes

3. Security

4. Data

Security

Security Audit is broken into five groups: User, Teams, Task Profiles, Data y g pAccess Profiles, and Processes


User

Security Audit for Users shows all users having access to the system.y g y

To select a new audit report instead ofTo select a new audit report, instead of closing the folder, the user can choose New Report and select from Security, Data Changes, Comments, Work


Status, or Administration activity.

User

Double-clicking on the user gives the ability to view the Teams, Task Profiles, g g yand Data Access Profiles associated with that user.


Teams

Security Audit for Teams shows all Teams that have been created.y

Double-clicking on the team renders a new screen allowing visibility to all the users assigned to a particular team as well as the Task Profiles and Data Access Profiles


Profiles.

Task Profiles

Security Audit for Task Profiles shows all Task Profiles that have been created yas well as assigned task within that profile.

Double-clicking on the Task Profile renders a gnew screen allowing detailed visibility to all tasks, users and teams associated with this Task Profile.


Data Access Profiles

When Data Access Profiles is selected, a new folder is opened showing all p gData Access Task Profiles that have been created, the model it is assigned to, the dimension as well as dimension member, and the type of access it is granting.


Processes

The report shows all security information for a business process flow.p y p

Clicking on the above BPF the userClicking on the above BPF, the user can now see the users and teams associated with the BPF.


Topicsp

1. Overview

2. Processes

3. Security

4. Data

Data Audits

Audits can be performed on Data Changes, Comments, Work Status, and p gAdministration Activity.


Data Changes (1 of 3)

Data Changes can be audited by entering the Model, Dimension Members, g y gtimeframe, as well as additional criteria.






The report shows all necessary data as well as being able to filter on a certain p y gcolumn.


Comments

Similar to data changes, a user can view comments by dimension g yintersections.


Comments

Comments Report is rendered after selecting Display.p g p y

A user can double-click on the Dimension Members to get a view of the exact intersection of data.


Work Status

The report on work status allows you to display the work status codes for a p y p yset of given criteria.


Administration Activity (1 of 3)

The administration activity audit records information on tasks performed in y pthe system.



Administrators can search on specific Tasks, Task Areas (Environment or p (Model), Task Groups, and Task Types (All, Add, Change, or Delete).

Valid Task Names:• Copy Environment• Delete Environment• Create Model• Copy Model• Modify Model• Delete Model• Create Dimension• Copy Dimension• Modify Dimension• Delete Dimension• Process Dimension


• Process Dimension


The administration activity audit reports on the selected criteria.y p


Audit ReportsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe Audit Reports















p g g ycountries.


Audit Reports

Audit ReportsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe Audit Reports


Topicsp

1. Overview

2. Administration

3. Security

4. Data

Overview

The auditing capabilities have been broken into two groups Security and g p g p yGeneral.


Topicsp

1. Overview

2. Administration

3. Security

4. Data

Administration

To turn on Audit, an administrator needs to enable this feature.


Administration

To enable administrative auditing, select Editg


Administration

To enable Data Auditing by Model, highlight the model and choose Edit.g y g g


Topicsp

1. Overview

2. Administration

3. Security

4. Data

Security

Security Audit is broken into four groups: User, Teams, Task Profiles, and y g pData Access Profiles.


User

Security Audit for Users shows all users having access to the system.y g y

To select a new audit report instead ofTo select a new audit report, instead of closing the folder, the user can choose New Report and select from Security, Data Changes, Comments, Work


Status, or Administration activity.

User

Double-clicking on the user gives the ability to view the Teams, Task Profiles, g g yand Data Access Profiles associated with that user.


Teams

Security Audit for Teams shows all Teams that have been created.y

Double-clicking on the team renders a new screen allowing visibility to all the users assigned to a particular team as well as the Task Profiles and Data Access Profiles


Profiles.

Task Profiles

Security Audit for Task Profiles shows all Task Profiles that have been created yas well as assigned task within that profile.

Double-clicking on the Task Profile renders a gnew screen allowing detailed visibility to all tasks, users and teams associated with this Task Profile.


Data Access Profiles

When Data Access Profiles is selected, a new folder is opened showing all p gData Access Task Profiles that have been created, the model it is assigned to, the dimension as well as dimension member, and the type of access it is granting.


Topicsp

1. Overview

2. Administration

3. Security

4. Data

Data Audits

Audits can be performed on Data Changes, Comments, Work Status, and p gAdministration Activity.









The report shows all necessary data as well as being able to filter on a certain p y gcolumn.


Comments

Similar to data changes, a user can view comments by dimension g yintersections.


Comments

Comments Report is rendered after selecting Display.p g p y

A user can double-click on the Dimension Members to get a view of the exact intersection of data.


Work Status

The report on work status allows you to display the work status codes for a p y p yset of given criteria.



The administration activity audit records information on tasks performed in y pthe system.



Administrators can search on specific Tasks, Task Areas (Environment or p (Model), Task Groups, and Task Types (All, Add, Change, or Delete).

Valid Task Names:• Copy Environment• Delete Environment• Create Model• Copy Model• Modify Model• Delete Model• Create Dimension• Copy Dimension• Modify Dimension• Delete Dimension• Process Dimension


• Process Dimension


The administration activity audit reports on the selected criteria.y p


Audit ReportsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe Audit Reports















p g g ycountries.

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and j gConsolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaverNetWeaver<Unit Name>Granular task security

Granular task securityLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain Security Changes/ImprovementsExplain granular task security


Security Changes/Improvements

• NW Users/Authentication

• New Delivered Roles

• Improved Service User

• Task security: NW Profile/Role

• Data Access Security

• SSO• SSO


Granular SecurityBenefits

Benefits of this feature include:More integration to NWMinimize unnecessary authorizations to delivered BPC rolesMore possibilities of maintaining good complex security modelsEasy to maintain security strategy for Data Manager and Web client compared to BPC 7.5 NWPossibility to customize display only profiles with the new tasks


BPC Delivered Granular Roles

• Normal User Roles:• /POA/BUI_FLEX_CLIENT

• /POA/BUI_UM_USER

•Service User Role:• SAP_BPC_SERVICE

• CLM User Roles:POA/CLM BPC USER• POA/CLM_BPC_USER

• SAP_BPC_BTCH_JOB

• SAP_BPC_CLM_EXPORT


• SAP_BPC_CLM_IMPORT

BPC Delivered Granular Roles

• Table/View Maintenance User Role:• SAP_BPC_TABU_DIS

•Integration User Roles:• SAP_BPC_BICS_REPORTER (BI access)

• SAP_BPC_MDX_REPORTER (ODBO access)

• SAP_BPC_WS_USER (FIM/SSM access)


BPC Service User

• Minimize unnecessary authorization to BPC usery

• BPC user only needs BPC related authorization

• BPC user can do NOTHING on NW server by default

• Service User handles almost all NW/BW API access

• All Data Manager packages will be started with the BPC user


Task Security


Task Security

There are 3 system-generated task profiles (System Admin, Primary Admin, S d Ad i )Secondary Admin)These default task profiles cannot be changed but can be copied.


New Task Profiles

• Administration:• New Manage Document Types task

• Security task has a new group

• Other tasks have been improved• Other tasks have been improved

• Data Manager:• Most new tasks replacing old tasks

• Consolidation:• All New tasks

• Web:• Web:• New edit crystal dashboards task

• Transports:


• New Manage Transport task

Data Access Profile (7.X mode)


Data Access Profile (Matrix Mode)


SSO (Single Sign On)

• From BPC NW Web to• BPC NW Excel

• FIM

•

• From BPC NW Excel to• BPC NW Web

• FIM

•

T BPC NW f•To BPC NW from• EPM Connector

• BOE


• FIM

Granular task securityLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain Security Changes/ImprovementsExplain granular task security















p g g ycountries.


Library

LibraryLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain the Library


Topicsp

1. Folders

2. Filter Library Objects

3. Library Actions

Folders

Library: Allows the user to create, view, and edit Planning and Consolidation y gobjects.

Favorites shows theFavorites shows the folder where the object is stored


Topicsp

1. Folders


3. Library Actions

Folders

A user can filter the objects displayed in the folders.j p y


Topicsp

1. Folders


3. Library Actions

Folders

Library actions are just below the filtering option, allowing the user to create, y j g p gopen, delete, rename, and move objects to certain folders.

By clicking New the user is able toBy clicking New, the user is able to create a new objects.


Folders

To Open an object, either double-click the object or highlight the object and p j j g g jselect Open.

In this case the Rates workspaceIn this case, the Rates workspace is opened rendering two subfolders (Rates and Ownership).


Folders

To Delete an object, highlight the object and select Delete.j g g j

Confirmation box making sureConfirmation box making sure you want to delete the object.


Folders

To Rename an object, highlight the object and select Rename.j g g j

Prompt screen to Rename thePrompt screen to Rename the object.


Folders

To Move an object to another folder, highlight the object and select Move To.j g g j

Prompt screen to Move the object.


LibraryLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain the Library















p g g ycountries.


Library

LibraryLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain the Library


Topicsp

1. Folders


3. Library Actions

Folders

Library: Allows the user to create, view, and edit Planning and Consolidation y gobjects.

Favorites shows theFavorites shows the folder where the object is stored


Topicsp

1. Folders


3. Library Actions

Folders

A user can filter the objects displayed in the folders.j p y


Topicsp

1. Folders


3. Library Actions

Folders

Library actions are just below the filtering option, allowing the user to create, y j g p gopen, delete, rename, and move objects to certain folders.

By clicking New the user is able toBy clicking New, the user is able to create a new objects.


Folders

To Open an object, either double-click the object or highlight the object and p j j g g jselect Open.

In this case the Rates workspaceIn this case, the Rates workspace is opened rendering two subfolders (Rates and Ownership).


Folders

To Delete an object, highlight the object and select Delete.j g g j

Confirmation box making sureConfirmation box making sure you want to delete the object.


Folders

To Rename an object, highlight the object and select Rename.j g g j

Prompt screen to Rename thePrompt screen to Rename the object.


Folders

To Move an object to another folder, highlight the object and select Move To.j g g j

Prompt screen to Move the object.


LibraryLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain the Library















p g g ycountries.


Navigation and Context in Reports and Input Forms

Navigation and Context in Reports and Input FormsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe Context Defaults, Drill, Refresh and Save


Topicsp

1. Accessing Web Reports

2. Context Defaults

3. Drill

4. Refresh and Save

Accessing Web Reports

Web Reports can be accessed either through the Library or from the Start p g yPage, if the report has been marked as a Favorite.

Library view

Reports set up via Favorites


Topicsp


2. Context Defaults

3. Drill

4. Refresh and Save

Context Defaults

The current context is displayed along the top of the report. A white context p y g p pwindow means that you are not at the context default set in BPC Administration.

Via the Administration user interface, anadministrator can set theadministrator can set the reporting and input form context defaults as well as display or hide certain


dimensions.

Context Defaults

To change the context of the report, select the dimension and choose from g pthe dropdown list.

To add new dimensions to the context, select the blue plus sign and all dimensions will be displayed.


Context Defaults

To remove a dimension from the current context, place the cursor in theTo remove a dimension from the current context, place the cursor in the upper left corner of the dimension and click the “x”.

To restore a dimension to the context defaults, place the cursor in the top left corner of the dimension, and click the blue arrow.


Topicsp


2. Context Defaults

3. Drill

4. Refresh and Save

Drilling

To drill down within a report, click the plus buttons next to the dimensionTo drill down within a report, click the plus buttons next to the dimension member within the report. This can be done on both the row and column axis.


Topicsp


2. Context Defaults

3. Drill

4. Refresh and Save

Refresh and Save

To restore the report to it’s original format, select Refresh. To Save the report,To restore the report to it s original format, select Refresh. To Save the report, click Save in the upper right corner of the report.


Navigation and Context in Reports and Input FormsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe Context Defaults, Drill, Refresh and Save















p g g ycountries.


Navigation and Context in Reports and Input Forms

Navigation and Context in Reports and Input FormsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe Context Defaults, Drill, Refresh and Save


Topicsp


2. Context Defaults

3. Drill

4. Refresh and Save

Accessing Web Reports

Web Reports can be accessed either through the Library or from the Start p g yPage, if the report has been marked as a Favorite.

Library view

Reports set up via Favorites


Topicsp


2. Context Defaults

3. Drill

4. Refresh and Save

Context Defaults

The current context is displayed along the top of the report. A white context p y g p pwindow means that you are not at the context default set in BPC Administration.

Via the Administration user interface, anadministrator can set theadministrator can set the reporting and input form context defaults as well as display or hide certain


dimensions.

Context Defaults

To change the context of the report, select the dimension and choose from g pthe dropdown list.

To add new dimensions to the context, select the blue plus sign and all dimensions will be displayed.


Context Defaults

To remove a dimension from the current context, place the cursor in theTo remove a dimension from the current context, place the cursor in the upper left corner of the dimension and click the “x”.

To restore a dimension to the context defaults, place the cursor in the top left corner of the dimension, and click the blue arrow.


Topicsp


2. Context Defaults

3. Drill

4. Refresh and Save

Drilling

To drill down within a report, click the plus buttons next to the dimensionTo drill down within a report, click the plus buttons next to the dimension member within the report. This can be done on both the row and column axis.


Topicsp


2. Context Defaults

3. Drill

4. Refresh and Save

Refresh and Save

To restore the report to it’s original format, select Refresh. To Save the report,To restore the report to it s original format, select Refresh. To Save the report, click Save in the upper right corner of the report.


Navigation and Context in Reports and Input FormsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe Context Defaults, Drill, Refresh and Save















p g g ycountries.


Creating Web Reports & Input Forms

Creating web Reports & Input FormsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain how to create web reports & input forms


Topics

1. Creating Web Reports and I t F

p

Input Forms

2. Inputting Data

3. Comments and Work Status

Web Reports and Input Forms

To create a new report or input form, select New Report or New Input Form p p p pfrom the Start Page.



The new report designer is opened allowing the user to configure the report p g p g g por input template.



Below the Context Default is the Report Action Menu.p



To add dimensions to the column or row axis, highlight the dimension and g gselect the icon on the right. The user will then be prompted to the dimension to either the Row or Column.

The second way is to drag and drop the dimension(s) to the appropriate axis.



The current expansion will show under the dimensions, in this case Children pof (Current Context). To modify the expansion behavior, click the icon to the right of the highlighted dimension.



The user can define how the selection will be expanded by choosing the p y gappropriate selection.

Possible selections

•Single Member

•Children of

•Descendants of

B M b f•Base Members of

•Fixed List



The expansion can either use the Current Context or Select a Fixed Member.p

Select a Fixed Member displays the Member Selector box. If the expansion is “Fixed List”, then p ,the user will be able to select multiple dimension members.



The last selection defines the starting member behavior (to display it or not). g ( p y )To have multiple expansions, select the blue plus sign to add additional expansions.



Below the Context Default is the report action menu where you define the p ytype of report (Report or Input Form), the format of the data, Comments, and Chart characteristics.



It is possible to display a chart below the report or input form by selecting the p p y p p y gChart Action item.



To modify the type of chart, select Modify Chart.y yp y

Chart Options include:• 4 bar graphs• Line graph

Pie chart• Pie chart• Legend definition• Grid display



After making the appropriate selections, the report renders data as well as the g pp p pchart.



When the Report or Input Form is finished, select Finish Editing and be sure p p gto Save it.


Topics


p

Input Forms

2. Inputting Data


Inputting Data

When entering data via an input form, it is important to make sure you are g p p yentering data at a base member level, not at a parent level.


Inputting Data

After changing the Intercompany dimension to a base member, the user can g g p yenter data.

After selecting Save, a splashAfter selecting Save, a splashscreen appears making sure you want to send the data.


Inputting Data

Data has been successfully saved to the database.y


Topics


p

Input Forms

2. Inputting Data


Comments

Comments can be entered at the cell level, for base members or for parents. p


Comments

Enter the desired comments, set the Priority (None, Low, Medium, High, or y ( gCritical), as well as a Keyword (if needed).

Select Modify Context to specify a custom or alternate context.


Comments

After entering the Comment, the report action menu shows a (1) as well as an g p ( )Excel Comment tick mark in the report. Place the cursor in the cell and the comment will appear.


Comments

A user can Edit Comments, Delete Comments, View History, as well Manage y gComments from a web report or input form.

Select Mange Comments and a new tab is opened allowing the user to see all comments where they can Edit,all comments where they can Edit, Delete, Show History, or Edit the Criteria.


Work Status

If users have appropriate task security “Use work status”, they can change pp p y y gwork status directly from a web report, by clicking on the “Work status” button from the web report toolbar.

The “Change work status” dialog will appear and Users can select the context ppfor which they want to change the work status and select a new status from the list.


Creating web Reports & Input FormsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain how to create web reports & input forms















p g g ycountries.


Creating Web Reports & Input Forms

Creating Web Reports & Input FormsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain how to create web reports & input forms


Topics


p

Input Forms

2. Inputting Data



To create a new report or input form, select New Report or New Input Form p p p pfrom the Start Page.



The new report designer is opened allowing the user to configure the report p g p g g por input template.



Below the Context Default is the Report Action Menu.p



To add dimensions to the column or row axis, highlight the dimension and g gselect the icon on the right. The user will then be prompted to the dimension to either the Row or Column.

The second way is to drag and drop the dimension(s) to the appropriate axis.



The current expansion will show under the dimensions, in this case Children pof (Current Context). To modify the expansion behavior, click the icon to the right of the highlighted dimension.



The user can define how the selection will be expanded by choosing the p y gappropriate selection.

Possible selections

•Single Member

•Children of

•Descendants of

B M b f•Base Members of

•Fixed List



The expansion can either use the Current Context or Select a Fixed Member.p

Select a Fixed Member displays the Member Selector box. If the expansion is “Fixed List”, then p ,the user will be able to select multiple dimension members.



The last selection defines the starting member behavior (to display it or not). g ( p y )To have multiple expansions, select the blue plus sign to add additional expansions.



Below the Context Default is the report action menu where you define the p ytype of report (Report or Input Form), the format of the data, Comments, and Chart characteristics.



It is possible to display a chart below the report or input form by selecting the p p y p p y gChart Action item.



To modify the type of chart, select Modify Chart.y yp y

Chart Options include:• 4 bar graphs• Line graph

Pie chart• Pie chart• Legend definition• Grid display



After making the appropriate selections, the report renders data as well as the g pp p pchart.



When the Report or Input Form is finished, select Finish Editing and be sure p p gto Save it.


Topics


p

Input Forms

2. Inputting Data


Inputting Data

When entering data via an input form, it is important to make sure you are g p p yentering data at a base member level, not at a parent level.


Inputting Data

After changing the Intercompany dimension to a base member, the user can g g p yenter data.

After selecting Save, a splashAfter selecting Save, a splashscreen appears making sure you want to send the data.


Inputting Data

Data has been successfully saved to the database.y


Topics


p

Input Forms

2. Inputting Data


Comments

Comments can be entered at the cell level, for base members or for parents. p


Comments

Enter the desired comments, set the Priority (None, Low, Medium, High, or y ( gCritical), as well as a Keyword (if needed).

Select Modify Context to specify a custom or alternate context.


Comments

After entering the Comment, the report action menu shows a (1) as well as an g p ( )Excel Comment tick mark in the report. Place the cursor in the cell and the comment will appear.


Comments

A user can Edit Comments, Delete Comments, View History, as well Manage y gComments from a web report or input form.

Select Mange Comments and a new tab is opened allowing the user to see all comments where they can Edit,all comments where they can Edit, Delete, Show History, or Edit the Criteria.


Work Status

If users have appropriate task security “Use work status”, they can change pp p y y gwork status directly from a web report, by clicking on the “Work status” button from the web report toolbar.

The “Change work status” dialog will appear and Users can select the context ppfor which they want to change the work status and select a new status from the list.


Creating Web Reports & Input FormsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain how to create web reports & input forms















p g g ycountries.


Workspaces

WorkspacesLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe Embedded content, linked content, saving & authorizations


Topicsp

1. Creating a Workspace

2. Modifying a Workspace

Creating Workspaces

Workspaces are groupings of specific content related to a business p g p g pprocesses.


Creating Workspaces


The default context is inherited from the Administration defaults set up by the Administrator.


Creating Workspaces

To change the Model, click the blue files button to the left of the current gcontext.

Adding Content links to content already stored in the Library.


Creating Workspaces

When a new object is added to the Workspace, a new line item is created j punder Overview.


Creating Workspaces

A user can add, edit, delete, manage comments as well as view comment ghistory.

Work Status can also be updated fromwithin workspaces.


Creating Workspaces

Reports and Input Forms can be created specifically for workspaces.p p p y p

Add a new report/input form to a workspace opens the report designer.


Creating Workspaces

Objects can be renamed, deleted, and set as default within the workspace.j p


Creating Workspaces

Workspaces can be saved on one of the three library folders (Public, Private, p y (or Teams).

Workspaces can be saved on one of the three library folders (Public, Private, or Teams).


Topicsp



Modifying Workspaces

To modify a workspace, select Library from the Home folder, and select y p yWorkspaces.


WorkspacesLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe Embedded content, linked content, saving & authorizations















p g g ycountries.


Workspaces

WorkspacesLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe Embedded content, linked content, saving & authorizations


Topicsp



Creating Workspaces



Creating Workspaces


The default context is inherited from the Administration defaults set up by the Administrator.


Creating Workspaces

To change the Model, click the blue files button to the left of the current gcontext.

Adding Content links to content already stored in the Library.


Creating Workspaces

When a new object is added to the Workspace, a new line item is created j punder Overview.


Creating Workspaces

A user can add, edit, delete, manage comments as well as view comment ghistory.

Work Status can also be updated fromwithin workspaces.


Creating Workspaces

Reports and Input Forms can be created specifically for workspaces.p p p y p

Add a new report/input form to a workspace opens the report designer.


Creating Workspaces

Objects can be renamed, deleted, and set as default within the workspace.j p


Creating Workspaces

Workspaces can be saved on one of the three library folders (Public, Private, p y (or Teams).

Workspaces can be saved on one of the three library folders (Public, Private, or Teams).


Topicsp



Modifying Workspaces

To modify a workspace, select Library from the Home folder, and select y p yWorkspaces.


WorkspacesLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe Embedded content, linked content, saving & authorizations















p g g ycountries.


Using Crystal Dashboards

Using Crystal DashboardsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain how to add a Crystal Dashboard to the Library and add it into a Workspace


Topicsp

1. Overview of Dashboard Design Functionality

2. Installation and Configuration

3. Designing Dashboards

4. Publishing Dashboards

Crystal Dashboards Functionality: Overview

Crystal Dashboards and SAP yBusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation– Read live data– Simulate and write-back– Dashboards built dynamically using

metadataKe Cr stal Dashboard capabilitiesKey Crystal Dashboard capabilities:– Provide a planning dashboard with rich

visualization attributes– Adds the capability for write back for– Adds the capability for write back for

simple data input.


Topicsp





Installation and Configuration: Requirements

To run the dashboard based on flash files:– Adobe Flash Player installed on client PCsAdobe Flash Player installed on client PCsTo build the dashboard:– SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Design– SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0 ODBO ClientSAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0 ODBO Client– SAP EPM Add-In– SAP EPM Connector– SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Data Grid (Optional)SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Data Grid (Optional)


Installation and Configuration: Server Configuration

Configure XMLA Provider– In the SBOP PC installed folder:In the SBOP PC installed folder:

o Choose Web XMLA > WebSrvro Edit Datasource.xmlo Check or modify the server name in the blow xml tagy g

<DataSourceInfo>Data Source=servername</DataSourceInfo>– Restart the .net serverConfigure Flash, crossdomain.xml filesg– Three files are required, one under Websrvr, one under Websrvr->Web, and one under

Websrvr->xmla


Installation and Configuration: Dashboard Add-Ons

Install the Dashboard Design Add-Onsg1. The EPM Connector xlx file is located in the installation

directory of the EPM add-in under the EPMConnector folder

C:\Program Files (x86)\SAP BusinessObjects\EPM Add-In\EPMConnector\EPMConnector.xlx

2. The BPC Data Grid xlx file is available as part of the How-To guide on SDNHow To guide on SDN.

http://www.sdn.sap.com/irj/scn/go/portal/prtroot/docs/library/uuid/8032028f-82c7-2b10-0995-8333d8041b30

3. Install the Add-Ons from the Dashboard Design menu4. Click Install Add-On, then choose the xlx file, then click

Close


Topicsp





Designing Dashboards – Create the Connection

Create a new local connection1. Launch SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Design2. From Excel within Dashboard Design, click the EPM tab3. Click Report Actions, then Manage Connectionsp , g4. From the connection manager, choose Create



Choose a connection typeyp1. Choose Local Connection2. Select SAP BusinessObjects

Planning and Consolidation3. Click Connect



Configure the connectiong1. Enter the application server host2. Select the Authentication3. Click Next4. Enter user and password5. Click Logon



Choose the Environment1. Select the Environment2. Click Finish



Select the Model1. Select the cube/model from the list2. Click OK


Designing Dashboards – Create a Report

Create a new reportp1. Select the connection2. Click OK



Design the new reportg p1. Click the Edit Report button2. Configure the report 3. Click OK



Retrieve the Report Definitionp1. In any cell, enter =GetReportDefinition()2. Press Enter3. XML string will be returned3. XML string will be returned


Designing Dashboards – Create the Dashboard

Design the dashboardg1. Select the BPC Data Grid object and drag and drop it into the layout editor



Configure the BPC Data Gridg1. Bind the header data element to the header row

in the excel spreadsheet2. Configure the columns, such as Alignment.3. Bind the detail data element to the detail rows in

the excel spreadsheet.


Designing Dashboards – Configure the EPM Connector

You can make the EPM add-in report dynamic by p y yusing the EPM connector. 1. Delete the static data from the EPM add-in report2. From the Dashboard Design menu, choose Data,

then Connections



Choose the Connector Typeyp1. From the Data Manager window, click Add2. Under Add-On Connections, choose EPM

Connector



Configure the Input Details of the EPM Connector connectiong p1. Enter a connection name2. Select the Application and operation3. Enter the URL for host application serverpp4. Define the Report Definition value by binding it to the cell on the spreadsheet



Configure the Output Details of the EPM Connector connectiong p1. Click Output Details2. Check Refresh on Load3. Click Close


Designing Dashboards – Add Connection Refresh Button

Add a connection refresh button to trigger the EPM connectiongg1. Drag and drop the Connection Refresh Button user interface element into the

layout editor.2. Configure the button to trigger the EPM connector connection.


Designing Dashboards – Adding Input Data Functionality

Configure the Data Grid to accept inputg p p1. Click the BPC Data Grid object, and in the

configuration section, set the columns as “Editable”.



Create a new EPM connector connection1. Set operation as “Input Data”2. Select Environment, and Model



Set the cell definition1. For each dimension, set the specific member



Set the cell value definition for this connection1. Bind the cell of the spreadsheet for this new value. In this example, the

cell for Material Cost and March 2011 is bound to this field. This value in this cell will be written back when this connection is triggered.



Add a update button to trigger the EPM connection for Input Datap gg p1. Drag and drop the Connection Refresh Button user interface element into the



Designing Dashboards – Preview the Dashboard

Preview the dashboard1. From the Dashboard Design menu, click Preview2. The dashboard will then be launched showing the values


Topicsp





Publishing Dashboards – Export the Dashboard Design

Exporting the Dashboard to Flashp g1. Export the Dashboard by choosing File, Export, Flash(SWF)2. Give a name to the swf file and click Save


Publishing Dashboards – Upload the Dashboard

Upload the Dashboardp1. Click the Home tab2. Click Library3. From the Library click y

Dashboards4. Click New, then Dashboard5. Select the SWF file from the

location and click UploadYou may also upload the XLF file for storage as well


Publishing Dashboards – Save Dashboard Configuration

Configure the attributes of the Dashboardg1. Configure any variables2. Click Save


Publishing Dashboards – Library View

Library view shows the new Dashboardy1. Click the Refresh button2. The new dashboard is now available in the library


Publishing Dashboards – Adding to a Workspace

Create a new workspace and add the pdashboard1. Click Workspaces2. From the menu, click New, then

Workspace3. In the new Untitled Workspace tab,

click Add Content4. Choose the location of the

dashboard, then select the dashboard file

5 Click OK5. Click OK



Save the workspacep1. In the new Untitled Workspace tab,

click Save Workspace, then Save Workspace As

2. Choose the location3. Enter the name of the workspace as

well as a description4. Click Save



The dashboard is now added to the workspacep


Using Crystal DashboardsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain how to add a Crystal Dashboard to the Library and add it into a Workspace















p g g ycountries.


Using Crystal Dashboards

Using Crystal DashboardsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain how to add a Crystal Dashboard to the Library and add it in to a Workspace


Topicsp





Crystal Dashboards Functionality: Overview

Crystal Dashboards and SAP yBusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation– Read live data– Simulate and write-back– Dashboards built dynamically using

metadataKe Cr stal Dashboard capabilitiesKey Crystal Dashboard capabilities:– Provide a planning dashboard with rich

visualization attributes– Adds the capability for write back for– Adds the capability for write back for

simple data input.


Topicsp





Installation and Configuration: Requirements

To run the dashboard based on flash files:Adobe Flash Player installed on client PCs– Adobe Flash Player installed on client PCs

To build the dashboard:– SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Design

SAP EPM Add In for Microsoft Excel– SAP EPM Add-In for Microsoft Excel– SAP BW OLE DB Provider– SAP EPM Connector

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Data Grid(Optional)– SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Data Grid(Optional)To run the dashboard outside of BPC web client(standalone or in Excel)– Crossdomain file must be created at

http(s)://<server>:<port>/sap/crossdomain xmlhttp(s)://<server>:<port>/sap/crossdomain.xml– Details can be found in the EPM Office Add-Ins Master GuideXMLA service in ICF must be activated– /sap/bw/xml/soap/xmla/ node can be activated via Transaction SICF


/sap/bw/xml/soap/xmla/ node can be activated via Transaction SICF– Details can be found in the SBOP PC 10.0 Installation Guide

Installation and Configuration: Configure the Model

Configure the Model from the Planning and Consolidation Administration Consoleg g1. Log on to the Admin Console2. Click Models3. Click the Model name4. Check Use as Source of data5. Click Save


Installation and Configuration: Dashboard Add-Ons

Install the Dashboard Design Add-Onsg1. The EPM Connector xlx file is located in the installation

directory of the EPM add-in under the EPMConnector folder

C:\Program Files (x86)\SAP BusinessObjects\EPM Add-In\EPMConnector\EPMConnector.xlx

2. The BPC Data Grid xlx file is available as part of the How-To guide on SDNHow To guide on SDN.

http://www.sdn.sap.com/irj/scn/go/portal/prtroot/docs/library/uuid/8032028f-82c7-2b10-0995-8333d8041b30

3. Install the Add-Ons from the Dashboard Design menu4. Click Install Add-On, then choose the xlx file, then click

Close


Topicsp






Create a new local connection1. Launch SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Design2. From Excel within Dashboard Design, click the EPM tab3. Click Report Actions, then Manage Connectionsp , g4. From the connection manager, choose Create



Choose a connection typeyp1. Choose Local Connection2. Select SAP BW OLE DB Provider3. Click Connect



Configure the connectiong1. Enter the application server host2. Select the Authentication3. Enter the System numbery4. Enter the Client number5. Enter the Language6 Click Next6. Click Next7. Enter user and password8. Click Logon



Choose the location1. Select $INFOCUBE 2. Click Finish



Select the Model1. Select the cube/model from the list2. All models are listed in alphabetical order regardless of environment3. You must select the cube which corresponds to the transient query cubep q y4. Click OK



Create a new reportp1. Select the connection2. Click OK



Design the new reportg p1. Click the Edit Report button2. Configure the report 3. Click OK



Retrieve the Report Definitionp1. In any cell, enter =GetReportDefinition()2. Press Enter3. XML string will be returned3. XML string will be returned



Design the dashboardg1. Select the BPC Data Grid object and drag and drop it into the layout editor



Configure the BPC Data Gridg1. Bind the header data element to the header row

in the excel spreadsheet2. Configure the columns, such as Alignment.3. Bind the detail data element to the detail rows in

the excel spreadsheet.



You can make the EPM add-in report dynamic by p y yusing the EPM connector. 1. Delete the static data from the EPM add-in report2. From the Dashboard Design menu, choose Data,

then Connections



Choose the Connector Typeyp1. From the Data Manager window, click Add2. Under Add-On Connections, choose EPM

Connector



Configure the Input Details of the EPM Connector connectiong p1. Enter a connection name2. Select the Application and operation3. Enter the URL for host application serverpp4. Define the Report Definition value by binding it to the cell on the spreadsheet



Configure the Output Details of the EPM Connector connectiong p1. Click Output Details2. Check Refresh on Load3. Click Close


Designing Dashboards – Add Connection Refresh Button

Add a connection refresh button to trigger the EPM connectiongg1. Drag and drop the Connection Refresh Button user interface element into the




Configure the Data Grid to accept inputg p p1. Click the BPC Data Grid object, and in the

configuration section, set the columns as Editable.



Create a new EPM connector connection1. Set operation as Input Data2. Select Environment and Model



Set the cell definition1. For each dimension, set the specific member



Set the cell value definition for this connection1. Bind the cell of the spreadsheet for this new value. In this example, the

cell for Material Cost and March 2011 is bound to this field. This value in this cell will be written back when this connection is triggered.



Add a update button to trigger the EPM connection for Input Datap gg p1. Drag and drop the Connection Refresh Button user interface element into the



Designing Dashboards – Preview the Dashboard

Preview the dashboard1. From the Dashboard Design menu, click Preview2. The dashboard will then be launched showing the values


Topicsp





Publishing Dashboards – Export the Dashboard Design

Exporting the Dashboard to Flashp g1. Export the Dashboard by choosing File, Export, Flash(SWF)2. Give a name to the swf file and click Save


Publishing Dashboards – Upload the Dashboard

Upload the Dashboardp1. Click the Home tab2. Click Library3. From the Library click y

Dashboards4. Click New, then Dashboard5. Select the SWF file from the

location and click UploadYou may also upload the XLF file for storage as well


Publishing Dashboards – Save Dashboard Configuration

Configure the attributes of the Dashboardg1. Configure any variables2. Click Save


Publishing Dashboards – Library View

Library view shows the new Dashboardy1. Click the Refresh button2. The new dashboard is now available in the library



Create a new workspace and add the pdashboard1. Click Workspaces2. From the menu, click New, then

Workspace3. In the new Untitled Workspace tab,

click Add Content4. Choose the location of the

dashboard, then select the dashboard file

5 Click OK5. Click OK



Save the workspacep1. In the new Untitled Workspace tab,

click Save Workspace, then Save Workspace As

2. Choose the location3. Enter the name of the workspace as

well as a description4. Click Save



The dashboard is now added to the workspacep


Using Crystal DashboardsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain how to add a Crystal Dashboard to the Library and add it in to a Workspace















p g g ycountries.

SAP BusinessObjectsPlanning and Consolidation 10.0gVersion for Microsoft

Book Publishing Changes

Book Publishing ChangesLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe the new UI in ExcelCreate, edit, and validate book publishing templatesSchedule and publish books immediately


Book Publishing Introduction

Book PublishinggAllows one or more reports to be combined in a book for offline viewing.Books can be sent to a printer or saved in PDF formatBooks can be published to the web client’s Libraryp y

A new online Books Viewer is also included in this releaseBooks can be created in real time or scheduled


Business Example

Senior management wishes to receive all key financial reports in PDF g y pformat at the end of each quarter. There are currently 12 key reports, each stored in separate templates.

With Book Publishing all templates can be combined in a single PDFWith Book Publishing all templates can be combined in a single PDF document in a single operation.


Book PublishingPrerequisitesPrerequisites

Before performing book publishing, ensure that the following prerequisites have p g p g g p qbeen met:

The reports / templates you want to publish existYou understand how the reports are to be combined

Whi h ti t i l d– Which sections to include– What templates include in which section– Dimension selection criteria for each section


Topicsp

1. Creating a Book Template

2. Editing a Book Template

3. Validating a Book Template

4. Publishing a Book

Book PublishingCreating a Book TemplateCreating a Book Template

How to create a templatepChoose Book Publications > New TemplateConfigure the Book fields– Template Name

O it M d– Overwrite Mode– Variable TimeConfigure the Section fields– Section Name(s)– Included Templates and description– Fixed Members– Suppressed Members– Variable MembersVariable Members


Configure the Book Fields

The Book Fields are set once in each Book TemplateThe Book Fields are set once in each Book Template.Three fields are available:– Template Name – The name of the Book Template

o RequiredAdd/R l D t i if t t i dd d l d h b k i bli h d lti l ti– Add/Replace – Determines if content is added or replaced when a book is published multiple timeso Possible Values: Add, Replace, By Sectiono Required

Variable Time – Time member can be hard coded by configuring this field– Optional


Configure the Section Fields

A book can have one or more sectionsEach section can contain one or more reports– Click the appropriate button to Add, Duplicate or Delete a sectionEach section has an associated Dimension Member Selection section

This determines the members to be included for each report in this book section– This determines the members to be included for each report in this book section


Configure the Section FieldsSection and Report FieldsSection and Report Fields

The following is configured in each section:– Section Name – The name of the section

o Required– Add/Replace - Determines if the section is added or replaced when a book is published multiple times

o Is only active if By Section is selected in the Add/Replace Book fieldy y p– Report Workbook – Allows you to browse to reports stored locally or on the server

o One report is required per sectiono Additional reports can be configured by clicking the plus icon

– Workbook Description – Each report must have an associated description– Workbook Description – Each report must have an associated descriptiono Required


Configure the Section FieldsDimension Member SelectionDimension Member Selection

Each section also has a Dimension Member Selection section. This section includes:– Fixed Member – For dimensions and members you want to hard code.

o Member’s not specified are taken from the current view o Optional

– Suppressed Member – For dimensions and members you want to suppress when their value is zero. pp y ppo Optional

– Variable Members – Used to get data in for multiple members of one or more dimensiono Required


Configure the Section FieldsDimension Member Selection – Selecting DimensionsDimension Member Selection Selecting Dimensions

Click Select Dimensions to configure Fixed, Suppressed and Variable members.


Configure the Section FieldsDimension Member Selection – Selecting MembersDimension Member Selection Selecting Members

Click ‘…’ to select dimension members.– You can select a single member per dimension for Fixed and Suppressed members– You can select multiple members per dimension for Variable Members


Topicsp





Book PublishingEditing a Book TemplateEditing a Book Template

How to edit a templatepChoose Book Publications > Open TemplateUpdate the Book fields– Template Name

O it M d– Overwrite Mode– Variable TimeUpdate the Section fields– Section Name(s)– Included Templates and description– Fixed Members– Suppressed Members– Variable MembersVariable Members


Topicsp





Book PublishingValidating a Book TemplateValidating a Book Template

How to validate a templatepChoose Open > Open Server Root Folder…– Navigate to WebExcel\TemplateLibrary\Books– Open the bookChoose Book Publication > ValidateChoose Book Publication > Validate


Topicsp





Book PublishingPublishing a BookPublishing a Book

How to publish a bookpChoose Book Publications > Publish BooksSelect the Publication Type– Publish Now or ScheduleS l t P bli ti F tSelect Publication Format– Printer or PDFSelect template(s) and section(s) to publishReview the SummaryReview the SummaryClick Process


Select the Publication Type

A book be published immediately or scheduled– If scheduled you will see an additional user interface allowing you to configure credentials and

frequency.


Select the Publication Format

A book can be published to a printer or a PDF– PDF’s can be published individually, per variable members, or in a single PDF.


Select Template(s) and Selection(s) to Publish

Multiple templates and sections can be published at once– Select templates and sections by clicking the related check box.


Review Summary

A summary is displayed highlighting book publication details


Process

Click Process to begin the process


Book Publishing ChangesLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe the new UI in ExcelCreate, edit, and validate book publishing templatesSchedule and publish books immediately















p g g ycountries.

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10 0 Version for SAPConsolidation 10.0, Version for SAP NetWeaver

Book Publishing Changes

Book Publishing ChangesLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe the new UI in ExcelCreate, edit, and validate book publishing templatesSchedule and publish books immediately


Book Publishing Introduction

Book PublishinggAllows one or more reports to be combined in a book for offline viewing.Books can be sent to a printer or saved in PDF formatBooks can be published to the web client’s Libraryp y

A new online Books Viewer is also included in this releaseBooks can be created in real time or scheduled


Business Example

Senior management wishes to receive all key financial reports in PDF g y pformat at the end of each quarter. There are currently 12 key reports, each stored in separate templates.

With Book Publishing all templates can be combined in a single PDFWith Book Publishing all templates can be combined in a single PDF document in a single operation.


Book PublishingPrerequisitesPrerequisites

Before performing book publishing, ensure that the following prerequisites have p g p g g p qbeen met:

The reports / templates you want to publish existYou understand how the reports are to be combined

Whi h ti t i l d– Which sections to include– What templates include in which section– Dimension selection criteria for each section


Topicsp





Book PublishingCreating a Book TemplateCreating a Book Template

How to create a templatepChoose Book Publications > New TemplateConfigure the Book fields– Template Name

O it M d– Overwrite Mode– Variable TimeConfigure the Section fields– Section Name(s)– Included Templates and description– Fixed Members– Suppressed Members– Variable MembersVariable Members


Configure the Book Fields

The Book Fields are set once in each Book TemplateThe Book Fields are set once in each Book Template.Three fields are available:– Template Name – The name of the Book Template

o RequiredAdd/R l D t i if t t i dd d l d h b k i bli h d lti l ti– Add/Replace – Determines if content is added or replaced when a book is published multiple timeso Possible Values: Add, Replace, By Sectiono Required

Variable Time – Time member can be hard coded by configuring this field– Optional


Configure the Section Fields

A book can have one or more sectionsEach section can contain one or more reports– Click the appropriate button to Add, Duplicate or Delete a sectionEach section has an associated Dimension Member Selection section

This determines the members to be included for each report in this book section– This determines the members to be included for each report in this book section


Configure the Section FieldsSection and Report FieldsSection and Report Fields

The following is configured in each section:– Section Name – The name of the section

o Required– Add/Replace - Determines if the section is added or replaced when a book is published multiple times

o Is only active if By Section is selected in the Add/Replace Book fieldy y p– Report Workbook – Allows you to browse to reports stored locally or on the server

o One report is required per sectiono Additional reports can be configured by clicking the plus icon

– Workbook Description – Each report must have an associated description– Workbook Description – Each report must have an associated descriptiono Required


Configure the Section FieldsDimension Member SelectionDimension Member Selection

Each section also has a Dimension Member Selection section. This section includes:– Fixed Member – For dimensions and members you want to hard code.

o Member’s not specified are taken from the current view o Optional

– Suppressed Member – For dimensions and members you want to suppress when their value is zero. pp y ppo Optional

– Variable Members – Used to get data in for multiple members of one or more dimensiono Required


Configure the Section FieldsDimension Member Selection – Selecting DimensionsDimension Member Selection Selecting Dimensions

Click Select Dimensions to configure Fixed, Suppressed and Variable members.


Configure the Section FieldsDimension Member Selection – Selecting MembersDimension Member Selection Selecting Members

Click ‘…’ to select dimension members.– You can select a single member per dimension for Fixed and Suppressed members– You can select multiple members per dimension for Variable Members


Topicsp





Book PublishingEditing a Book TemplateEditing a Book Template

How to edit a templatepChoose Book Publications > Open TemplateUpdate the Book fields– Template Name

O it M d– Overwrite Mode– Variable TimeUpdate the Section fields– Section Name(s)– Included Templates and description– Fixed Members– Suppressed Members– Variable MembersVariable Members


Topicsp





Book PublishingValidating a Book TemplateValidating a Book Template

How to validate a templatepChoose Open > Open Server Root Folder…– Navigate to WebExcel\TemplateLibrary\Books– Open the bookChoose Book Publication > ValidateChoose Book Publication > Validate


Topicsp





Book PublishingPublishing a BookPublishing a Book

How to publish a bookpChoose Book Publications > Publish BooksSelect the Publication Type– Publish Now or ScheduleS l t P bli ti F tSelect Publication Format– Printer or PDFSelect template(s) and section(s) to publishReview the SummaryReview the SummaryClick Process


Select the Publication Type

A book be published immediately or scheduled– If scheduled you will see an additional user interface allowing you to configure credentials and

frequency.


Select the Publication Format

A book can be published to a printer or a PDF– PDF’s can be published individually, per variable members, or in a single PDF.


Select Template(s) and Selection(s) to Publish

Multiple templates and sections can be published at once– Select templates and sections by clicking the related check box.


Review Summary

A summary is displayed highlighting book publication details


Process

Click Process to begin the process


Book Publishing ChangesLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe the new UI in ExcelCreate, edit, and validate book publishing templatesSchedule and publish books immediately















p g g ycountries.


Books Viewer

Books ViewerLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain how to open Books from the Library and navigate using links and Context


Introduction

Book ViewerBooks are viewed in the Library section of the Home tabBooks published as a single PDF document are viewed using a PDF viewer such as Adobe.B k bli h d lti l PDF b k i d i th B k Vi f ti litBooks published as a multiple PDF book are viewed via the new Book Viewer functionalityEach Section of a Book will be a separate item in the Library– The name and section displayed in the Library is defined in the book templateA Book is opened from the Library as an HTML page in a new browser windowp y p g– This does not open a Business User Interface (BUI) Workspace in the Workspace WindowA very simplified Context Bar provides the filters needed to navigate inside the Book.A navigation pane with a simple flat list allows opening each report in a multiple report bookbook.


Business Example

Senior management wishes to review all of their key financial reports in g y pPDF format at the end of each quarter. There are currently 12 key reports, each published to the SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for Microsoft library.

With the Book Viewer they now have the ability to navigate inside a Book, choosing between multiple reports and filtering different dimension members using the context bar.


Book ViewerPrerequisitesPrerequisites

Before using the Book Viewer feature, ensure that the following prerequisites have g g p qbeen met:

The reports / templates you want to publish already exist.The reports you want to review have been published in a book format.Y h th i t it t i th b kYou have the appropriate security to review the book.You have a PDF Viewer such as Adobe installed on your client machine.


Book Structure

The structure of a Book consists of the following components:

Sections– Have a specific dimensionality (VaryKeys &

fixed members)fixed members)– There is always one Section at least, additional

Sections are optionalReports

A Section can ha e one or se eral reports– A Section can have one or several reports– All reports use the dimensionality defined in the

Section


Book Security

Book Viewing Security g yThe book is secure and at least one of the vary keys is a secured dimension.The book is not secure if none of the vary key(s) are not a secured dimensionkey(s) are not a secured dimension.A book published as a single PDF on the Web is not secured.A book printed to a local printer is not secured. Anyone can access the report even non BPC users.


Navigation: Selecting Book

Selecting a BookgLogon onto BPC 10 WebNavigate to the Library section of the Home tabSelect the link BooksNavigate to the Public FolderChoose the Book you want to view– There will be one item in the Library for each Section defined

in the structure of a Book.


Navigation: Context Bar

Filtering using the Context Barg gChoose the book to view– If there are multiple reports in the Book, a navigation pane with a simple flat list allows opening each

reportA simplified version of the Context Bar is displayed that provides the filters needed toA simplified version of the Context Bar is displayed that provides the filters needed to navigate inside the Book.– The Context Bar only displays the dimensions available to navigate in the Book– The navigation is via a simple set of filters, one for each dimension defined as the “VaryKeys” in the

Book definitionBook definition– Please note that all of the reports in one Section share the same VaryKey.


Navigation: Single Report Book

Single Report BookThe title of the Book is displayed in a TabThe title of the Book is displayed in a TabNo report links will be displayedSelect the dimension members from the ContextSelect the Display button to view the bookSelect the Display button to view the book– The report will be displayed based on the PDF

reader setting.After reviewing the report, change the dimension members for the existing reportdimension members for the existing report.


Navigation: Multiple Report Book

Multiple Report BookS l t th di i b f th C t tSelect the dimension members from the ContextSelect the report, from report links list– A list with all of the reports as defined in the book template will be

displayed.– Select the report by clicking on the name

o The report will be displayed based on the PDF reader setting– After reviewing the report, change the dimension members for the

existing report or select a different report.


PDF Viewer: Display Options

The Book Viewer uses links, opening PDFs behaves just like in any web page containing links to PDF.Based on user preferences, the Books can be displayed either embedded in the browser or in a separate window.PDF viewer clients, such as Adobe Reader, provide users with an option to display the PDFs in a separate window, the PDF Viewer (not embedded).The defa lt for Adobe Reader is to displa PDFsThe default for Adobe Reader is to display PDFs embedded in the browser.A message will be displayed if the PDF is not displayed embedded.


Topic Summary: Book Viewer

This Book Viewer simplifies the navigation of published reportsWith the Book Viewer users have the ability to navigate inside a Book, choosing between multiple reports and filtering different dimension members.


Books ViewerLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain how to open Books from the Library and navigate using links and Context















p g g ycountries.


Books Viewer

Books ViewerLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain how to open Books from the Library and navigate using links and Context


Introduction

Book ViewerBooks are viewed in the Library section of the Home tabBooks published as a single PDF document are viewed using a PDF viewer such as Adobe.B k bli h d lti l PDF b k i d i th B k Vi f ti litBooks published as a multiple PDF book are viewed via the new Book Viewer functionalityEach Section of a Book will be a separate item in the Library– The name and section displayed in the Library is defined in the book templateA Book is opened from the Library as an HTML page in a new browser windowp y p g– This does not open a Business User Interface (BUI) Workspace in the Workspace WindowA very simplified Context Bar provides the filters needed to navigate inside the Book.A navigation pane with a simple flat list allows opening each report in a multiple report bookbook.


Business Example

Senior management wishes to review all of their key financial reports in g y pPDF format at the end of each quarter. There are currently 12 key reports, each published to the SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, version for SAP NetWeaver library.

With the Book Viewer they now have the ability to navigate inside a Book, choosing between multiple reports and filtering different dimension members using the context bar.


Book ViewerPrerequisitesPrerequisites

Before using the Book Viewer feature, ensure that the following prerequisites have g g p qbeen met:

The reports / templates you want to publish already exist.The reports you want to review have been published in a book format.Y h th i t it t i th b kYou have the appropriate security to review the book.You have a PDF Viewer such as Adobe installed on your client machine.


Book Structure

The structure of a Book consists of the following components:

Sections– Have a specific dimensionality (VaryKeys &

fixed members)fixed members)– There is always one Section at least, additional

Sections are optionalReports

A Section can ha e one or se eral reports– A Section can have one or several reports– All reports use the dimensionality defined in the

Section


Book Security

Book Viewing Security g yThe book is secure and at least one of the vary keys is a secured dimension.The book is not secure if none of the vary key(s) are not a secured dimensionkey(s) are not a secured dimension.A book published as a single PDF on the Web is not secured.A book printed to a local printer is not secured. Anyone can access the report even non BPC users.


Navigation: Selecting Book

Selecting a BookgLogon onto BPC 10 WebNavigate to the Library section of the Home tabSelect the link BooksNavigate to the Public FolderChoose the Book you want to view– There will be one item in the Library for each Section defined

in the structure of a Book.


Navigation: Context Bar

Filtering using the Context Barg gChoose the book to view– If there are multiple reports in the Book, a navigation pane with a simple flat list allows opening each

reportA simplified version of the Context Bar is displayed that provides the filters needed toA simplified version of the Context Bar is displayed that provides the filters needed to navigate inside the Book.– The Context Bar only displays the dimensions available to navigate in the Book– The navigation is via a simple set of filters, one for each dimension defined as the “VaryKeys” in the

Book definitionBook definition– Please note that all of the reports in one Section share the same VaryKey.


Navigation: Single Report Book

Single Report BookThe title of the Book is displayed in a TabThe title of the Book is displayed in a TabNo report links will be displayedSelect the dimension members from the ContextSelect the Display button to view the bookSelect the Display button to view the book– The report will be displayed based on the PDF

reader setting.After reviewing the report, change the dimension members for the existing reportdimension members for the existing report.


Navigation: Multiple Report Book

Multiple Report BookS l t th di i b f th C t tSelect the dimension members from the ContextSelect the report, from report links list– A list with all of the reports as defined in the book template will be

displayed.– Select the report by clicking on the name

o The report will be displayed based on the PDF reader setting– After reviewing the report, change the dimension members for the

existing report or select a different report.


PDF Viewer: Display Options

The Book Viewer uses links, opening PDFs behaves just like in any web page containing links to PDF.Based on user preferences, the Books can be displayed either embedded in the browser or in a separate window.PDF viewer clients, such as Adobe Reader, provide users with an option to display the PDFs in a separate window, the PDF Viewer (not embedded).The defa lt for Adobe Reader is to displa PDFsThe default for Adobe Reader is to display PDFs embedded in the browser.A message will be displayed if the PDF is not displayed embedded.


Topic Summary: Book Viewer

This Book Viewer simplifies the navigation of published reportsWith the Book Viewer users have the ability to navigate inside a Book, choosing between multiple reports and filtering different dimension members.


Books ViewerLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain how to open Books from the Library and navigate using links and Context















p g g ycountries.


AVA Scorecard

AVA ScorecardLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain the AVA Scorecard


Scorecards

Scorecards are visualizations of data on the user web interface.

You have the ability to place a scorecard or dashboard on the BPC landing page.


Scorecards

Scorecard or dashboardsA quick look of status q

Show status of predefined KPILink to each visualization typeFirst user interface to access every AVA function – including administrative function


AVA ScorecardLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain the AVA Scorecard















p g g ycountries.


Consolidation Monitor

Consolidation MonitorLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain the status information displayed in the monitorDescribe running RulesDescribe incremental consolidation


Feature or Task Introduction

Consolidation MonitorThis feature provides an overview of the whole consolidation process in one single screen. The monitor tracks the following items:

Status of the controlsWork StatusExecution status for currency conversionExecution status for consolidation

This feature will be very useful for all the users that need to monitor the progress of the consolidation process (at a group or at a local level), as they have all the information they need on one single screen.


Consolidation MonitorBenefitsBenefits

Benefits of this feature include:Overview of the controls, work status and execution status for currency conversion and consolidation on one single screenOverview of the progress in the consolidation process for:

Individual entities– Individual entities– Consolidation groupsCurrency Conversion and Consolidation can be triggered from that same screen


Consolidation MonitorPrerequisitesPrerequisites

The Consolidation Monitor has the following prerequisites:g p qUsage of a Consolidation type ModelDefinition of the ownership structure for that periodDefinition of work status (for work status display)Definition of controls (for control display)Assignment of relevant task profiles


Consolidation MonitorSecuritySecurity

There are two security tasks related to the Consolidation Monitor:yView Consolidation Monitor – provides access to the Consolidation MonitorRun Consolidation Tasks – provides permission to run the Currency Conversion and the Consolidation from the monitor


Consolidation MonitorStarting PageStarting Page

The starting page can be divided into 3 sections– Context: Selection of Model, Category, Entity and Consolidation Group– Actions List of possible actions– Status: Details of the status for the selected context

ContextActions

Status


Consolidation MonitorActionsActions

The following Actions are available (some actions may be grayed out if no entity or a node level is selected)– Work Status: Open the screen to update work status for the selection– Translate: Runs currency conversionTranslate: Runs currency conversion– Consolidate: Runs consolidation– Display Running Processes: Opens a window that shows which processes are currently running– Reset: Resets execution status for Currency Translation and Consolidation

R f h R f h th t– Refresh: Refreshes the current screen– Show Description: Shows description instead of ID– View Select between a hierarchical and flat view


Consolidation MonitorWork StatusWork Status

This screen allows one to update the work status for the selected entity

This currently only works on base level entities; work status cannot be set on parent levels using the Consolidation Monitor


Consolidation MonitorRunning Currency ConversionRunning Currency Conversion

The following steps need to be performed in order to execute Currency Conversion1. In Consolidation Central Consolidation Monitor, in the scope context area, select the Category, Time

and Group dimension members for which you want to run the currency translation.

2. Select the row for the Group or Entity you require and click Translate.y y

3. In the Translate dialog box, verify the selected dimension members and choose whether to run a full or incremental translation.


4. Click OK.

Consolidation MonitorRunning Currency Conversion (Cont’d)Running Currency Conversion (Cont d)

When executing Currency Conversion on a group level (node), the screen shown on the previous slide is displayed. This performs a conversion into group currencies.When Currency Conversion is executed on an Entity level, the following screen is displayed.

This performs a currency conversion into the selected reporting currency. It is also possible to select which Rate Entity to use for this conversion.


y

Consolidation MonitorRunning ConsolidationRunning Consolidation

The following steps need to be performed in order to execute Currency Conversion1. In Consolidation Central Consolidation Monitor, in the scope context area, select the Category, Time

and Group dimension members for which you want to run the consolidation.

2. Select the row for the Group or Entity you require and click Translate.y y

3. In the Consolidation dialog box, verify the selected dimension members and choose whether to run a full or incremental translation.


4. Click OK.

Consolidation MonitorCurrency Conversion and ConsolidationCurrency Conversion and Consolidation

Please note the following points:– Member in the Entity type dimension of the Rate application needs to be called GLOBAL (in upper

case) for the conversion to group currencies to work properly– The respective programs for currency conversion and consolidation are called directly. No logic script

is called, therefore no custom calculations can be executed.


Consolidation MonitorIncremental vs. FullIncremental vs. Full

The Currency Conversion and Consolidation programs can be executed in incremental or full mode. The incremental mode will only execute the program for those entities that were changed since the last execution of the program (this is of course much faster than executing the program for all entities)The process works the following way:p g y– Every time data is written-back to the system, a timestamp is written to a separate table to keep track

of when the data of an entity has last been updated

– When a program runs in incremental mode, it will check which entity has been modified since it’s last execution and only perform the calculation for those entities which significantly speeds up theexecution and only perform the calculation for those entities, which significantly speeds up the process.


Consolidation MonitorIncremental vs. Full (Cont’d)Incremental vs. Full (Cont d)

The incremental mode only works when data has been updated, it does not work in the following cases:Rates were changedOwnership information was changedBusiness Rules were changedBusiness Rules were changed

The program needs to be run in full mode if one of the cases mentioned above has occurred


Consolidation MonitorDisplay Running ProcessesDisplay Running Processes

This screen displays the currently running processes and shows the progress of each process (you can select whether you want to see all processes or only your own ones)

If a process has failed, opening this screen will allow this process to be reset (after a certain period) so that it can be executed again


certain period), so that it can be executed again.

Consolidation MonitorResetReset

Highlight a group or entity and click the Reset button, this will display a screen with the current selection

The Currency Conversion and Consolidation status are then set back to “To be executed”


Consolidation MonitorStatusStatus

This screen displays the controls, work status and execution status for Currency Translation and Consolidation

The status is set to Done once the programs were successfully executed.The Currency Translation and Consolidation status are set back to To Be Executed if data i t d (f th E tit d t h b t d)is entered (for the Entity were data has been entered)


Consolidation MonitorStatus Roll-upStatus Roll up

The status on the parent level (for controls, work status, currency translation and consolidation) is based on the lowest status of the children. There is no status that is stored on the node levels, they are computed when the monitor is displayed.

In the example below one entity has the status set to To Be Executed and the parentIn the example below, one entity has the status set to To Be Executed and the parent Corporate shows that same status, as it is the lowest status of all it’s children.


Consolidation MonitorLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain the status information displayed in the monitorDescribe running RulesDescribe incremental consolidation















p g g ycountries.


AVA Visualizations

AVA VisualizationsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain AVA Visualizations


Automated Variance Analysis

Variance AnalysisyRoot CauseContribution

Performance AnalysisStatus IndicatorChild Performance


Variance Analysis

Root Cause Analysisy

This type of analysis identifies a variance based on the comparison of time periods or categories.

Contribution Analysis

This type of analysis identifies the top two contributors to a variance for two dimensions.


Performance Analysis

Status Indicator Analysisy

This analysis compares two data values against the user defined performance index of a KPI, then determines the variance.

Child Performance Analysis

This analysis type highlights over or under performance against the user-defined performance index, at a level below the chosen value.p ,


AVA VisualizationsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain AVA Visualizations















p g g ycountries.


Controls

ControlsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain the status information displayedDescribe linked documents


Business Example

Controls are an important component mainly in consolidation application p p y ppto ensure proper data quality.

End-users run controls to check their data quality and allow them to fix their data. The level of controls might be different by entities and timetheir data. The level of controls might be different by entities and time periods.


ControlsPrerequisitesPrerequisites

To use the Controls feature from the end-user point of view, the following needs to p gbe defined:

Controls need to be defined and assigned in the Administration moduleFor Consolidation type application, ownership structure need to be maintainedW k St t d t b d fi d i th Ad i i t ti M d lWork Status need to be defined in the Administration Module

Controls replace the validations that were used in the SBOP PC 7.5 release.


ControlsSecuritySecurity

The following four tasks are related to Controls from an end-user point of view:g pReset Control DismissalDismiss Blocking ControlsView ControlRun Controls


Process Overview

1. Run Controls2. Review Controls3. Identify issues in data4. Correct Data5. Re-run Controls


ControlsSet ContextSet Context

The selection of the context will define which Category, Time and Groups/EntitiesThe selection of the context will define which Category, Time and Groups/Entities are displayed in the Control Monitor. Depending on the type of application, the third selection box will:

For Consolidation type application, display the Group type dimension (user selects a group d ill t ll th b d titi di l d di t th d fi iti i thand will get all the sub-groups and entities displayed, according to the definition in the

Ownership Manager)For Planning type application, display the Entity type dimension (user selects an Entity and will get the selected Entity and all its descendants, according to the hierarchy of the Entity dimension)


ControlsControls MonitorControls Monitor

Controls Monitor indicates for each entity:Controls Monitor indicates for each entity:Control Set: Control set that has been assigned for this category and periodStatus: Displays status of current controlLevel: Level of control applicable for that entity (linked to the CONTROL_LEVEL property)Number of Blocking: How many blocking controls have failedNumber of Warnings: How many warning controls have failed


ControlsStatus and Type of ControlsStatus and Type of Controls

The following statuses exist:The following statuses exist:To be executed: Control needs to be run (has not been executed yet or data have changed since last execution)Passed: Control passed successfullyFailed: Control has failed, data needs to be correctedDismissed: Control was forced to pass

There are two types of controls:There are two types of controls:Blocking: All blocking controls must pass (or be dismissed) in order to allow a change of the work status. These controls are mandatory.Warning: These controls are provided for information only, but they do not block the process.


ControlsLevelsLevels

There are four level of controls that can be assigned to an entity. An entity uses allThere are four level of controls that can be assigned to an entity. An entity uses all the controls that have been assigned to that level (and above).

1: Basic2: Standard3: Advanced4: Comprehensive


ControlsControls MonitorControls Monitor

Depending on the type of application, the entities are organized according to the:Depending on the type of application, the entities are organized according to the:Setup in the Ownership Manager for Consolidation applicationsHierarchy of the Entity dimension for Planning applications

The View drop-down box in the top right corner allows you to select between aThe View drop down box in the top right corner allows you to select between a hierarchy and a flat view


ControlsExecute ControlsExecute Controls

To execute controls, highlight the entity or node and click the Run Controls button, g g y

Check the settings for the dimensions, they should be correct as they are taken over from g y ythe context


ControlsReview ControlsReview Controls

After the execution, the status and the number of blockings and warnings are g gupdated.

Status for node levels are calculated on the fly, the node level will always show the lowest status of all its children.

Highlighting an entity in the top part of the screen displays a list of the failed controls in the bottom part of the screen (details for S000 in this example).


ControlsReview ControlsReview Controls

To get a detailed view of all controls, select the Entity and click the Open Control Results button

This opens a new tab that contains the detailsThis opens a new tab that contains the details


Controls ResultsOverviewOverview

C t tContext

Actions

DetailsDocument

links

Details


Controls ResultsActionsActions

The drop-down box at the top allows to select which controls should be displayed p p p ybased on their status.

Controls can be run by clicking the Run Controls button and refreshed with the Refresh button.


Controls ResultsDetailsDetails

This view contains the detail about all the controls, a drill down can be done on a control by , yclicking the arrow on the left of the screen

The breakdown members indicate which member of the break-down dimension is displayedThe breakdown members indicate which member of the break down dimension is displayed if break-down has been defined for that controlThe Equation and Result columns show the calculation that are performed and the result that is calculatedTh Th h ld l i di t th th h ld th t d fi d f th t i dThe Threshold column indicates the threshold that was defined for that periodThe Type column indicates whether the control is Blocking or WarningThe Status column indicates if the control has passed, failed or has been dismissed


ControlsLinked DocumentsLinked Documents

If linked documents has been defined for a control, they can be accessed with the yhyperlink at the bottom of the screen.

This will start the EPM add-in and open the selected report. Please note that only the Category, Entity, and Time dimensions are passed to the report, the rest of the di i d t b t ll i th t it lfdimension need to be set manually in the report itself.


ControlsDismissing ControlsDismissing Controls

There are cases were blocking controls need to be passed, although the data is g p gfailing. For example, when there are some last minute corrections and the figures need to be published, although all the controls are not passed. For this exceptional case, there is the possibility to force a control to pass by dismissing it.

A blocking control that has failed can be forced to pass, by highlighting the control and clicking the Dismiss block button.

The control then receives the status Dismissed


The control then receives the status Dismissed.

ControlsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain the status information displayedDescribe linked documents















p g g ycountries.


AVA Configuration

AVA ConfigurationLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain general AVA Configuration & KPI settings


Configuring Automated Variance Analysis

Global DefaultsPerformance Index ValuesDefault Time or Category comparisonDefault Traversal DimensionDefault Component DimensionNon-traversed Dimensions

Key performance IndicatorsDimensional ConstraintsOptional Performance IndexComparison ConfigurationAssociation with Model Set User or TeamGroup similar KPI


Configuring Global Defaults

Performance indexesDefaults at Environment levelApplies to Dashboard, Status indicator and Child performanceApplies to ad-hoc analysis



Default comparisonpSet default comparison type – Time or CategorySet Traversal and Component dimensions for Child performance and Component analysisDefine for each modelApplies to ad-hoc analysis



Traversal dimensionsDefine Not Traversed dimension – excluded from query to reduce size of datasetBe aware of your dimension design because a default member will be used in selected dimensions


Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)

Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) are predefined dimension members that y ( ) prepresent specific intersections or a dynamic intersection of a model dataset. This allows you to predefine important data to be analyzed as part of your business best practices in a consistent manner.

KPI definitions are constrained to a single model. There can be one or more KPI definitions per model, but KPI definitions cannot be shared across models. The KPI Admin Workspace displays the name of the environment and model TheAdmin Workspace displays the name of the environment and model. The environment defaults to the current environment.

KPIs can be used in place of the defaults defined by the global configuration,KPIs can be used in place of the defaults defined by the global configuration, including performance index thresholds and text settings. Any explicit KPI definition overrides the global default.


KPI Configuration

Create your own predefined KPIy pFor each model

Assign KPIs to users or teamsSet Custom comparison type and performance indexes different from global settingsPredefine constraints with flexibility to apply contexts with lock/unlockGroup related KPIs


AVA ConfigurationLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain general AVA Configuration & KPI settings















p g g ycountries.


Ownership Manager

Ownership ManagerLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yUnderstand the new Ownership Manager interfaceNavigate the Ownership Manager functions and featuresCreate and maintain Ownership hierarchiesExecute Ownership calculations


The New Ownership Manager InterfaceOwnership Manager - PrerequisitesOwnership Manager Prerequisites

The ownership manager requires an Ownership model to be defined that is of the p g q ptechnical model type ownership.Model definition:

The Ownership model must include the following dimensions:Dimension type “A” – provides information on ownership type such as PGROUP, POWN, PCON and PCTRLPCON, and PCTRLDimension type “C” *Dimension type “E” *Dimension type “T” *

*must be the same dimension as used within the Legal (C lid ti ) li ti


ypDimension type “I” *Dimension type “G”*

(Consolidation) application

The New Ownership Manager InterfaceOwnership Manager Security TasksOwnership Manager Security Tasks

Access to the ownership manager (formally known as the Dynamic Hierarchy Editor p g ( y y yin earlier versions of BPC) is controlled via the following three security tasks:


The New Ownership Manager InterfaceAccessing the Ownership ManagerAccessing the Ownership Manager

The ownership manager (formally known as the Dynamic Hierarchy Editor in earlier p g ( y y yversions of BPC) is accessed via the web interface and is located on the Start Page within the Consolidation Central node.



Click the Ownership Manager access link to display the ownership definition in the p g p y pright context screen.



The ownership definition screen includes an overview display of the ownership p p y phierarchy, and for each node the Generated and/or Current consolidation method, the Consolidation Rate (formally PCON), and the Financial Interest Rate (formally POWN) rates to be employed for the selected node.



Although the Ownership Manager uses terms such as Consolidation Rate and g p gFinancial Interest Rate, the data is stored with the same data modeling as in previous versions. For example, Consolidation Rates are stored as PCON values and Financial Interest Rates are stored as POWN values in the database.



Access existing/create new versions of ownership hierarchy by changing the g p y y g gcontext selections for the Category, Time, and Group dimensions.

The system will remember the last dimension value. Use the restore dimension yfeature to return to the previously selected value.


The New Ownership Manager InterfaceEditing the Ownership HierarchyEditing the Ownership Hierarchy

Change data views and adjust number of decimal places to be displayed: g j p p y



View member IDs or ID and Descriptions by selecting the checkbox provided.p y g p

or



Edit and define the hierarchy by selecting EDIT.y y g

Clicking the Edit button will open a new tab that will allow you to create/edit an ownership hierarchy.



Editing opens a new tab titled Edit Ownership (selected context for Category, Time, g p p ( g yand Group).



Access existing, or create new, versions of ownership hierarchies by changing the g p y g gcontext selections for the Category, Time, and Group dimensions.



Add/Remove individual Entity values from the Group hierarchyy p y



Use Pin/Unpin features to drag and drop selections.p g p



Context menu provides same functions as in tool bar.p



Use up/down arrows to reposition a selection within a hierarchy.p p y



Turn on/off viewing of member descriptions.g p


The New Ownership Manager InterfaceEditing the Ownership Hierarchy:Editing the Ownership Hierarchy:

Click top group node to view summary of all entities entered.p g p y



Click individual entity nodes to view settings for that entity.y g y



Double-click current cells to modify settings.y g



Click the Update Ownership Upwards checkbox. This feature allows the system to p p p ycalculate the consolidation rates and the financial interest rate for parent nodes in the ownership hierarchy:



The Show Empty checkbox forces the system to display entities with zero p y y p yconsolidation rates and financial interests:



Ownership hierarchies can be saved.p

Ownership hierarchies can be copied into a different context.



Click Calculate to run internal program that determines the generated values for p g gConsolidation Rate and Financial Interests.



Save all changes before closing editing tab. If you forget to save, a popup box will g g g y g p p pappear to remind you.


Ownership ManagerLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Understand the new Ownership Manager interfaceNavigate the Ownership Manager functions and featuresCreate and maintain Ownership hierarchiesExecute Ownership calculations















p g g ycountries.

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10 0 Version forConsolidation 10.0, Version for Microsoft

Using AVA Instead of InsightUsing AVA Instead of Insight

Using AVA Instead of InsightLesson Objectivesj

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain migration considerations


Dashboards

A quick look at status qShow status of predefined KPILink to each visualization typeUI allows access every AVA function – including administration


Variance Analysis

Variance AnalysisyLook up top contributors to a variance

Show the desired amount of top contributors to KPI (Limited to 1000


Status Indicator

Quick look at statusSame as dashboardContext change can apply in status indicator as well as ad-hoc analysis


Child Performance

Find hidden under/over performerspShow underperformed child members if a parent member over performsShow over-performed child members if a parent member underperforms


Component Analysis

Overview of the percentage of child members’ contributionp gNo variance information


Using AVA Instead of InsightLesson Summaryy

You should now be able to:Explain Migration considerations















p g g ycountries.


Journals

JournalsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yView and create journal templatesView and create journal entriesUse advanced journal query to locate a journalExplain the automatic balancing features of journalsCreate and manage journal groupsExplain journal statuses



The journal template is accessed via the web interface and is located in the j pAdministration interface within the Features section.



Highlighting the journal template activates/deactivates available actions that can be g g g j ptaken.



A new journal template can be defined in this Administration section.j p



An existing journal template can be deleted in this Administration section, but only g j p yafter all journal entries using that template have been deleted as well.



All existing journal entries can be deleted in this Administration section.g j



Journal parameters can be configured for all journal entries associated with the p g jdefined template.



Click the Journal Template name and a new tab opens, revealing the template p p g pconfiguration options.



Select journal header dimension by highlighting the desired dimension on the j y g g gMembers screen (left side) and using the arrow buttons to add/remove the dimension into the Detail Column for Header (right side).



The journal template can define how the journal entries will be displayed. By j p j p y ychecking the Balance by Entity option, the journal entries will be subtotaled and checked for balances across each Entity (the Balance by Currency works in a similar fashion).



Additional header fields can be added into a journal header by selecting the j y gAdditional Headers option. Adding a new additional header object causes a popup to open that allows for the definition of the new header which can be text or date specific.



Define reopen rules for journals on the Reopen Rule tab. The reopen rule allows p j p pyou to identify specific Account(s) (and Account properties), Flows, and Interco dimension values to determine source journal entries to be reopened (Source). The filtering property on the account Source dimension can be selected from the dropdown list provideddropdown list provided. Once reopened, the journal entries can be reposted to a new (Destination) Account, Flow, and Interco dimension entry. Sign reversal of the value upon reopening is also available.The system validates all entries when attempting to save.


The New Journal Template and FeaturesJournal Landing PageJournal Landing Page

The journal landing page keeps track of:j g p g pHow many journal entries have been made using the templateIf there were any additional journal header items enteredThe availability of reopen logic for the template

You may have only one template defined for a selected model.


The New Journal Template and FeaturesJournal Landing PageJournal Landing Page

Journal entries can be entered via the web interface or via the EPM 10 add-in for Excel. When entering a journal via the web interface, navigate to Consolidation Central >Journals > New.

J l L di PJournals Landing Page


The New Journal Template and FeaturesJournal EntriesJournal Entries

Journal entries can be previewed from the Journal Landing Page. p g g

Preview


The New Journal Template and FeaturesJournal QueriesJournal Queries

Two methods are available to allow viewing a specific set of journals:g p jThe context bar: allows the selection either a base member or a node (all leaves will implicitly be used as a filter in that case)Advanced query: which provides the ability to set a detailed filter on any of the journal fields (such as posted date status and so on)fields (such as posted date, status, and so on)


The New Journal Template and FeaturesAdvanced Query for Journal EntriesAdvanced Query for Journal Entries

Advanced query: files can be +/- from the query definition, values can be included/excluded, and journal properties can be access via the advanced query tool.Advanced Query allows end-users to define criteria making it faster and easier to display specific journalsAll dimensions and journal options can be used as filtersAll dimensions and journal options can be used as filtersFilter on text fields “Beginning with…”, “Containing…”, “In List” as well as on Dates: “From… To…”



Journal statuses can be viewed on the journal landing page, as well as date of j g p gposting, who posted the document, and modified date/time.

Individual Journals can be opened in separate tabs for easy viewing.



Access to the Posting/UnPosting, Open/Re-Open, Lock/Unlock functions are all g g p pcontrolled by the current status of the journal. For example, a Saved journal:

For example, a Locked journal:


The New Journal Template and FeaturesJournal SecurityJournal Security

The ability to view, edit, post/unpost, reopen, lock/unlock are all controlled by y p p p yspecific tasks assignments in BPC security.


The New Journal Template and FeaturesJournal Group ManagementJournal Group Management

Journals created via multiple headers are automatically grouped together under a p y g p gcommon Group ID.

Grouped journals can be ungrouped and separated into independent journals.

Actions taken (such as Posting) on one group member will be taken on all group members


members.

The New Journal Template and FeaturesJournal CreationJournal Creation

Journals can be created in multiple ways:p ySingle journal entryUsing multiple headers to generate a group of individual journal entriesUsing multiple values for various dimension selections in the journal body



Single journal entry has the Multiple Headers and Multiple Value check boxes g j y p punchecked.



Using multiple headers will generate a group of individual journal entries with g p g g p jcommon values but different header selections.

After checking the Multiple Headers checkbox select the dimension that willcheckbox, select the dimension that will contain the multiple selections. A member selection popup box will appear, select one or several dimension members…each

b l ti ill t t b tmember selection will create a separate, but grouped, journal entry upon saving the journal. In the example shown, this journal definition will create three grouped journal


definition will create three grouped journal entries for 2010.JAN, 2010.FEB, and 2010.MAR.


Using multiple values expands the journal entry screen based upon the dimension g p p j y pselected for multiple entry:

The result is an expanded journal entry section allowing separate entries for each of p j y g pthe selected dimension members.


The New Journal Template and FeaturesJournal Creation – Creating Journal EntriesJournal Creation Creating Journal Entries

The journal tab consists of a context menu, option selections, and a three tab j pjournal entry for data input.



The Journal Entry sub-tab allows the user to directly input journal postings, the y y p j p gsystem automatically provides a running summary of the accumulated values entered.



The Additional Properties sub-tab allows the user to enter and additional property p p p yfields defined in the template. See the entry for “Ldate” in the example below.



The Additional Properties date entry option is especially useful in the Banking p y p p y gindustry.

Date selector popup >


The New Journal Template and FeaturesJournal Creation – StatusJournal Creation Status

Journals can have one of the following status assignments:g g• Saved - Journal has been saved but journal entries have not been committed to database• Deleted - Journal has been deleted, the system retains this information to prevent any

subsequent reuse of journal ids• Posted - Journal entries have been committed to database• Unposted - Journal entries previously committed to database have been reversed with

offsetting postings made in the database• Locked Journal entries have been posted and the data is locked from any additional• Locked - Journal entries have been posted and the data is locked from any additional

changes. Journals cannot be unposted or deleted with a Locked status.• Unlocked - A locked journal can be unlocked by an administrator with the Lock/Unlock

security task assignment. Unlocking a journal sets its status to posted.


The New Journal Template and FeaturesJournal BAdIs (Business Add Ins)Journal BAdIs (Business Add Ins)

When journal entries are being Saved or Posted, an ABAP based BAdI can be j gtriggered to create additional calculated records. This journal specific BAdI allows can perform calculations on the journal entries and can create new records which will be stored and displayed within the journal itself.The BAdI is delivered empty but can be customized by clients.A typical BAdI implementation will be able to leverage fields that the journal.lgflogic does not access (additional items, date fields, and so on)


The New Journal Template and FeaturesAdvanced Journal BalancingAdvanced Journal Balancing

Dimensions driving the balancing behavior are defined in the journal administration g g jpage



Journal balancing can be checked not only at journal level, but also for any entity/ g y j y ycurrency member which is used in the journal body (as detail dimensions). Subtotals are calculated automatically and displayed for each Entity/Currency combination used.



Journal entries are checked dynamically, if an out of balance condition occurs the y ysystem will color code the problem area in red highlights.


JournalsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:View and create journal templatesView and create journal entriesUse advanced journal query to locate a journalExplain the automatic balancing features of journalsCreate and manage journal groupsExplain journal statuses















p g g ycountries.


Ownership Manager

Ownership ManagerLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yUnderstand the new Ownership Manager interfaceNavigate the Ownership Manager functions and featuresCreate and maintain Ownership hierarchies


The New Ownership Manager InterfacePrerequisitesPrerequisites

The ownership manager requires an Ownership model to be defined that is of the p g q ptechnical model type ownership.Model definition:

The Ownership model must include the following dimensions:Dimension type “A” – provides information on ownership type such as PGROUP, POWN, PCON and PCTRLPCON, and PCTRLDimension type “C” *Dimension type “E” *Dimension type “T” *

*must be the same dimension as used within the Legal (C lid ti ) li ti


ypDimension type “I” *Dimension type “G”*

(Consolidation) application

The New Ownership Manager InterfaceOwnership Manager Security TasksOwnership Manager Security Tasks

Access to the ownership manager (formally known as the Dynamic Hierarchy Editor p g ( y y yin earlier versions of BPC) is controlled via the following security tasks.



The ownership manager (formally known as the Dynamic Hierarchy Editor in earlier p g ( y y yversions of BPC) is accessed via the web interface and is located on the Start Page within the Consolidation Central node.



Click the Ownership Manager access link to display the ownership definition in the p g p y pright context screen.



The ownership definition screen includes an overview display of the ownership p p y phierarchy, the current selected consolidation method, the current selected consolidation rate (formally PCON), and the current selected Financial Interest Rate (formally POWN) rates to be employed for the selected node.



Although the Ownership Manager uses terms such as Consolidation Rate and g p gFinancial Interest Rate, the data is stored with the same data modeling as in previous versions. For example, Consolidation Rates are stored as PCON values and Financial Interest Rates are stored as POWN values in the database.



Access existing/create new versions of ownership hierarchy by changing the g p y y g gcontext selections for the Category, Time, and Group dimensions.

The system remembers the last dimension value. You can use the restore ydimension feature to return to previously selected value.



Change data views and adjust number of decimal places to be displayed.g j p p y



View member IDs or ID and Descriptions by selecting the checkbox provided.p y g p

or



Edit and define the hierarchy by selecting Edit.y y g

Clicking the Edit button opens a new tab that allows you to create/edit an ownership hierarchy.



Editing opens a new tab titled Edit Ownership (selected context for Category, Time, g p p ( g yand Group).



Access existing, or create new, versions of ownership hierarchies by changing the g p y g gcontext selections for the Category, Time, and Group dimensions.



Add/Remove individual Entity values from the Group hierarchy.y p y



Use the Pin/Unpin features to drag and drop selections.p g p



The context menu provides same functions as in tool bar.p



Use up/down arrows to reposition a selection within a hierarchy.p p y



Turn on/off viewing of member descriptions.g p



Click top group node to view summary of all entities entered.p g p y



Click individual entity nodes to view settings for that entity.y g y



Double-click current cells to modify settings.y g



Check the Update Ownership Upwards box. This feature allows the system to p p p ycalculate the consolidation rates and the financial interest rate for parent nodes in the ownership hierarchy.



The Show Empty checkbox forces the system to display entities with zero p y y p yconsolidation rates and financial interests.



Ownership hierarchies can be saved.p

Ownership hierarchies can be copied into a different context.



Save all changes before closing editing tab. If you forget to save, a popup box will g g g y g p p pappear to remind you.


Ownership ManagerLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Understand the new Ownership Manager interfaceNavigate the Ownership Manager functions and featuresCreate and maintain Ownership hierarchies















p g g ycountries.


BPC 7.5 Migration

BPC 7.5 MigrationLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain how to migrate BPC 7.5 reports built with former EV functionsExplain how to migrate BPC 7.5 EVDRE reports


Topicsp

1. Cell-based formulas

2. API, custom menus, evMNU and book templates

3. EVDRE reports

Cell-based Formulas

In EPM Add-in, you can access the list of all supported cell-based formulas via the “Insert function” button, and choose the new “EPMFunctions”

tcategory:


Cell Based-formulas

BPC 7.5 reports may only be built with EV functions. Here’s the list of all former BPC 7.5 functions that have been developed again in BPC 10, and are

l b k d tiblalso backward compatible:

evAPD EPMModelCubeDescevAPP EPMModelCubeID

evGTS EPMScaleDataevHNV EPMURL

evASD EPMEnvDatabaseDescevAST EPMEnvDatabaseIDevBET EPMComparisonevBNV EPMBook

evLCK EPMWorkStatusevMBR EPMSelectMemberevMNU EPMExecuteAPIevPRO EPMMemberPropertyevBNV EPMBook

evCGP EPMCommentPartialContextevCGT EPMCommentFullContextevCOM EPMSaveComment

evPRO EPMMemberPropertyevPRP EPMDimensionPropertyevRNG EPMCellRangesevRTI EPMRefreshTime

evCVW EPMContextMemberevDES EPMMemberDescevDIM EPMDimensionType

e e es eevSND EPMSaveDataevSVR EPMServerevTIM EPMMemberOffset


evDNV EPMDocumentListevGET EPMRetrieveData

evUSR EPMUserOsCLD EPMDocument

Cell Based-formulas

Due to the new EPM add-in client and the way expansions are now handled, there are several BPC 7.5 functions that are no longer supported:

EVEXP

EVENE

EVNXP

EVSETEVSET

EVLST

EVPXR

EVHOT (becomes “Quick links” functionality in the EPM add-in)


API, Custom Menus, evMNU and Books Templates

API: EPM add-in contains a new public API with new functions. For this reason, BPC 7.5

ill k d ill b i d i ll S lmacro names will not work anymore and will not be migrated automatically. Some manual adjustments will be required.

Custom menus: Custom menus functionality is no longer provided in BPC 10. Customers should move to BPF functionality or use the new Workspace concept from the Web interface.

MNUevMNU: evMNU function is still supported, but will need to be updated manually with the new macro name from the new public API.

Books and distributionBook and distribution templates (definition) are automatically migrated and can be edited directly through Excel or through the new dedicated UI. Published books will need to be

t d i


generated again.

EVDRE Reports Migration

The EVDRE migration tool exists for helping customers to migrate their BPC 7.5 EVDRE t i EPM dd i t Y th t l i th M b ttreports in EPM add-in reports. You can access the tool via the More button.

Several migration options are available: Active Worksheet, Active Workbook, Planning an consolidation Server, and Local. Click OK.



Once the migration has been finalized, a pop-up window is displayed:

The generated report layout should reflect the same expansions in row and column axes, compared to the Memberset used in EVDRE expansion range.

Additi ll f tti h t h b t ti ll t d d fill d i ith thAdditionally, a new formatting sheet has been automatically created, and filled-in with the formats defined in your initial EVDRE Format range.

Finally, click the Refresh button to view the result.


y,

EVDRE Reports Migration: Things to Know

Currently, both formatting and report layouts are migrated, as well as most of the EVDRE tioptions.

Sorting, ranking, suppressing, and inserting options are not yet migrated.

In case of customized reports, some manual adjustments will be required.

As for every migration process, the EVDRE migration tool doesn’t prevent the customer to check, modify, and validate the report after the migration.

A migration log will be generated after each migration process.You can find it through the More button and click LogYou can find it through the More button, and click Log.

The EVDRE migration tool is documented in detail in theEPM add-in User Guide.


BPC 7.5 MigrationLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain how to migrate BPC 7.5 reports built with former EV functionsExplain how to migrate BPC 7.5 EVDRE reports















p g g ycountries.


Data Collection Using Excel Workbooks

Data Collection Using Excel WorkbooksLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yUpload a documentExplain Email CollectionExplain “variable time” in the book template (Email Distribution)Work with Cell-based formulas related to Documents views


Upload a Document

To upload a document you have the choice of two processes:A document can be uploaded to the Web Portal by Publishing a document via a portal distributionA document can be distributed via the Distribution Wizard on a specific folder (locally or on a network path). In that case, you should:p ) y– Create a template for your distribution– Use the Distribution Wizard to either send out the workbook immediately or schedule its

distribution either thru email or posting it to a distribution folder.


Upload a Document on the Portal

Select the Open Planning and Consolidation Document View link– The Documents section on the web

portal appears– Browse the workbook to be uploaded in the

Add document window– Select the type and subtype

where applicable– Click OK


Upload a Document via Distribution Wizard

Before launching a distribution, you must have defined a distribution templateThen you can launch the Distribution Wizard from the Distribute link and select the appropriate distribution method



Select Switch to Offline Mode and save to folderEnter the path to the folder location (local or network path)Clicking the Next button creates theClicking the Next button creates thespecific files on the specific folder


Email Collection

Before collecting data from an email mailbox, you should have performed a distribution on the same connectionThen, launch the Collection Wizard:,– Select the Outlook mailbox option– Select the Working Folder– Select emails with Workbooks


Variable Time in the Book Template

When creating or modifying a template using a Planning and Consolidation g y g p g gconnection a variable time field is displayed.

If you select a Time member in a section, it overrides the member selected in the Variable Time field for this sectionVariable Time field for this section.


EPM Functions to Use for Documents

Once you have uploaded documents to the Web Portal you can call and work with y p ythese documents from a work book with any of the following EPM functions:

EPMBookEPMDocumentEPMD tLi tEPMDocumentListEPMUrl


Adding an EPM Function to a Workbook

You add the function from the EPM ribbon > Insert Function wizard

Select the function and click OKSelect the function and click OK


EPMBook Function

After adding the function to the workbook, specify the required parameters


EPMDocument Function



EPMDocumentList Function



EPMUrl Function



Data Collection Using Excel WorkbooksLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Upload a documentExplain Email CollectionExplain “variable time” in the book template (Email Distribution)Work with Cell-based formulas related to Documents views















p g g ycountries.


Saving Data and Comments to BPC

Saving Data and Comments to BPCLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yInput data Refresh/send dataInput BPC data with EV functionsUse the 3 planning functions (spread, trend, weight)Input and retrieve commentsInput and retrieve comments with EV functions


Save Data and Comments to BPC1. Input data

Enable data input2. Input comments

Enable comments input (BPC NW)Data input and specific formattingData input with functions

Input and retrieve commentsComments input with functions

Enable Data Input

Data input from the EPM add-in is only allowed on a BPC source system, and through a Webservice connection, called “Planning and Consolidation”. g , g

By default, when opening the EPM add-in interface directly from the Web portal, every connection to BPC is using Webservice, in order to allow data input.p


Enable Data Input (Cont.)

By default, every new report is not flagged as being an input form. To enable data input, you should check the box called “Use as Input Form” in the report p , y p poptions or in the sheet options.

Report options accessible from: Sheet options accessible from:Edit Report buttonEdit Report buttonNew Report button


Data Input

Data input is performed by directly entering data in the cells of an input form, as long as each member defining the data region is a base level member.g g g

Once data input has been activated, the “Save Data” button is enabled in the “Data Input” ribbon.

You then have the same kind of pop-up options to save data to the database as in BPC 7.5, but displayed differently:

S W k h t D tSave Worksheet DataSave Workbook DataSave and Refresh Worksheet DataSave and Refresh Workbook DataSave and Refresh Workbook DataChange Work StatusValidate Data (only on MS platform)


Data Input – Specific Formatting

Using the dynamic formatting sheet (available by enabling Apply Dynamic g y g ( y g pp y yFormatting in the Sheet option), specific Member/Property Formatting can be defined to support data input.

For example, you can highlight calculated/inputable members (based on theFor example, you can highlight calculated/inputable members (based on the CALC property) or emphasize an updated cell.


Data Input With Planning Features

Once data input has been activated, the “Planning” button is enabled in the p g“Data Input” ribbon.

The following Planning features can be used to help entering data in an input form:form:

The Spread feature allows to allocate a specified value among selected destination cells– The value may be allocated either equally or weighted by anThe value may be allocated either equally or weighted by an

optional range of weighting factorsThe Trend feature allows to increase/decrease a source value by a factor among selected destination cellscellsThe Weight feature allows to allocate a specified value by weighting factors among selected destination cells


Data Input

Once your input form has been built, you can submit the records to the database by clicking the “Save Data” button:y g

A pop-up is displayed with the number of records to submit.records to submit.

Then, the confirmation screen appears,providing you the status of the sending

If th bl tprocess. If there are problems, an accurate error message will be displayed.

You can choose to deactivate the confirmationscreen. This action will uncheck the option called “Display warning when saving data or comment” in the User options. You can of course re-enable it afterwards.


Data Input With Functions

Besides inputting data directly in the report layout itself, you can also use the following cell-based formula to send records from a static report. g p

This new formula is the new name for BPC 7.5 EVSND function:

EPMSaveData(cell;connection name;member1;member2; ; memberN)EPMSaveData(cell;connection name;member1;member2;....; memberN)

You can find this formula under the new categorycalled EPMFunctions when clickingthe Insert Function button.

BPC 7.5 EVSND function is still recognizedand supported Nevertheless the Excel wizard isand supported. Nevertheless, the Excel wizard isdisplayed when building them is only availablefor the new EPM function names.


Enable Comments Input in BPC 10 NW

By default, all BPC 10 NW models do not allow comments. Even if you have a dedicated task profile allowing comment management, you have to enable p g g , ycomments for the model through the BPC 10 NW web administration page:

Click Models under Dimensions and Models node, and edit the model where comments i t h ld b bl d Ch k th E bl C t h kb dinput should be enabled. Check the Enable Comments checkbox and save.


Input and Retrieve Comments

There are two ways of inputting and retrieving comments:

Through the EPM Add-in UIThrough EPM functions

The Comment Management UI can be accessed from the Data Input ribbon. You can then choose to write your comments for the active context or for another custom context.

Using Active Context will write thecomment on all ID’s of all dimensions


belonging to the context.

Input and Retrieve Comments (Cont.)

Using the “Custom Context” will allow one to choose where the comments should be saved, independently of the current context., p y

In this process, there is a choice to eitherinclude all dimensions (by choosing a particularinclude all dimensions (by choosing a particular ID for each), or to bypass one or several dimensions by selecting the ALL value.

N t thi ti ill l ll th f thNote: this action will also allow the use of the newEPMCommentPartialContext cell-basedformula, which works exactly the same as theprevious EVCGP function.



Sending the comment to the back-end will also display the summary window:

Remember this summary screen could be deactivated from the User options


Remember, this summary screen could be deactivated from the User options Others tab Display Warning when Saving Data or Comments


Select the “Find comments” link to retrieve comments associated to the current context or another custom one:

Clicking the “Find” buttonwill open a BPC web client page showing the results.


Cell-Based Formulas Used for Comments

In terms of inputting and retrieving comments, the following cell-based formulas can be used:

EPMSaveComment– Equals the BPC 7 5 EVCOM function which is still supportedEquals the BPC 7.5 EVCOM function, which is still supported.– This function enables you to enter or modify a comment for a full set of members.

EPMCommentFullContextE l h BPC EVCGT f i hi h i ill d– Equals the BPC 7.5 EVCGT function, which is still supported.

– This function retrieves all comments associated to a set of dimension members that is fully defined.

EPMCommentPartialContext– Equals the BPC 7.5 EVCGP function, which is still supported.– This function retrieves all comments associated to a set of

dimension members that is partially defined. Any members not specified in the function are ALL taken into account.


Cell-Based Formulas Used for Comments (Cont.)

Using cell-based formulas to input or retrieve comments, there is an option to display BPC comments as Excel cell comments:p y

Currently, this option is onlyavailable for EPM functionslinked to comments, but notfor comments entered fromthe UI.


Saving Data and Comments to BPCLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Input data Refresh/send dataInput BPC data with EV functionsUse the 3 planning functions (spread, trend, weight)Input and retrieve commentsInput and retrieve comments with EV functions















p g g ycountries.


Operation & Data Submission

Operation & Data SubmissionLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDisplay Business Process Flows informationDisplay lock and Work Status informationDescribe the EPMWorkStatus cell-based formulaDescribe validation of the submitted data (only for BPC MS)


Topicsp

1. Business Process Flow information in EPM Add-in

2. Work StatusDisplay/Change Work Status informationDisplay Work Status information with EPM functionp y

3. Data Validation (Only on the MS platform)

Display Business Process Flow Information

When fulfilling a Business Process Flow Activity taking place in EPM Add-in, a new tab called Activity appears p , y ppin the Task Pane.

The Activity tab is split in three different parts:The upper part provides contextual information related to theThe upper part provides contextual information related to the specific Business Process FlowThe middle part provides the action name and description as well as the related/linked Actions to the Target ActionThe bottom part allows you to browse back to the Activity Workspace on the Web client


Display/Change Work Status Information

To display or change the Work Status information of a data region, you should use the Change Work g , y gStatus item of the Save Data button.

This will trigger the below Work Status Wizard to pop up.pop up.

Data region is displayed in the upper part of the wizard.Descendants can be included in the Works Status changeThe lower part displays the current WorkThe lower part displays the current Work Status of the selected data region and allows it to be changed to another Work Status according to security


Display Work Status Information With EPM Function

Besides displaying the Work Status with the Work Status Change wizard, you can also use the following cell-based formula to display Work Status g p yinformation in a report.

The following function is the equivalent of the BPC 7.5 EVLCK function:

EPMWorkStatus(connection name;parameter;member1;…;memberN)The above parameter allows you to display either the Status, the username of the user that changed it or the date when the last change occurredchanged it or the date when the last change occurred.You can find this function under the new category called EPMFunctions when clickingthe Insert Function button.BPC 7.5 EVLCK function can still be used and is still supported.


Data Validation (Only on the MS Platform)

After having entered and saved data, you can trigger d t lid ti f th S D t b ttdata validation from the Save Data button.

Data validation will check that no lock is preventing you to change the Work Status information. It will also

If this is the case, a confirmation message is displayed.

check that the Validation account set in the Administration equals zero.

If not, you can choose to open a pre-defined Validation Report (addressed by the LOCKREPORT parameter in the Administration) that will display the incorrect data.After fixing this incorrect data, you can trigger Data Validation again.


Operation & Data SubmissionLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Display Business Process Flows informationDisplay lock and Work Status informationDescribe the EPMWorkStatus cell-based formulaDescribe validation of the submitted data (only for BPC MS)















p g g ycountries.


Journals

JournalsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yView and create Journal TemplatesView and create Journal entriesUse advanced journal query to locate a journalUnderstand the automatic balancing features of journalsCreate and manage journal groups


Creating the Journal Template

The journal template is accessed via the BPC Administration client interface and is j plocated under the specified application.

You may have only one template defined for a selected model


You may have only one template defined for a selected model.


1. Select all journal header dimensions using the selection checkboxes.



2. Set header dimension order by changing the numbered sequence.

12345

6



3. Set remaining dimensions order using left/right shift buttons.



4. Create any additional header items/sub-items.



5. Review all selections and compete by clicking Finish.



An existing journal template can be deleted in this Administration section, but only g j p yafter all journals entries using that template have been deleted as well.


Journal Parameters

Journal parameters are configured in BPC Administration under the specific model.p g p


Journal Validation Rules

Journal validation rules are configured in BPC Administration under the specific g pmodel.

Journal Validation rules provide the ability to configure valid journal entries prior toJournal Validation rules provide the ability to configure valid journal entries prior to comitting the jounal record(s) to the database.Validation prevents incorrect records from being saved to the cube.When saving the journal input, validation logic for journals is supported as following:


Validating all dimension members Checking the data intersection against any relevant validation rules

Journal Translation Rules

Journal translation rules are configured in BPC Administration under the specific g pmodel.

Before you can reopen journal transactions, you must define translation information for the dimensions used in the reopen tasks. The translation table defines the Source and Destination accounts You typically do this for specific accounts but you


Source and Destination accounts. You typically do this for specific accounts, but you can create translations for other detail dimensions as well.

Journal Entries

Journals entries can previewed from the Journal Landing Page. Click any journal p g g y jentry and its preview is displayed at the bottom.

Preview


Journal Queries

Two methods available to allow viewing a specific set of journals:g p jThe context bar: allows the selection either a base member or a node (all leaves will implicitly be used as a filter in that case)Advanced query: which provides to ability to set a detailed filters on any of the journal fields (such as posted date status and so on)fields (such as posted date, status, and so on)


Advanced Query for Journal Entries

Advanced query: files can be +/- from the query definition, values can be included/excluded, and journal properties can be access via the advanced query toolAdvanced Query allows end-users to define criteria making it faster and easier to display specific journalsAll dimensions and journal options can be used as filtersAll dimensions and journal options can be used as filtersFilter on text fields Beginning with…, Containing…, In List as well as on Dates : From… To…


Journal Entries

Journal statuses can be viewed on the journal landing page, as well as date of j g p gposting, who posted the document, and modified date/time.

Individual Journals can be opened in separate tabs for easy viewing.


Journal Entries

Access to the Posting/UnPosting, Open/Re-Open, Lock/Unlock functions are all g g p pcontrolled by the current status of the journal. For example, a Saved journal:

For example, a Locked journal:


Journal Security

The ability to view, edit, post/unpost, reopen, lock/unlock is all controlled by specific y p p p y ptasks assignments in BPC security.


Journal Group Management

Journals created via multiple headers are automatically grouped together under a p y g p gcommon group id.

Grouped journals can be ungrouped and separated into independent journals.

Actions taken (such as Posting) on one group member will be taken on all group members


members.

Journal Creation

Journals can be created in multiple ways:p ySingle journal entryUsing multiple headers to generate a group of individual journal entriesUsing multiple values for various dimension selections in the journal body


Journal Creation

Single journal entry has the Multiple Headers and Multiple Value check boxes g j y p punchecked.


Journal Creation

Using multiple headers will generate a group of individual journal entries with g p g g p jcommon values but different header selections.

After checking the Multiple Headers checkbox, select the dimension that will ,contain the multiple selections. A member selection popup box will appear, select one or several dimension members…each member selection will create a separate butmember selection will create a separate, but grouped, journal entry upon saving the journal. In the example shown, this journal definition will create three grouped journal


entries for 2010.JAN, 2010.FEB, and 2010.MAR.

Journal Creation

Using multiple values expands the journal entry screen based upon the dimension g p p j y pselected for multiple entry.

The result is an expanded journal entry section allowing separate entries for each of p j y g pthe selected dimension members.

Using multiple values will generate a group of individual journal entries with potentially different values but the same header selection.


Journal Creation – Creating Journal Entries

The journal tab consists of a context menu, option selections, and a three tab j pjournal entry for data input.



The Journal Entry sub-tab allows the user to directly input journal postings, the y y p j p gsystem automatically provides a running summary of the accumulated values entered.



The Additional Properties sub-tab allows the user to enter and additional property p p p yfields defined in the template. (See the entry for Comment in the example below.)


Journal Creation – Status

Journals can have one of the following status assignments:g g• Saved – journal has been saved but journal entries have not been committed to database• Deleted – journal has been deleted, the system retains this information to prevent any

subsequent reuse of journal ids.• Posted – journal entries have been committed to database• Unposted – journal entries previously committed to database have been reversed with

offsetting postings made in the database• Locked journal entries have been posted and the data is locked from any additional• Locked – journal entries have been posted and the data is locked from any additional

changes. Journals cannot be unposted or deleted with a Locked status.• Unlocked – A locked journal can be unlocked by an administrator with the Lock/Unlock

security task assignment. Unlocking a journal sets its status to posted.


Advanced Journal Balancing

Dimensions driving the balancing behavior are defined in the journal g g jadministration page.



Journal balancing can be checked not only at journal level, but also for any entity/ g y j y ycurrency member which is used in the journal body (as detail dimensions). Subtotals are calculated automatically and displayed for each Entity/Currency combination used.



Journal entries are checked dynamically, if an out of balance condition occurs the y ysystem will color code the problem area in red highlights.


JournalsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:View and create Journal TemplatesView and create Journal entriesUse advanced journal query to locate a journalUnderstand the automatic balancing features of journalsCreate and manage journal groups















p g g ycountries.


Using Planning & Consolidation Features in the EPM add-in

Using Planning & Consolidation Features in the EPM Add-inLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain how to use Planning & Consolidation features in the EPM add-in


Using Planning & Consolidation Features in the EPM Add-in

EPM connection typesBuilding a report

JournalsOwnership hierarchies

BPC new templatesData save and commentsWork status and BPFD ill th h

EPM connectorBOE publishingTransition from BPC 7.5 to EPM add-inQ i kli kDrill-throughs

Publishing to BPC webQuicklinksCollection, distribution, and offline mode

EPM Connection Types

EPM applications can be reached via several connection types:

SAP EPM add‐in 10.0SSAS – SQL Server Analysis ServicesBW – SAP Business WarehouseODBO – OLD DB for OLAPXMLA – XML for AnalysisWS – Web Services

SAP Financial SAP ProfitabilitySAP S SAP BusinessObjects Planning SAP BusinessObjects Planning

SSAS, BW cubes

ODBO ODBO ODBO

WS WSODBO

Consolidation 10.0Designer cubes

SAP Profitability and Cost

Management 10.0

SAP Strategy Management 10.0

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, Version

for NetWeaver 10.0

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, Version

for Microsoft 10.0

+ Support of non EPM SSAS and BW cubes (through ODBO technology)

SAP BOPC 10 for both Microsoft and NetWeaver versions could be queried from the EPM add-in using two different kinds of connections:

Webservices


ODBO provider (a particular ODBO provider for each NW and MS version).


There are 3 types of connections in EPM add-in:

Local/ BOE:

– These types are for ODBO connections, which can be built forFC SSAS cubes FC BW cubes SSAS standard cubes BWFC SSAS cubes, FC BW cubes, SSAS standard cubes, BW standard cubes, PCM ODBO provider, SSM ODBO provider, BPC MS ODBO provider and BPC NW ODBO provider.

– An ODBO connection doesn’t allow the input of data and is only used for data retrieval Data ManagerAn ODBO connection doesn t allow the input of data, and is only used for data retrieval. Data Manager features are also not reachable with an ODBO connection. However, the usage of custom members (to build some complex MDX calculated members) can only be performed with an ODBO connection.

Planning & Consolidation:Planning & Consolidation:

– This type is for Webservice connections, on the top of BPC MS and BPC NW.


– A webservice connection allows the input of data, and the use of the Data Manager ribbon, but doesn’t support the creation of custom members.

Building a Report

When speaking about report creation, the EPM add-in is very intuitive and powerful, even for non-experienced users.powerful, even for non experienced users.

As a first step, a detailed lesson on the following topics are available in the EPM p, g pAdd-in Learning map:

Unit 2: Excel interface Part 2Unit 2: Excel interface – Part 2Unit 2: Building Reports – Part 2


BPC new Templates

Fifteen new Excel workbook templates, created with the EPM add-in, have been provided in the new Shell environment: 10 of them are in the Reports/been provided in the new Shell environment: 10 of them are in the Reports/ templates folder and 5 of them are in the Input Schedules/templates folder, accessible from the Open button:


Data Save and Comments

Planning and consolidation connection type offers the ability to send data and comments to the back-end.and comments to the back end.

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found in:p

Unit 9: Saving Data and Comments to BPC (MS)Unit 8: Saving Data and Comments to BPC (NW)


Work Status & BPF

Planning and consolidation connection type offers the ability to change work status and retrieve them, as well as display BPF steps, which need to bestatus and retrieve them, as well as display BPF steps, which need to be performed.

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found in:

Unit 9: Operation & Data Submission (MS)Unit 8: Operation & Data Submission (NW)


Drill-throughs

The Drill-through feature remains unchanged compared to BPC 7.5 version. The biggest change is about how to access this feature in the new EPM add-The biggest change is about how to access this feature in the new EPM addin.

There are still two kinds of drill-throughs available for BPC MS (“drill-through to table” and “d ill th h t l”) Th i l “d ill th h t l” il bl f BPC NW“drill-through to url”). There is only “drill-through to url” available for BPC NW.

Both types of drill-through are still defined in the administration console of BPC. From the EPM add-in, you can only run the pre-defined drill-throughs., y y p g

When running those drill-throughs, the pre-defined parameters will be sent to the target, as well as the EPM context and the selected report cell context. Then data will be retrieved in the targetThen, data will be retrieved in the target.

For Drill-through to table (available for BPC MS only), the user can decide to open the table either in a new Excel sheet or


in a web browser.

Publishing to BPC web

You may have the ability to directly open the BPC Web part to access or post documents, depending on your assigned task profile.documents, depending on your assigned task profile.


Unit 9: Data Collection using Excel Workbooks (MS)Unit 8: Data Collection using Excel Workbooks (NW)


Journals

The journal module can be accessed from the Journal button in the EPM add-in interface. Basically, it will open the Journals section on the web portal:in interface. Basically, it will open the Journals section on the web portal:


Ownership Hierarchies

The ownership hierarchy is available in a consolidation model. To use the ownership hierarchy, you simply need stacking together both “Groups” andownership hierarchy, you simply need stacking together both Groups and “Entity” dimensions in row or column axis of a report, in any order, to apply the ownership hierarchy to these dimensions.

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found in the EPM Add-in Learning Map:

Unit 3: Consolidation


EPM Connector

With the EPM Connector, you can easily create and embed some dashboards connected to a BPC data source.connected to a BPC data source.


Unit 9: Creating Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector (MS)Unit 8: Creating Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector (NW)


BOE Publishing

The EPM add-in for Microsoft Office provides the ability to publish a workbook of reports to the BI launch pad, the web portal of SAPworkbook of reports to the BI launch pad, the web portal of SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise (BOE).

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found in the EPM add-in Learning Map:

Unit 3: Sharing reports - Part 2Unit 3: Sharing reports Part 2


Transition From BPC 7.5 to EPM Add-in

The EPM add-in has been built with a complete new API and new cell based-formulas. Therefore, several points should be taken into account in order toformulas. Therefore, several points should be taken into account in order to make previous BPC 7.5 reports and macros run into the new EPM add-in interface.

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found in:

U it 9 BPC 7 5 Mi ti (MS)Unit 9: BPC 7.5 Migration (MS)Unit 8: BPC 7.5 Migration (NW)


Quicklinks

Former BPC 7.5 EVHOT function is no longer supported. However, the EPM add-in offers the possibility to link some reports together with the newadd in offers the possibility to link some reports together with the new “Quicklinks” feature.

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found in the EPM Add-in Learning Map:

Unit 2: Analyzing data – Part 2


Collection, Distribution, and Offline Mode

The EPM add-in offers an enhanced user interface for creating books or distribution workbooks. At the end, this interface creates exactly the samedistribution workbooks. At the end, this interface creates exactly the same book or distribution template as in BPC 7.5.

A detailed lesson on data collection is available in:

Unit 9: Data collection using Excel Workbooks (MS)Unit 8: Data collection using Excel Workbooks (NW)

There is also a detailed topic on the “Offline” mode in the EPM add-in Learning map, which is equivalent to the Park&Go feature in BPC 7.5:

Unit 3: Sharing Reports – Part 1


Using Planning & Consolidation Features in the EPM Add-inLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain how to use Planning & Consolidation features in the EPM add-in















p g g ycountries.


Creating Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector

Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM ConnectorLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe how to create Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector


Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM ConnectorIntroductionIntroduction

How to use the Crystal Dashboards with SAP BusinessObjects Planning and y j gConsolidation, SAP NetWeaver version

Design a dashboard and export it to Flash format in SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard DesignInsert a Flash object into a reportInsert a Flash object into a reportPublish a Flash Object to the WebDisplay the content of .txt file in the SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Design


Business Example

Your organization wants to embed EPM data in a Corporate Intranet g pSite or within an Annual report to Shareholders. You want advanced and rich visualization coupled with the reliability of being tied directly to the EPM data at source. You must therefore link Xcelsius models to your EPM dataEPM data.


Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM ConnectorBenefitsBenefits

Benefits of using Crystal Dashboards reports with SPBO BPC:g y pOne screen information - Benefits of having all the critical information in just one screen rather than flipping through multiple pagesInformation at a Glance - Present a wide number of different metrics in a single consolidated viewconsolidated viewReal Time Information TrackingHere are few types of dashboards, their purpose, and benefits: – Benefits of Finance dashboard: Monitor Revenue, Profit, Loss, and Expenses – Benefits of HR dashboard: Monitor Employee activity, Headcount growth, Expenses and so on– Benefits of IT dashboard : Monitor system activity, this may include database monitoring, server

monitoring, memory metrics and so on– Benefits of Inventory Dashboard : Monitor Inventory levels, warehouse and item information, orders y y

and so on


Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM ConnectorPrerequisitesPrerequisites

Before using Xcelsius models with EPM data, ensure that the following g gprerequisites have been met.

To build Xcelsius models based on EPM data:Xcelsius 2010 (Dashboard Designer) is installedThe EPM 10.0 Connector Add-on has been added to your Xcelsius installAn EPM add-in report has been embedded into an MS Excel file

To run Xcelsius based flash files on EPM data:Adobe Flash Player installed on client PCsCross Domain files established on the server side


Download XcelsiusXcelsius® 2008 SP3 or Xcelsius® 2010Xcelsius® 2008 SP3 or Xcelsius® 2010

Available on Service Marketplace


EPM Connector

EPM connector Used to create and configure a connection to more EPM sources, including SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, SAP NetWeaver versionIs a component of the EPM add-inIs a component of the EPM add-inIt is installed as an add-in to SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Design– To install the add-on in Xcelsius®,

choose File > Manage Add-Ons


Process OverviewSteps to PerformSteps to Perform

To link an Xcelsius model to EPM data, the following summary steps g y pmust be performed:1. Open Xcelsius and open or create your Excel file with an embedded EPM add-in

report2. Generate a Report Definition within the Excel sheet3. Establish a Data Connection using the EPM Connector4. Build an Xcelsius visualization5. Generate a SWF file6. Optionally, embed the SWF file into Excel with or without an embedded EPM

add-in report7. Optionally, embed the SWF file into Word or PowerPoint8. Optionally, run the SWF in standalone mode


Process OverviewOpen Xcelsius and Open Your Excel FileOpen Xcelsius and Open Your Excel File

Start XcelsiusEither– Select Data>Import– Select your Excel file with data already embedded by the EPM add-in– Click OK– Click OKOr– Use the EPM Tab inside the excel file that Xcelsius provides on starting Xcelsius and embed the EPM

report directly


Process OverviewGenerate a Report Definition Within the Excel SheetGenerate a Report Definition Within the Excel Sheet

For Dynamic EPM data in the Xcelsius model, choose any free cell in the excel sheet where the Report data exists and enter =GetReportDefinition().If required, click Refresh to Log On and q , gConnect. This will update the Report Definition cell with report details.GetReportDefinition function is supported only in top of ODBO typesupported only in top of ODBO type connection*


Process OverviewUse EPM Connector to Define a Data Connection in XcelsiusUse EPM Connector to Define a Data Connection in Xcelsius

In the Xcelsius Menu bar, setup a new EPM Connector data connection via Data>Connections… and then Add>EPM Connector_10Enter a name for this Xcelsius connectionSelect Application (For example, Planning and Consolidation, SAP for NetWeaver version)NetWeaver version)Select Operation (EPM Report)Select Report Definition (This is the cell in the Excel file now populated with the EPM report Definition)


Process OverviewBuild an Xcelsius VisualizationBuild an Xcelsius Visualization

Select an Xcelsius control such as a table or chartMap the source data for the control to the result set data from the EPM Connector Data ConnectionAdd a Connection Refresh button to the visualization as required


Process OverviewGenerate a SWF FileGenerate a SWF File

In Xcelsius Design mode, select File>Export>Flash (SWF)…Name the Flash file, select a location for Export and click OK


Process OverviewEmbedded a SWF File Into ExcelEmbedded a SWF File Into Excel

Open an Excel file with an EPM add-in report already embeddedIn the EPM ribbon, select More>Flash ObjectsClick Add, to add a new Flash Object into your Excel sheetAny changes to the Report will also automatically update the Flash Object*Aft d ti th EPM C t t P l th P H d f th R t th SWFAfter updating the EPM Context Panel or the Page Header of the Report, the SWF will update


Process OverviewEmbedded a SWF File Into Word or PowerpointEmbedded a SWF File Into Word or Powerpoint

Open a Word Document or a PowerPoint presentation with an EPM add-in report already embeddedIn the EPM ribbon, select Flash ObjectsClick Add, to add a new Flash Object into your Document or PresentationAny changes to the Report will also automatically update the Flash Object*Any changes to the Report will also automatically update the Flash ObjectAfter updating the EPM Context Panel or the Page Header of the Report, the SWF will update


EPM ConnectorOperationsOperations

You can perform the following operations and combine them. p g pRetrieve data, using a report created with the EPM add-inRetrieve the list of databases/environments/InfoAreas for a specific data sourceRetrieve the list of cubes/models/InfoProviders for a specific d t b / i t/I f Adatabase/environment/InfoAreaRetrieve the list of dimensions for a specific cube/model/InfoProviderRetrieve members/characteristic values for a specific dimension

The following operation types are only available for SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation:

Input and save dataRetrieve the list of context membersRetrieve text contained in a text file from the Documents viewRetrieve property values for dimension members


EPM ConnectorFeatures Common to the OperationFeatures Common to the Operation

Common features:When a drop-down list contains a long list of items, you can enter the beginning of the item you want to select, then press Enter. The list is filtered and displays only the items beginning with the characters you have just entered. All the drop-down lists identified by a hand icon enables you to select or automaticallyAll the drop-down lists identified by a hand icon enables you to select or automatically retrieve items: – Bind - Enables you to select a cell in the sheet– Retrieve - Automatically retrieves a list of items available for selection, depending on

other filled in areasother filled in areasIn the Output section, you select two refresh options: – Refresh on Load to automatically refresh the data before refreshing all the

Dashboard Design componentsf f– to set an automatic refresh frequency.


Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM ConnectorLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe how to create Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector















p g g ycountries.


Crystal Dashboard Functions

Crystal Dashboard FunctionsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain Crystal Dashboard functions with BPC dataDisplay the content of a .txt file stored in content libraryInput data in BPC from dashboards


Topicsp

1. Data Input in BPC from X l iXcelsius

2. Display the Content of a .txt File in the Xcelsius Dashboard

Crystal Dashboard FunctionsBenefitsBenefits

Benefits of this feature include:Extended Analyzer is obsoleteReport Definition with the EPM Add in More Operations are available with the EPM Connector


Data Input in BPC From XcelsiusReport DefinitionReport Definition

Log On to the Source System

Create your Report



Insert the Function: =GetReportDefinition()


Data Input in BPC From XcelsiusEPM ConnectorEPM Connector

Customize an EPM Connection


Topicsp

1. Data Input in BPC From X l i D hb dXcelsius Dashboards


.txt Parameter

Upload Document


EPM Connection with operation T R t i T t f LibType Retrieve Text from Library



Crystal Dashboard FunctionsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain Crystal Dashboard functions with BPC data:Display the content of a .txt file stored in content libraryInput data in BPC from dashboards















p g g ycountries.


BPC 7.5 Migration

BPC 7.5 MigrationLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain how to migrate BPC 7.5 reports built with former EV functionsExplain how to migrate BPC 7.5 EVDRE reports


Topicsp

1. Cell-based formulas

2. API, custom menus, evMNU and book templates

3. EVDRE reports

Cell Based Formulas

In EPM Add-in, you can access the list of all supported cell-based formulas via the “Insert function” button, and choose the new “EPMFunctions”

tcategory:


Cell Based Formulas

BPC 7.5 reports may only be built with EV functions. Here’s the list of all former BPC 7.5 functions that have been developed again in BPC 10, and are

l b k d tiblalso backward compatible:

evAPD EPMModelCubeDescevAPP EPMModelCubeID

evGTS EPMScaleDataevHNV EPMURL

evASD EPMEnvDatabaseDescevAST EPMEnvDatabaseIDevBET EPMComparisonevBNV EPMBook

evLCK EPMWorkStatusevMBR EPMSelectMemberevMNU EPMExecuteAPIevPRO EPMMemberPropertyevBNV EPMBook

evCGP EPMCommentPartialContextevCGT EPMCommentFullContextevCOM EPMSaveComment

evPRO EPMMemberPropertyevPRP EPMDimensionPropertyevRNG EPMCellRangesevRTI EPMRefreshTime

evCVW EPMContextMemberevDES EPMMemberDescevDIM EPMDimensionType

e e es eevSND EPMSaveDataevSVR EPMServerevTIM EPMMemberOffset


evDNV EPMDocumentListevGET EPMRetrieveData

evUSR EPMUserOsCLD EPMDocument

Cell Based Formulas

Due to the new EPM add-in client and the way expansions are now handled, there are several BPC 7.5 functions that are no longer supported:

EVEXP

EVENE

EVNXP

EVSETEVSET

EVLST

EVPXR

EVHOT (becomes “Quick links” functionality in the EPM add-in)


API, Custom Menus, evMNU and Books Templates

API: EPM add-in contains a new public API with new functions. For this reason, BPC 7.5

ill k d ill b i d i ll S lmacro names will not work anymore and will not be migrated automatically. Some manual adjustments will be required.

Custom menus: Custom menus functionality is no longer provided in BPC 10. Customers should move to BPF functionality or use the new Workspace concept from the Web interface.

MNUevMNU: evMNU function is still supported, but will need to be updated manually with the new macro name from the new public API.

Books and distributionBook and distribution templates (definition) are automatically migrated and can be edited directly through Excel or through the new dedicated UI. Published books will need to be

t d i


generated again.


The EVDRE migration tool exists for helping customers to migrate their BPC 7.5 EVDRE t i EPM dd i t Y th t l i th M b ttreports in EPM add-in reports. You can access the tool via the More button.

Several migration options are available: Active Worksheet, Active Workbook, Planning an consolidation Server, and Local. Click OK.



Once the migration has been finalized, a pop-up window is displayed:

The generated report layout should reflect the same expansions in row and column axes, compared to the Memberset used in EVDRE expansion range.

Additi ll f tti h t h b t ti ll t d d fill d i ith thAdditionally, a new formatting sheet has been automatically created, and filled-in with the formats defined in your initial EVDRE Format range.

Finally, click the Refresh button to view the result.


y,

EVDRE Reports Migration: Things to Know

Currently, both formatting and report layouts are migrated, as well as most of the EVDRE tioptions.

Sorting, ranking, suppressing, and inserting options are not yet migrated.

In case of customized reports, some manual adjustments will be required.

As for every migration process, the EVDRE migration tool doesn’t prevent the customer to check, modify, and validate the report after the migration.

A migration log will be generated after each migration process.You can find it through the More button and click LogYou can find it through the More button, and click Log.

The EVDRE migration tool is documented in detail in theEPM add-in User Guide.


BPC 7.5 MigrationLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain how to migrate BPC 7.5 reports built with former EV functionsExplain how to migrate BPC 7.5 EVDRE reports















p g g ycountries.

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 10.0, Version for SAP Consolidation 10.0, Version for SAP NetWeaver

MS Word & PowerPoint Integration

MS Word & PowerPoint IntegrationLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain the MS Word Integration with BPC 10.0Explain the MS PPT Integration with BPC 10.0


Business Example

Organizations that require Month or Year-end reviews in a Microsoft g qWord or PowerPoint format can now directly link EPM data to their reviews without having to go into Microsoft Excel or rely on screenshots. This greatly simplifies the process for creating and maintaining highly engaging and relevant presentations based on a consistent set ofengaging and relevant presentations based on a consistent set of Report data.


Retrieving EPM Data With Word/PowerPointBenefitsBenefits

Benefits of this feature include:Benefits of this feature include:Easy inclusion of the EPM Data in an organization's existing Review formatSupporting all standard Microsoft formatting optionsPermitting the data embedded in Word/PowerPoint documents to be updated dynamically


Process Overview

Summary steps to execute:y p1. Establish a connection from the Word/PowerPoint document to an EPM Source.2. Create a new Report or copy and paste an existing Report to embed a table in

the Document/Presentation. Alternatively, you may insert a Single Value.3. Format the table or Single Value.


Establish a Connection From the Word Document to an EPM SourceEPM Source

Open Microsoft Word.On the EPM Tab, click Log On.

On the EPM Logon Popup, for Connection click <...>.O th “EPM C ti M ” l t i ti ti d li k OKOn the “EPM - Connection Manager” pop-up, select an existing connection and click OK or click Add...(Connection). Enter username and password and click Logon.


Establish a Connection From the PowerPoint Presentation to an EPM Sourceto an EPM Source

Open Microsoft PowerPoint.On the EPM Tab, click Log On.



Create a new Report to Embed a Table in the Document/PresentationDocument/Presentation

In the EPM Ribbon, click New Report.Move Dimensions and Measures to Row Axis, Column Axis and Page Axis Dimensions as required.You may also use the Report Editor Popup or use the Pane on the right hand side to edit ReportsReports.Click OK.


Copy and Paste a Report From MS Excel or Other Document/Presentation to Embed a TableDocument/Presentation to Embed a Table

Select your report in MS Excel and use Report Actions>Copy Report to copy a Report from the MS Excel worksheet.Open Word or PowerPoint and on the EPM tab select Report Actions>Paste Report.

MS ExcelMS Excel

MS PowerPoint


Embed a Single Data Value

On the EPM Tab of Word/PowerPoint, select Insert Data.On the “EPM – Member selector” pop-up be sure to make selections for every relevant dimension and measure. Only single selections for each dimension and measure are possible. Default values from the EPM Context Panel will be used for any other Dimensions andDefault values from the EPM Context Panel will be used for any other Dimensions and Measures not specifically selected in the EPM-Member selector pop-up.


Format the Result Data in Word and PowerPoint

Select the table inserted by the Report.In Microsoft Word or PowerPoint select the Design Tab and select a Table Style.Other basic Design and font formatting options in Word or PowerPoint can be applied to the Result table.You may also use the standard Charting in Word and PowerPoint on this tabular reportYou may also use the standard Charting in Word and PowerPoint on this tabular report output.


EPM Office Client Features not Supported in Word/PowerPointWord/PowerPoint

The following features are not supported when inserting an EPM Add-in report into Word/PowerPoint:Standard Excel features. For example, excel formulas are not recognized in Word/PowerPointExcel EA Formatting Template is not supported in Word/PowerPointExcel EA Formatting Template is not supported in Word/PowerPoint.In Word/PowerPoint, Page Headers are not shown in the Report; they are just used as filters.Data input is only possible in Excel (for Data Sources based on BPC Web Services).You can insert single values only in Word/PowerPoint.You cannot access Data Manager from Word/PowerPoint


MS Word & PowerPoint IntegrationLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Insert an entire reportInsert an individual amountFormat and publish a documentList the differences with the Excel interface















p g g ycountries.

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and j gConsolidation 10.0, version for MicrosoftMicrosoftName>Saving Data and Comments to BPC

Saving Data and Comments to BPCLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yInput data Refresh/send dataInput BPC data with EV functionsUse the 3 planning functions (spread, trend, weight)Input and retrieve commentsInput and retrieve comments with EV functions


Save data and comments to BPC1. Input data

Enable data input2. Input comments

Enable comments input (BPC NW)Data input and specific formattingData input with functions

Input and retrieve commentsComments input with functions

Enable data input

Data input from the EPM add-in is only allowed on a BPC source system, and through a Webservice connection, called “Planning and Consolidation”. g , g

By default, when opening the EPM add-in interface directly from the Web portal, every connection to BPC is using Webservice, in order to allow data input.p


Enable data input (cont.)

By default, every new report is not flagged as being an input form. To enable data input, you should check the box called “Use as Input Form” in the report p , y p poptions or in the sheet options.

Report options accessible from: Sheet options accessible from:Edit Report buttonEdit Report buttonNew Report button


Data input

Data input is performed by directly entering data in the cells of an input form, as long as each member defining the data region is a base level member.g g g

Once data input has been activated, the “Save Data” button is enabled in the “Data Input” ribbon.

You then have the same kind of pop-up options to save data to the database as in BPC 7.5, but displayed differently:

S W k h t D tSave Worksheet DataSave Workbook DataSave and Refresh Worksheet DataSave and Refresh Workbook DataSave and Refresh Workbook DataChange Work StatusValidate Data (only on MS platform)


Data input – Specific formatting

Using the dynamic formatting sheet (available by enabling Apply Dynamic g y g ( y g pp y yFormatting in the Sheet option), specific Member/Property Formatting can be defined to support data input.

For example, you can highlight calculated/inputable members (based on theFor example, you can highlight calculated/inputable members (based on the CALC property) or emphasize an updated cell.


Data input with Planning features

Once data input has been activated, the “Planning” button is enabled in the p g“Data Input” ribbon.

The following Planning features can be used to help entering data in an input form:form:

The Spread feature allows to allocate a specified value among selected destination cells– The value may be allocated either equally or weighted by anThe value may be allocated either equally or weighted by an

optional range of weighting factorsThe Trend feature allows to increase/decrease a source value by a factor among selected destination cellscellsThe Weight feature allows to allocate a specified value by weighting factors among selected destination cells


Data input

Once your input form has been built, you can submit the records to the database by clicking the “Save Data” button:y g

A pop-up is displayed with the number of records to submit.records to submit.

Then, the confirmation screen appears,providing you the status of the sending

If th bl tprocess. If there are problems, an accurate error message will be displayed.

You can choose to deactivate the confirmationscreen. This action will uncheck the option called “Display warning when saving data or comment” in the “User options”. You can of course re-enable it afterwards.


Data input with functions

Besides the way of inputting data directly in the report layout itself, you can also use the following cell-based formula to send records from a static report. g p

This new formula is the new name for BPC 7.5 EVSND function:

EPMSaveData(cell;connection name;member1;member2; ; memberN)EPMSaveData(cell;connection name;member1;member2;....; memberN)

You can find this formula under the new categorycalled EPMFunctions when clickingthe Insert Function button.

BPC 7.5 EVSND function is still recognizedand supported Nevertheless the Excel wizardand supported. Nevertheless, the Excel wizarddisplayed when building them is only availablefor the new EPM function names.


Enable comments input in BPC 10 NW

By default, all BPC 10 NW models do not allow comments. Even if you have a dedicated task profile allowing comment management, you have to enable p g g , ycomments for the model through the BPC 10 NW web administration page:

Click Models under Dimensions and Models node, and edit the model where comments i t h ld b bl d Ch k th E bl C t h kb dinput should be enabled. Check the Enable Comments checkbox and save.


Input and retrieve comments

There are two ways of inputting and retrieving comments:

Through the EPM Add-in UIThrough EPM functions

The Comment Management UI can be accessed from the Data Input ribbon. You can then choose to write your comments for the active context or for another custom context.

Using Active Context will write thecomment on all ID’s of all dimensions


belonging to the context.

Input and retrieve comments (cont.)

Using the “Custom Context” will allow to choose where the comments should be saved, independently of the current context., p y

In this process, there is a choice to eitherinclude all dimensions (by choosing a particularinclude all dimensions (by choosing a particular ID for each), or to bypass one or several dimensions by selecting the ALL value.

N t thi ti ill l ll th f thNote: this action will also allow the use of the newEPMCommentPartialContext cell-basedformula, which works exactly the same as the previous EVCGP function.



Sending the comment to the back-end will also display the summary window:

Remember this summary screen could be deactivated from the User options


Remember, this summary screen could be deactivated from the User options Others tab Display Warning when Saving Data or Comments


Select the “Find comments” link to retrieve comments associated to the current context or another custom one:

Clicking the “Find” buttonwill open a BPC web client page showing the results.


Cell-based formulas used for comments

In terms of inputting and retrieving comments, the following cell-based formulas can be used:

EPMSaveComment– Equals the BPC 7 5 EVCOM function which is still supportedEquals the BPC 7.5 EVCOM function, which is still supported.– This function enables you to enter or modify a comment for a full set of members.

EPMCommentFullContextE l h BPC EVCGT f i hi h i ill d– Equals the BPC 7.5 EVCGT function, which is still supported.

– This function retrieve all comments associated to a set of dimension members that is fully defined.

EPMCommentPartialContext– Equals the BPC 7.5 EVCGP function, which is still supported.– This function retrieves all comments associated to a set of

dimension members that is partially defined. Any members not specified in the function are ALL taken into account.


Cell-based formulas used for comments (cont.)

Using cell-based formulas to input or retrieve comments, there is an option to display BPC comments as Excel cell comments:p y

Currently, this option is onlyavailable for EPM functionslinked to comments, but notfor comments entered fromthe UI.


Saving Data and Comments to BPCLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Input data Refresh/send dataInput BPC data with EV functionsUse the 3 planning functions (spread, trend, weight)Input and retrieve commentsInput and retrieve comments with EV functions















p g g ycountries.


Operation & Data Submission

Operation & Data SubmissionLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDisplay Business Process Flows informationDisplay lock and Work Status informationDescribe the EPMWorkStatus cell-based formulaDescribe validation of the submitted data (only for BPC MS)


Topicsp

1. Business Process Flow information in EPM Add-in

2. Work StatusDisplay/Change Work Status informationDisplay Work Status information with EPM functionp y

3. Data Validation (Only on the MS platform)

Display Business Process Flow Information

When fulfilling a Business Process Flow Activity taking place in EPM Add-in, a new tab called Activity appears p , y ppin the Task Pane.

The Activity tab is split in three different parts:The upper part provides contextual information related to theThe upper part provides contextual information related to the specific Business Process FlowThe middle part provides the action name and description as well as the related/linked Actions to the Target ActionThe bottom part allows you to browse back to the Activity Workspace on the Web client


Display/Change Work Status Information

To display or change the Work Status information of a data region, you should use the Change Work g , y gStatus item of the Save Data button.

This will trigger the below Work Status Wizard to pop up.pop up.

Data region is displayed in the upper part of the wizard.Descendants can be included in the Works Status changeThe lower part displays the current WorkThe lower part displays the current Work Status of the selected data region and allows it to be changed to another Work Status according to security


Display Work Status Information With EPM Function

Besides displaying the Work Status with the Work Status Change wizard, you can also use the following cell-based formula to display Work Status g p yinformation in a report.

The following function is the equivalent of the BPC 7.5 EVLCK function:

EPMWorkStatus(connection name;parameter;member1;…;memberN)The above parameter allows you to display either the Status, the username of the user that changed it or the date when the last change occurredchanged it or the date when the last change occurred.You can find this function under the new category called EPMFunctions when clickingthe Insert Function button.BPC 7.5 EVLCK function can still be used and is still supported.


Data Validation (Only on the MS Platform)

After having entered and saved data, you can trigger d t lid ti f th S D t b ttdata validation from the Save Data button.

Data validation will check that no lock is preventing you to change the Work Status information. It will also

If this is the case, a confirmation message is displayed.

check that the Validation account set in the Administration equals zero.

If not, you can choose to open a pre-defined Validation Report (addressed by the LOCKREPORT parameter in the Administration) that will display the incorrect data.After fixing this incorrect data, you can trigger Data Validation again.


Operation & Data SubmissionLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Display Business Process Flows informationDisplay lock and Work Status informationDescribe the EPMWorkStatus cell-based formulaDescribe validation of the submitted data (only for BPC MS)















p g g ycountries.



Using Planning & Consolidation Features in the EPM Add-inLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain how to use Planning & Consolidation features in the EPM add-in



EPM connection types JournalsEPM connection typesBuilding a reportBPC new templatesData save and comments

JournalsOwnership hierarchiesEPM connectorBOE publishing

Work status and BPFDrill-throughsPublishing to BPC web

p gTransition from BPC 7.5 to EPM add-inQuicklinksCollection, distribution and offline mode


EPM applications can be reached via several connection types:pp ypSSAS – SQL Server Analysis Services

BW – SAP Business Warehouse

ODBO – OLD DB for OLAPSAP EPM add in 10 0XMLA – XML for Analysis

WS – Web Services

SAP EPM add‐in 10.0

ODBO

SAP FinancialSAP

ProfitabilitySAP Strategy Management

SAP BusinessObjects

SAP BusinessObjects

SSAS, BW cubes

ODBO ODBO ODBO

WS WSODBO

Consolidation10.0

Designer cubes

Profitability and Cost

Management 10.0

Management 10.0

BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation,Version for

NetWeaver 10.0

BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation,Version for

Microsoft 10.0


+ Support of non EPM SSAS and BW cubes (through ODBO technology)


There are 3 types of connections in EPM add-in:yp

Local/BOE: – These types are for ODBO connections, which can be built for

FC SSAS cubes FC BW cubes SSAS standard cubes BWFC SSAS cubes, FC BW cubes, SSAS standard cubes, BW standard cubes, PCM ODBO provider, SSM ODBO provider, BPC MS ODBO provider and BPC NW ODBO provider.

– An ODBO connection does not allow the input of data, and is only used for data retrieve. Data Manager features are also not reachable with ODBO connection. But, the usage of custom members (to build some complex MDX calculated members) can be only performed with ODBO connection.

Planning & Consolidation: g– This type is for Webservice connections, on the top of BPC MS and BPC NW. – A webservice connection allows the input of data, and the use of the Data Manager ribbon, but does

not support the creation of custom members .


Building a Report

When speaking about report creation, the EPM add-in is really intuitive and powerful, even for non-experienced users.powerful, even for non experienced users.

As a first step, a detailed lesson on the following topics are available in the EPM Add-in Learning map:

Unit 2: Excel interface Part 2Unit 2: Excel interface – Part 2Unit 2: Building Reports – Part 2


BPC New Templates

15 new Excel workbook templates, created with EPM add-in, have been provided in new Shell environment: 10 of them are in Reports/ templates folder and 5 of themnew Shell environment: 10 of them are in Reports/ templates folder and 5 of them are in Input Schedules/ templates folder, accessible from the Open button.


Data Save and Comments

Planning and consolidation connection type offers the ability to send data and comments to the back-end.comments to the back end.

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found under:Unit 9: Saving Data and Comments to BPC (MS)Unit 8: Saving Data and Comments to BPC (NW)Unit 8: Saving Data and Comments to BPC (NW)


Work Status & BPF

Planning and consolidation connection type offers the ability to change work status and retrieve them, as well as displaying BPF steps, which need to be performed.and retrieve them, as well as displaying BPF steps, which need to be performed.

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found under:Unit 9: Operation & Data Submission (MS)Unit 8: Operation & Data Submission (NW)Unit 8: Operation & Data Submission (NW)


Drill-throughs

Drill-through feature remains unchanged compared to BPC 7.5 version. The biggest change is about how to access this feature in the new EPM add-in.change is about how to access this feature in the new EPM add in.

There are still two kinds of drill-throughs available for BPC MS (drill-through to table and drill-through to url). There is only drill-through to url available for BPC NW.

f f f CBoth types of drill-through are still defined in the administration console of BPC. From the EPM add-in, you can only run the pre-defined drill-throughs.When running those drill-throughs, the pre-defined parameters will be sent to the target, as well as the EPM context and the selected report cell context. Then, data will be retrieved in the target. For Drill-through to table (available for BPC MS only), the user can decide to open the table either in a new Excel sheet orin a web browser.


Publishing to BPC Web

You may have the ability to directly open the BPC Web part to access or post documents, depending on assigned your task profile.documents, depending on assigned your task profile.

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found under:Unit 9: Data Collection using Excel Workbooks (MS)Unit 8: Data Collection using Excel Workbooks (NW)Unit 8: Data Collection using Excel Workbooks (NW)


Journals

The journal module can be accessed from the Journal button in the EPM add-in interface. Basically, it will open the Journals section on the web portal.interface. Basically, it will open the Journals section on the web portal.


Ownership Hierarchies

The ownership hierarchy is available in a consolidation model. To use the ownership hierarchy, you simply need stacking together both Groups and Entity dimensions inhierarchy, you simply need stacking together both Groups and Entity dimensions in row or column axis of a report, in any order, to apply the ownership hierarchy to these dimensions.

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found under EPM Add-in Learning Map:A detailed lesson on this topic could be found under EPM Add-in Learning Map:Unit 3: Consolidation


EPM Connector

With the EPM Connector, you can easily create and embed some dashboards connected to a BPC data source.connected to a BPC data source.

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found under:Unit 9: Creating Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector (MS)Unit 8: Creating Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector (NW)Unit 8: Creating Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector (NW)


BOE Publishing

The EPM add-in for Microsoft Office provides the ability to publish a workbook of reports to the BI launch pad, the web portal of SAP BusinessObjectsreports to the BI launch pad, the web portal of SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise (BOE).

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found under EPM Add-in Learning Map:

Unit 3: Sharing reports - Part 2


Transition From BPC 7.5 to EPM Add-in

The EPM Add-in has been built with a complete new API and new cell-based formulas. Therefore, several points should be taken into account in order to makeformulas. Therefore, several points should be taken into account in order to make previous BPC 7.5 reports and macros run into the new EPM Add-in interface.

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found under:Unit 9: BPC 7 5 Migration (MS)Unit 9: BPC 7.5 Migration (MS)Unit 8: BPC 7.5 Migration (NW)


Quicklinks

Former BPC 7.5 EVHOT function is not supported anymore. However, the EPM Add-in offers the possibility to link some reports together with theAdd in offers the possibility to link some reports together with the new Quicklinks feature.

A detailed lesson on this topic could be found under EPM Add-in Learning Map:

Unit 2: Analyzing data – Part 2


Collection, Distribution, and Offline Mode

The EPM Add-in offers an enhanced user interface for creating books or distribution workbooks. At the end, this interface creates exactly the same book or distributionworkbooks. At the end, this interface creates exactly the same book or distribution template than in BPC 7.5.

A detailed lesson on data collection is available there:Unit 9: Data collection using Excel Workbooks (MS)Unit 9: Data collection using Excel Workbooks (MS)Unit 8: Data collection using Excel Workbooks (NW)

There is also a detailed topic on the Offline mode on the EPM add-in Learning map, which is equivalent to Park&Go feature in BPC 7.5:

Unit 3: Sharing Reports – Part 1


Using Planning & Consolidation Features in the EPM Add-inLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain how to use Planning & Consolidation features in the EPM add-in















p g g ycountries.


Creating Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector

Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM ConnectorLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yDescribe how to create Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector


Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM ConnectorIntroductionIntroduction

How to use the Crystal Dashboards with SAP BusinessObjects Planning and y j gConsolidation, Microsoft version:

Design a dashboard and export it to Flash format in SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard DesignInsert a Flash object into a reportInsert a Flash object into a reportPublish a Flash Object to the WebDisplay the content of .txt file in the SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Design


Business Example

Your organization wants to embed EPM data in a Corporate Intranet g pSite or within an Annual report to Shareholders. You want advanced and rich visualization coupled with the reliability of being tied directly to the EPM data at source. You must therefore link Xcelsius models to your EPM dataEPM data.


Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM ConnectorBenefitsBenefits

Benefits of using Crystal Dashboards reports with SPBO BPC:g y pOne screen information - benefits of having all the critical information in just one screen rather than flipping through multiple pages.Information at a Glance - Present a wide number of different metrics in a single consolidated viewconsolidated view.Real Time Information TrackingHere are few types of dashboards their purpose and benefits: – Benefits of Finance Dashboard: Monitor Revenue, Profit, Loss and Expenses – Benefits of HR Dashboard: Monitor Employee activity, Headcount growth, Expenses and so on– Benefits of IT dashboard : Monitor system activity, this may include database monitoring, server

monitoring, memory metrics and so on– Benefits of Inventory Dashboard : Monitor Inventory levels, warehouse and item information, orders y y

and so on


Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM ConnectorPrerequisitesPrerequisites

Before using Xcelsius models with EPM data, ensure that the following g gprerequisites have been met.

To build Xcelsius models based on EPM data:Xcelsius 2010 (Dashboard Designer) is installedThe EPM 10.0 Connector Add-on has been added to your Xcelsius installAn EPM add-in report has been embedded into an MS Excel file

To run Xcelsius based flash files on EPM data:Adobe Flash Player installed on client PCsCross Domain files established on the server side


Download XcelsiusXcelsius® 2008 SP3 or Xcelsius® 2010Xcelsius® 2008 SP3 or Xcelsius® 2010

Available on Service Marketplacep


EPM Connector

EPM connector Used to create and configure a connection to more EPM sources, including SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, Microsoft versionIs a component of the EPM add-inIs a component of the EPM add-in.It is installed as an add-in to SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard Design.– To install the add-on in Xcelsius®,

choose File > Manage Add-Ons


Process OverviewSteps to PerformSteps to Perform

To link an Xcelsius model to EPM data, the following summary steps g y pmust be performed:1. Open Xcelsius and open or create your Excel file with an embedded EPM add-in

report2. Generate a Report Definition within the Excel sheet3. Establish a Data Connection using the EPM Connector4. Build an Xcelsius visualization5. Generate a SWF file6. Optionally, embed the SWF file into Excel with or without an embedded EPM

add-in report7. Optionally, embed the SWF file into Word or PowerPoint8. Optionally, run the SWF in standalone mode


Process OverviewOpen Xcelsius and Open Your Excel FileOpen Xcelsius and Open Your Excel File

Start XcelsiusEither– Select Data>Import.– Select your Excel file with data already embedded by the EPM add-in.– Click OK– Click OK.Or– Use the EPM Tab inside the excel file that Xcelsius provides on starting Xcelsius and embed the EPM

report directly


Process OverviewGenerate a Report Definition Within the Excel SheetGenerate a Report Definition Within the Excel Sheet

For Dynamic EPM data in the Xcelsius model, choose any free cell in the excel sheet where the Report data exists and enter =GetReportDefinition()If required, click Refresh to Log On and q , gConnect. This will update the Report Definition cell with report detailsGetReportDefinition function is supported only in top of ODBO typesupported only in top of ODBO type connection*


Process OverviewUse EPM Connector to Define a Data Connection in XcelsiusUse EPM Connector to Define a Data Connection in Xcelsius

In the Xcelsius Menu bar, setup a new EPM Connector data connection via Data>Connections… and then Add>EPM Connector_10Enter a name for this Xcelsius connectionSelect Application (For example, Planning and Consolidation, Microsoft version)Select Operation (EPM Report)S l t R t D fi itiSelect Report Definition (This is the cell in the Excel file now populated with the EPM report Definition)


Process OverviewBuild an Xcelsius VisualizationBuild an Xcelsius Visualization

Select an Xcelsius control such as a table or chartMap the source data for the control to the result set data from the EPM Connector Data ConnectionAdd a Connection Refresh button to the visualization as required


Process OverviewGenerate a SWF FileGenerate a SWF File

In Xcelsius Design mode, select File>Export>Flash (SWF)…Name the Flash file, select a location for Export and click OK.


Process OverviewEmbedded a SWF File Into ExcelEmbedded a SWF File Into Excel

Open an Excel file with an EPM add-in report already embeddedIn the EPM ribbon, select More>Flash Objects, jClick Add, to add a new Flash Object into your Excel sheetAny changes to the Report will also automatically update the Flash Object*After updating the EPM Context Panel or the Page Header of the Report, the SWF will

d tupdate


Process OverviewEmbedded a SWF File Into Word or PowerpointEmbedded a SWF File Into Word or Powerpoint

Open a Word Document or a PowerPoint presentation with an EPM add-in report already embeddedIn the EPM ribbon, select Flash ObjectsClick Add, to add a new Flash Object into your Document or PresentationAny changes to the Report will also automatically update the Flash Object*Any changes to the Report will also automatically update the Flash ObjectAfter updating the EPM Context Panel or the Page Header of the Report, the SWF will update


EPM ConnectorOperationsOperations

You can perform the following operations and combine them. p g pRetrieve data, using a report created with the EPM add-inRetrieve the list of databases/environments/InfoAreas for a specific data sourceRetrieve the list of cubes/models/InfoProviders for a specific d t b / i t/I f Adatabase/environment/InfoAreaRetrieve the list of dimensions for a specific cube/model/InfoProvider. Retrieve members/characteristic values for a specific dimension

The following operation types are only available for SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation:

Input and save dataRetrieve the list of context membersRetrieve text contained in a text file from the Documents viewRetrieve property values for dimension members


EPM ConnectorFeatures Common to the OperationFeatures Common to the Operation

Common features:When a drop-down list contains a long list of items, you can enter the beginning of the item you want to select, then press Enter. The list is filtered and displays only the items beginning with the characters you have just entered. All the drop-down lists identified by a hand icon enables you to select or automaticallyAll the drop-down lists identified by a hand icon enables you to select or automatically retrieve items: – Bind - Enables you to select a cell in the sheet– Retrieve - Automatically retrieves a list of items available for selection, depending on

other filled in areasother filled in areasIn the Output section, you select two refresh options: – Refresh on Load to automatically refresh the data before refreshing all the

Dashboard Design componentsf S f f– Refresh Every [number] Second to set an automatic refresh frequency


Creating Crystal Dashboards With the EPM ConnectorLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Describe how to create Crystal Dashboards with the EPM Connector















p g g ycountries.


Crystal Dashboard Functions

Crystal Dashboard FunctionsLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain Crystal Dashboard functions with BPC dataDisplay the content of a .txt file stored in content libraryInput data in BPC from dashboards


Topicsp

1. Data input in BPC from X l i D hb dXcelsius Dashboards


3. Display BPFs Status with EPM Connector

Crystal Dashboard FunctionsBenefitsBenefits

Benefits of this feature include:Extended Analyzer is obsoleteReport Definition with the EPM Add in More Operations are available with the EPM Connector



Log On to the Source System

Create your Report



Insert the Function: =GetReportDefinition()


Data Input in BPC From XcelsiusEPM ConnectorEPM Connector

Customize an EPM Connection


Topicsp




.txt Parameter

Upload Document


EPM Connection with operation T R t i T t f LibType Retrieve Text from Library



Topicsp





Crystal Dashboard FunctionsLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Explain Crystal Dashboard functions with BPC data:Display the content of a .txt file stored in content libraryInput data in BPC from dashboards















p g g ycountries.


Data Collection Using Excel Workbooks

Data Collection Using Excel WorkbooksLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yUpload a documentExplain Email CollectionExplain “variable time” in the book template (Email Distribution)Work with Cell-based formulas related to Documents views


Upload a Document

To upload a document you have the choice of two processes:A document can be uploaded to the Web Portal by Publishing a document via a portal distribution.A document can be distributed via the Distribution Wizard on a specific folder (locally or on a network path). In that case, you should:p ) y– Create a template for your distribution– Use the Distribution Wizard to either send out the workbook immediately or schedule its

distribution either thru email or posting it to a distribution folder.


Upload a Document on the Portal

Select Open Planning and Consolidation Document View link– The Documents section on the web

portal appears– Browse the workbook to be uploaded in

the Add document window– Select the type and subtype

where applicable– Click OK



Before launching a distribution, you must have defined a distribution templateThen you can launch the Distribution Wizard from the Distribute link and select the appropriate distribution method



Select Switch to Offline Mode and save to folderEnter the path to the folder location (local or network path)Clicking the Next button will create theClicking the Next button will create thespecific files on the specific folder.


Email Collection

Before collecting data from an email mailbox, you should have performed a distribution on the same connectionThen, launch the Collection Wizard:– Select the Outlook mailbox optionSelect the Outlook mailbox option– Select the Working Folder– Select emails with Workbooks


Variable Time in the Book Template

When creating or modifying a template using a Planning and Consolidation g y g p g gconnection a variable time field is displayed.

If you select a Time member in a section, it overrides the member selected in the Variable Time field for this sectionVariable Time field for this section.


EPM Functions to Use for Documents

Once you have uploaded documents to the Web Portal you can call and work with y p ythese documents from a work book with any of the following EPM functions:

EPMBookEPMDocumentEPMD tLi tEPMDocumentListEPMUrl


Adding an EPM Function to a Workbook

You add the function from the EPM ribbon > Insert Function wizard

Select the function and click OKSelect the function and click OK


EPMBook Function



EPMDocument Function



EPMDocumentList Function



EPMUrl Function

After adding the function to the workbook, specify the required parametersg p y q p


Data Collection Using Excel WorkbooksLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Upload a documentExplain Email CollectionExplain “variable time” in the book template (Email Distribution)Work with Cell-based formulas related to Documents views















p g g ycountries.


MS Word & PowerPoint Integration

MS Word & PowerPoint IntegrationLesson ObjectivesLesson Objectives

After completing this lesson, you will be able to:p g , yExplain the MS Word Integration with BPC 10.0Explain the MS PPT Integration with BPC 10.0


Business Example

Organizations that require Month or Year-end reviews in a Microsoft g qWord or PowerPoint format can now directly link EPM data to their reviews without having to go into Microsoft Excel or rely on screenshots. This greatly simplifies the process for creating and maintaining highly engaging and relevant presentations based on a consistent set ofengaging and relevant presentations based on a consistent set of Report data.


Retrieving EPM Data With Word/PowerPointBenefitsBenefits

Benefits of this feature include:Benefits of this feature include:Easy inclusion of the EPM Data in an organization's existing Review formatSupporting all standard Microsoft formatting optionsPermitting the data embedded in Word/PowerPoint documents to be updated dynamically


Process Overview

Summary steps to execute:y p1. Establish a connection from the Word/PowerPoint document to an EPM Source.2. Create a new Report or copy and paste an existing Report to embed a table in

the Document/Presentation. Alternatively, you may insert a Single Value.3. Format the table or Single Value.


Establish a Connection From the Word Document to an EPM SourceEPM Source

Open Microsoft Word.On the EPM Tab, click Log On.



Establish a Connection From the PowerPoint Presentation to an EPM Sourceto an EPM Source

Open Microsoft PowerPoint.On the EPM Tab, click Log On.



Create a new Report to Embed a Table in the Document/PresentationDocument/Presentation

In the EPM Ribbon, click New Report.Move Dimensions and Measures to Row Axis, Column Axis and Page Axis Dimensions as required.You may also use the Report Editor Popup or use the Pane on the right hand side to edit ReportsReports.Click OK.


Copy and Paste a Report From MS Excel or Other Document/Presentation to Embed a TableDocument/Presentation to Embed a Table

Select your report in MS Excel and use Report Actions>Copy Report to copy a Report from the MS Excel worksheet.Open Word or PowerPoint and on the EPM tab select Report Actions>Paste Report.

MS ExcelMS Excel

MS PowerPoint


Embed a Single Data Value

On the EPM Tab of Word/PowerPoint, select Insert Data.On the “EPM – Member selector” pop-up be sure to make selections for every relevant dimension and measure. Only single selections for each dimension and measure are possible. Default values from the EPM Context Panel will be used for any other Dimensions andDefault values from the EPM Context Panel will be used for any other Dimensions and Measures not specifically selected in the EPM-Member selector pop-up.


Format the Result Data in Word and PowerPoint

Select the table inserted by the Report.In Microsoft Word or PowerPoint select the Design Tab and select a Table Style.Other basic Design and font formatting options in Word or PowerPoint can be applied to the Result table.You may also use the standard Charting in Word and PowerPoint on this tabular reportYou may also use the standard Charting in Word and PowerPoint on this tabular report output.


EPM Office Client Features not Supported in Word/PowerPointWord/PowerPoint

The following features are not supported when inserting an EPM Add-in report into Word/PowerPoint:Standard Excel features. For example, excel formulas are not recognized in Word/PowerPointExcel EA Formatting Template is not supported in Word/PowerPointExcel EA Formatting Template is not supported in Word/PowerPoint.In Word/PowerPoint, Page Headers are not shown in the Report; they are just used as filters.Data input is only possible in Excel (for Data Sources based on BPC Web Services).You can insert single values only in Word/PowerPoint.You cannot access Data Manager from Word/PowerPoint


MS Word & PowerPoint IntegrationLesson SummaryLesson Summary

You should now be able to:Insert an entire reportInsert an individual amountFormat and publish a documentList the differences with the Excel interface















p g g ycountries.